The URL can be used to link to this page

ELC-12-1631 \_ 1 f � Miami Shores Village r_�'_FSO . �- Building Department 2W 10050 N.E.2nd Avenue,Miami Shores,Florida 33138 Tel:(305)795.2204 Fax: (305)756.8972 BY:---L40.4---- ---- INSPECTION'S PHONE NUMBER: (305)762.4949 I BUILDING Permit No. PERMIT APPLICATION Master Permit No.Fi-jC) 2—I(p 31 FBC 20 Permit Type: Electrical , OWNER:Name(Fee Simple Titleholder):MIAn k CJ ^IO e S �(L S 3 u 1QY1GI V1 C' VrPone#: t 305 75-1 q Sq i Addressn(a Z (yE (D ,- 2792TCity: MIA YYl1 State: H L Zip: 53 138 -27-4?- Tenant/Lessee enant/Lessee Name: Phone#: Email: JOB ADDRESS: 602 Ne- 96 S feeA City: Miami Shores County: Miami Dade Zip: Folio/Parcel#: 11 )2-0(001-41 -1 t 0 4 Is the Building Historically Designated: Yes NO Flood Zone: CONTRACTOR:Company Name:Rf A kt jk EXT ► Via &C&D f,�Phone#: q5.1 4'-1 1 13 Address: 337'5 COmm ¢rc _ PArk(,06t City: Lf i fA m A"<' State: F L Zip: 3302 5 Qualifier Name: Cqy-10 S C)O vn ee Phone#: State Certification or Registration#: EP2 M If-91 7 Certificate of Competency#: - Contact Phone#: q5q 791 1313 Email Address: nar0l)Aa. �Gc V1C ��Y�'U V1G,�c7KVS, Cp»� DESIGNER: Architect/Engineer: Phone#: Value of Work for this Permit:$ (A, a qO 00 Square/Linear Footage of Work: Type of Work: ❑Address ❑Alteration ❑New ❑Repair/Replace ❑Demolition DescriptionofWork: 3h5V&1t "J�\Il cuc' to -Fly-Q- MAfM r Submittal Fee$ Permit Fee$ • l0 CCF$ CO/CC$ Scanning Fee$ 3 oD Radon Fee$ DBPR$ Bond$ Notary$ Training/Education Fee$ Technology Fee$ Double Fee$ Structural Review$ l �• �� TOTAL FEE NOW DUE$ • d� { Bonding Company's Name(if applicable) Bonding Company's Address City State Zip Mortgage Lender's Name(if applicable) Mortgage Lender's Address City State Zip Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet the standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK,PLUMBING,SIGNS, WELLS,POOLS,FURNACES,BOILERS,HEATERS,TANKS and AIR CONDITIONERS,ETC..... OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. "WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT." Notice to Applicant: As a condition to the issuance of a building permit with an estimated value exceeding $2500, the applicant must promise in good faith that a copy of the notice of commencement and construction lien law brochure will be delivered to the person whose property is subject to attachment. Also, a certified copy of the recorded notice of commencement must be posted at the job site for the first inspection which occurs seven (7) days after the building permit is issued. In the absence of such posted notice, the inspection will not be approved and a reinspection fee will be charged. Signature7l Signature_ Owner or Agent II Contractor The fore ing instrument w s a knowledged bef re me this p1 The foreg ing instrument was acknow d ed pefore m this day of. 20 by rr f (tel day of 20 6 by 1 who is personally known to me or who has produced who is personally known to me or who has produced As identification and who did take an oath. as identification and who did take an oath. NOTARY PUBLIC: NOTARY PUBLIC: Sign: Sign: { Print: Print: ,.••t�.rry� My Commission Expires: �] R.KILCREASE My Commission Expi t: C NNI�10 #EE 007393 = MMISSION#EE 007393 I X IRLE 17 2014 -:20 (PIKES:July 17,2014 •t` Bonded m ublic UndenNriters dE Bonded 7hru notary Public Underwriters r APPROVED B ®4/�! Plans Examiner Zoning Structural Review Clerk (Revised 07/10/07)(Revised 06/10/2009XRevised 3/15/09) oFT ,� STATE OF FLORIDA ' DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS LICENSING BOARD (850) 487-1395 1940 NORTH MONROE STREET TALLAHASSEE FL 32399-0783 GOMEZ, CARLOS RED HAWK FIRE &SECURITY, LLC 3375 COMMERCE PKWY MIRAMAR FL 33025 Congratulations! With this license you become one of the nearly one million Floridians licensed by the Department of Business and STATE OF FLORIDA Professional Regulation. Our professionals and businesses range DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND - from architects to yacht brokers,from boxers to barbeque restaurants, % PRO - and they keep Florida's economy strong. ,i .,_ EF20001077SSUED.b,02/06/2013 Eve da we work to improve the waywe do business in order to �`"A serve ou better. For information abot our services, lease to onto c itY p 9 CERT ALARM SYSTEM CTOR.I- www.myfloridalicense.com. There you can find more information . GOMEZ,'�CARLOS about our divisions and the regulations that impact you, subscribe t-^ .r-r RED.HAWK F RE,&:SE6URITY�LLC to department newsletters and learn more about the Department's ,; initiatives. Our mission at the Department is:License Efficiently, Regulate'Fairly. We constantly strive to serve you better so that you can serve your s :pis�CEt3TIFIED under the;.provisions of Ch.489 FS "- customers. Thank you for doing business in Florida, 4R Y - Ex iration date t AU.G31 201 �' .� "C1302060000686 and congratulations on your new license! IIAL i The Department of State is leading the commemoration of Florida's 500th anniversary in 2013 For more information, please go to www.VivaFlorida.org. i 91YA ftURIRA SUJ_ ` DETACH HERE STATE OF FLORIDA" DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION. .: :~. ��'• r ❑■ E ,ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS LICENSING BOARD The.AL'ARM;SYSTEM CONTRACTOR I' I' w 1 i S Named below'LS:CERTIFIED "U"n`d`er'the.provislons,ofChapter 4.89-FS.- -:�' - �. ` `'•� ` ., � • Explratlofl date AUG 31, 2014 { 'GOMEZ CARLOS �� V ev �1 RED HAWK FIRE-&,SEGURITY;-L,LC " . :'�\` - ��*`titi '.� � '� �' ii Il `';� MIFtAIVIAR: ''-.FL'33025 a .` ��` rl� %s VIVA f(ORIQA560. \.\ M � RICK SCOTT ISSUED: '02/06/2013 SEQ# 'L1302060000686 KEN LAWSON GOVERNOR - DISPLAY AS REQUIRED BY LAW SECRETARY BROWARD COUNTY LOCAL BUSINESS TAX RECEIPT 115 S. Andrews Ave., Rm. A-100, Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33301-1895—954-831-4000 VALID OCTOBER 1,2013 THROUGH SEPTEMBER 30,2014 DBA: Receipt#:ELEC RI CAL/ALARMS/CONTRACT Business Name: 32 RED HAWK FIRE & SECURITY LLC Business Type:Y (ALARM SYSTEM CONTR 1) Owner Name:CARLOS GOMEZ Business Opened:05/31/1991 Business Location:3375 COMMERCE PARKWAY State/County/Cert/Reg:EF20001077 MIRAMAR Exemption Code: Business Phone: Rooms Seats Emplo'yeesof Machines ; Professionals i For Vending Business Only Number of Machines: Vending Type: Tax Amount Transfer Fee' NSF Fee , �� Penalty —4 Prior.,Yearsf,% �Collection Cost Total Paid 27.00 0.00 "A-. 6 00 _ , - �.e 0'70& —' aM `0.00. . 0.00 27.00 THIS RECEIPT MUST BE POSTED CONSPICUOUSLY IN YOUR PLACE OF BUSINESS THIS BECOMES A TAX RECEIPT This tax is levied for the privilege of doing business within Broward County and is non-regulatory in nature. You must meet all County and/or Municipality planning WHEN VALIDATED and zoning requirements. This Business Tax Receipt must be transferred when the business is sold, business name has changed or you have moved the business location.This receipt does not indicate that the business is legal or that it is in compliance with State or local laws and regulations. Mailing Address: RED HAWK FIRE & SECURITY LLC Receipt #033-13-00000022 3375 COMMERCE PARKWAY Paid 10/01/2013 27.00 MIRAMAR, FL 33025 09/30/2013 Effective Date I 2013 -. 2014 i MIAMI-DADE COUNTY _eARTMENT OF PERMITTING, ENVIRONMENT AND REGULATORY AFFAIRS 11805 SW 26TH ST. SUITE 207 MIAMI FL, 33175 (786) 3 15-2 88 0 STATE CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATE OF VOLUNTARY REGISTRATION WITH MIAMI-DADE COUNTY ISSUED DECEMBER 21, 2012 THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT RED HAWK FIRE & SECURITY LLC CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATE NO. : EF20001077, TRADE: ELECTRICAL REGISTRATION EXPIRATION DATE: 08/31/2014 HAVING MET THE REGISTRATION REQUIREMENTS OF MIAMI-DADE COUNTY, IS REGISTERED AS A STATE CONTRACTOR IN THE FOLLOWING CATEGORY(S) : 0019 ALARM SYSTEM I STATE WITH ALL WORK TO BE DONE UNDER THE.SUPERVISION, DIRECTION AND CONTROL OF QUALIFYING AGENT GOMEZ CARLOS S.S.N. - -2929 ALTERATION, REPRODUCTION OR TRANSFER OF THIS CERTIFICATE IS PROHIBITED. CHARLES DANGER, P.E. SECRETARY, CONSTRUCTION TRADES QUALIFYING BOARD RED HAWK FIRE & SECURITY LLC' 3921 SW 47 AVE #1004 DAVIE FL 333.14 ' AC40® DATE(MM/DD/YYY1) � CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE page 1 of 1 04/09/2013 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED ASA MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND,EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S),AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement.A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT " Plillis of New York, Inc. PHONE g77-945-7378 FAX 888-467-2378 c/o 26 Century Blvd. (AIC P. O. Box 305191 E-MAIL certificates@willia.com Nashville, TN 37230-5191 INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURERA: First Specialty Insurance Corporation 34916-001 INSURED Red Hawk Fire & Security, LLC INSURER B: Zurich American Insurance Company, 16535-003 3375 Commerce Parkway INSURERC: Miramar, FL 33025 INSURER D: INSURER E: INSURER F. COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:`19716384 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN.THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE D' SUB POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF POLICY EXPJ TR LIMITS 1 A GENERAL LIABILITY IRG20010200 /10/2013 4/10/2014 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 2,000,000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PREMISES EaEoccccurence $ 100,000 CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR MED EXP(Any one person) $ PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ 2,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GEN'LAGGREGATELIMITAPPLIESPER: PRODUCTS-COMP/OPAGG $ 2,000,000 POLICY X PRO LOC $ B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY BAP509588401 /10/2013 4/10/2014 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT 2,000,000 (Ea accident) _ $ X ANYAUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ ALLOWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Peracadent) $ AUTOS AUTOS HIREDAUTOS NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE AUTOS (Per accident) $ UMBRELLALIABOCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ EXCESS LIAR HCLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE .{ $ DED I RETENTION$ $ B WORKERS COMPENSATION WC509588301 /10/2013 4/10/2014 x AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY - I ER ' ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVEFN—YNIA E.L.EACH ACCIDENT 1 $ 11000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE Is 1,000,000 ffes.descnbeunder IDESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES(Attach Acord 101,Additonal Remarks Schedule,[(more space is required) I i r CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE f THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHOR D R ESENT " Miami Shores Village 10050 NE 2nd Ave Miami Shores, FL 33138 t Coll:4061504 Tpl:1626611 Cert:19716384 © 88-2010ACORDCORPORATION.All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2010/05) The ACORD name and logo are registered mark of ACORD " SK'pqcoRFs D villagi .Miami Shores Building Department o a 10050 N.E.2nd Avenue �ORIpp' Miami Shores, Florida 33138 Tel: (305) 795.2204 Fax: (305) 756.8972 CHANGE OF CONTRACTOR/ARCHITECT Permit`N. ,C -12-1631 0 nef:S'NafT1e'.(Fee Simple Title Holder): M i AM S hOtf¢c -?Ve Phone k 305:75'j q 64) / Owner's Address: _60Z NE 4(o5freat City: M) State : T=L Zip Code:3313$ JOb,AddrMt(Of where work is being done): 6,66 . )C 16 S - City: Miami Shores State:—Florida Zip Code:3 3 i 3� Contractor's Company,Name: �c� ��, k �,°fes ,Ire .',�y Phone#:��5t( . , Address: _33S" City: M I State: FL Zip Code:3:3 Qualifier's Name :doi,los Lic. Number: r o-4- Architect/Engineer of Record Name: Phone#: Address: City: State: – Zip Code: DescribeWork VI�f�,�c l �- (/t CPQ 1'/ lei11 -�-- I hereby certify that the work has been abandoned and/or the contractor/architect is unable or unwilling to complete the contract. I hold the Building Official and the Miami S=resharmless for all legal invol e Signature Signature 0 orAgeM; f`,4n rector. Architect• 1 The fo_r(egooie ing instrument was aknowledged pefore a The g instrum nt was aknowle ged efore me this y of 20�y �r n this d 20� y is personally know me or who has produced w ersonall k me or who has produc 2 as indentification. as indentification. Sign: EE 0 7Sign: #tdMIS50F1W ,U7111 MY "Seal: FS: luI Seal:= XT MISKE �,.. E E(PIAtdotAry blio ntls ryptpp Bond ed Prru f RED HAWK Fire&Security Red Hawk Fire& Security 3375 Commerce Parkway Miramar, FL 33025 Tel 954-791-1313 Fax 954-791-0688 www.redhawkus.com Lic# EF20001077 Lic# FPC12-000085 October 29, 2013 Miami Shores Village Building Department 10050 NE 2ND Avenue Miami Shores FL 33138 Re: Permit # ELC-8-12-1631 602 NE 96TH Street Miami Shores FL 33138 To Whom It May Concern: This letter is a request-to change the contractor and qualifier for the above referenced permit from Chubb Fire & Security to Red Hawk Fire & Security and from Joe Szachor to Carlos Gomez. Mr. Szachor is not longer employed with Red Hawk Fire and Security. Sincerely, Carlos Gomez Qualifier EF20001077 Regional VP STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF BROWARD nov Sworn to and subscribed before me thisg pay of 2013 by R.KILCREASE ._ MY COMMISSION#EE 007393 'a- EXPIRES:July 17,2014 Bonded Thru Notary Public Underwriters t C:WN`I-Y HUILDINB DEPARTMENT 11/02/2011 1U:31 RLt;I51Eit TCPM939N CENTRAL CASHIER YDENIS TRNNSALTION #: 301111020131 PROCESS PERMIT FES DUE M3012001088 $132.00 ---------------- ---------------- TUI NL CHECV, TENDERED : S 132.0r TOTAL --------S 132.�ilA CHANbL ISSUED : SQ+.00 CHECK #(5): 1/69 S132.d0 4 M I AM HQ) MIAMI-DADE COUNTY - MIUNH--j"PAL PERMIT PROCESSING RECEIPT 11. O'e—, 011. I ROC'E:�17rl' NO: M201' I ERT N,ljl,,IE",',7 R E"lei I EV !::--E:E FEE UNIT FEE C WOU!4T Tyr-111 f"(3 J.`E DESCRIPTION' UNITS DEI:3 F I FRE F0 64 FIRE ALARM UPFRONT FEELS 000000001 10-1. 00 FE—E FOf" M1.1r,11CIF-42�H1 Wv UPMU B 1.9 UPr -JLJ' I IL I . Y I, _JOOOOO1 r5. :.I 'FO TAL. 1—2. iDiZ' UPFRONT Fl E S' ARE NOT REFUNDABLE 'NA, Nil TCPM939N CEN—r*Rf."L. 1. 3 CIO 15-31. Yll"ENIS 1111020 13 1, j i y I Miami Shores Village Building Department 10050 NE 2 Ave, Miami Shores, FI 33138 Tel: (305)795-2204 9 Fax; (305)756-8972 2/17/2016 Current Owner 602 NE 96 Street Miami Shores, FL 33138 Permit: ELC-8-12-1631 Address: 602 NE 96 Street Miami Shores FL Date Expired: 4/28/2014 Dear Sir or Madam, Our records indicate that the above referenced permit has expired without obtaining the proper final inspection. In order to serve you better, we need to keep our files up to date. t As per section 105.4.1 of the Florida Building Code, "Every permit issued shall become invalid t (expired) unless the work authorized by such permit is commenced within six months after its issuance, or if the work authorized by such permit is suspended or abandoned for a period of six months after the work is commenced, or completed without obtaining the final inspection of the work performed." Please be advised that open permits will hinder your ability to refinance or sell this property Please contact the Building Department, within 15 days of receipt of this letter in order to take care of this matter. Sincerely, Ismael Naranjo (CBO) Building Director f hh 5 u b A UTC Fire & Security Company 4 s SPECIFICATION SHEETS FOR. MIAMI SHORES - PRESBYTERIAN CHURCH k, , 602 NE 96TH STREET MIAMI SHORES, FL 33138 ~ f JOB#: 811049 3921 SW 47TH AVENUE SUITE 1004 PHONE: (954) 791-1313 DAVIE, FLORIDA 33314 FAX: (954) 791-0688 LICENSE: EC13004155 WEB: www.chubbfs.net OCT, 21 .2011 F October 31,2005 DN-6856•A-30 NOT 1 F 1 E W ONYX-Series, — _(NFS=640,lntelligent by Honeywell Address'a'61-Fire A_Iarrn S stel`rn Section: Intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panels i General The NFS-640 intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panel is part of 1 < > the ONYX@ Series of Fire Alarm Controls from NOTIFIER. @ULC �� As a stand-alone small-to-large system, or as a large net- APPROVED work, the ONYX@ Series of products meets virtually every CS118 application requirement. LISTED (FM exceptions: Designed with modularity and for ease of system planning, S635 02/60007 CPU-640E, PRN-5, the NFS-640 can be configured with just a few devices for California Proprietary service) small building applications, or for a large campus or high- State Fire CC(�F rise application.Simply add additional peripheral equipment (� Marshal to suit the application. / 7165-0028:214 Certif. # 2003081801600815 Features 7170-0028:216 • One,expandable to two,isolated intelligent Signaling Line U.S. Coast Guard " Circuit(SLC) Style 4, 6 or 7. — 002/42/1 r Up to 159 detectors(any mix of.ion,photo;thermal,or multi- 161. - sensor)and 159 modules(N.O.manual stations,-two=wire smoke,notification;or relay)per SLC.318 devices.per loop/ MEA 1636 per FACP or network node. 317-01-E `R rI Gam` • Standard 80-character display,640-character large display, or display-less (anode on a network). City Of r • Network option — 103 nodes supported (NFS-640, NCA DENVER .F { Network Annunciator,or NCS Network Control Station)us- ing wire or fiber-optic connections. China 6.0 amp itch mode p er supplyywith four Class A/B t' builtAn,Notification-Appliance-Circuits (NAC). Selectable Classification s Vii, System Sensor strobe synchronization. Society(CCS) A - • Built-in Alarm, Trouble, and Supervisory relays. #NL05T00001 'c • Up to 64 output circuits per FACP or network node; cir- NFS-640(E) w cuits configurable online. • VeriFireO Tools offline program option.Sort Maintenance - Reports by compensation value(dirty detector),peak alarm value, or address. •.Autoprogramming and Walk Test reports. NFS-64 in CAB-B4 with • Optional universal 636-point DACT. NCA'640-character display • 80-character remote annunciators (up to 32). 5 • EIA-485 annunciators, including custom graphics. • Automatic time control functions,with holiday exceptions. • Printer interface (80-column and 40-column printers). • Surface Mount Technology (SMT) electronics. • History file with 800-event capacity in nonvolatile memory, . Extensive, built-in transient protection. plus separate 200-event alarm-only file. • Powerful Boolean logic equations. • Alarm Verification selection per point, with tally. . NCA 640-character display features: • Autoprogramming and Walk Test reports. V Backlit, 640-character display. • Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS) Presignal. V Supports SCS Series smoke control system in both • Silence inhibit and Auto Silence timer options. HVAC or FSCS modes(not UL-Listed for'FSCS). • March time/temporal/California two-stage coding/strobe r/ Printer and CRT EIA-232 ports. synchronization. V EIA-485 annunciator and terminal mode ports. • Field-programmable on panel"or on PC, with VeriFire® V Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory, and Security relays. Tools program check, compare, simulate. • AcclimatePlusT'" HARSHTMand NOTI-FIRE•NETTMaretrade Fulf OWERTY keypad: • Charger for up to 90 hours of standby power. marks, and FlashScanO, NOTIFIER®, ONYX(D, VeriFireO, and VIEW®are registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc. • Non-alarm points for lower priority functions. Microsoft®and Windows®are registered trademarks of the • Remote ACK/Signal Silence/System Reset/Drill via moni- Microsoft Corporation. LEXANO is a registered trademark of GE for modules. Plastics,a subsidiary of General Electric Company. 1 This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. try to keep our 'S O �oo� � product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information,contact NOTIFIER. Phone:(203)484-7161 FAX:(203)484-7118 =11 3 1=6-2 NOT I IF E R• ENGINEENNG 8 MANDRIM1IIN6 Made in the U.S.A. by Honeywell 12 Clintonville Road,Northford,Connecticut 06472 QUALITY $1$TEM$ r DN-6856.10/31/05 — Page 1 of 9 ' t • FlashScan® intelligent features: Acclimate PlusTNI low-profile intelligent multi-sensor: ✓ Poll 318 devices in less than two seconds. ✓ Detector automatically adjusts sensitivity levels with- ✓Activate up to 159 outputs in less than five seconds. out operator intervention or programming. Sensitivity ✓ Multicolor LEDs blink device address during Walk Test. increases with heat. ✓ Fully digital,high-precision protocol (U.S. Patent ✓ Microprocessor-based technology,combination photo 5,539,389). and thermal technology. ✓ Manual sensitivity adjustment—nine levels. ✓ FlashScanO or classic mode compatible with NFS-640. ✓ Pre-alarm intelligent sensing—nine levels. ✓ Low-temperature warning signal at 40'F_t 5°F(4.44C:t ✓ Day/Night automatic sensitivity adjustment. 2.77°C). ✓ Sensitivity windows: RFX wireless interface system: Ion-0.5 to 2.5%/foot obscuration. ✓ Allows protection in areas'where the use of wire is un- Photo-0.5 to 2.35%/foot obscuration. economical or unpractical. Laser(VIEW®)-0.02 to 2.0%/foot obscuration. ✓ Allows communication with wireless smoke detectors Acclimate Plus"A - 0.5 to 4.06/foot obscuration. and wireless monitor modules;each RFX unit and de- - HARSHTm-0.5 to 2.35%/foot obscuration. tector is assigned an address. ✓ Drift compensation (U.S. Patent 5,764,142). ✓ Requires 24 VDC from SLC'or system auxiliary power. ✓ Degraded mode—in the unlikely event that the CPU- HARSHTm Hostile-Area Smoke Head: - 640 microprocessor fails,FlashScano detectors revert V Provides early warning of smoke detection in environment to degraded operation and can activate the CPU-640 NAC where traditional smoke detectors are not practical. circuits and alarm relay. Each of the four built-in panel cfr- V The detector's filters remove particulates down to 30 cults includes a Disable/Enable switch for this featuremicrons in size. ✓ Multi-detector algorithm involves nearby detectors in V Intake fan draws air into photo chamber,while airborne alarm decision (U.S. Patent 5,627,515). particles and water mist are removed. ✓ Automatic detector sensitivity testing. r/ Requires auxiliary 24 VDC from system or remote power ✓ Maintenance alert(two levels). supply. ✓ Self-optimizing pre-alarm. Releasing features: • VIEW®Very Intelligent Early Warning smoke detection r/ Ten independent hazards. technology: ✓ Sophisticated cross-zone (three options). ✓ Revolutionary spot laser design. V Delay timer and Discharge timers (adjustable). ✓Advanced intelligent sensing algorithms differentiate be- V Abort(four options). tween smoke and non-smoke signals (U.S. Patent ✓ Low-pressure CO2 listed. 5,831,524). Voice and telephone features: ✓ Addressable operation pinpoints the fire location. ✓ Solid state message generation. ✓ No moving parts to fail or filters to change. ✓ Hard-wired voice control module options. ✓ Early warning performance comparable to the best as- ✓ Firefighter telephone option. piration systems at a fraction of the lifetime cost. SLC Intelligent Loop 1 1 Up to 32 Remote Displays ° m • RRFFXX-- FAPT-851 Aodimate Plus,- ———-- a R FSL-751 F1ash5car�NEIN® •� FS11-751 FlashScarll HARSH" NBG-12LX FMM-1 FRM-1 XPS Series, XPIO e FSP-851 FlashScarO photo XP6/10 I/O O etc. Modules IDC RelayContact SDRF- ®o SLC Intelligent Loop 2 58A 751 LCD-80 FDU-80 LCD-80t o 0 j DEVICES o o tIrrrr� l�l.11,ll, FSP-851 FSI451 FST-851 rma rrer EIA-485 PFato Ion Thermal ——— —— — — ® NBG-12LX FMM-1 FCIyM-1 XP5-M XP5C XPIO m 8888888x• t = IDC NAC KDM-2R splay ® EIA-485 2048 annunciator/control points MMA NCA ®�®. u - e OR with'no display s 1.. ACM-SR ACM/AEM-24AT LDM-32 a Relay Control LED Annunciator Custom Graphics Up to 64 fully --- programmable Optional 636 point UDACT Dual phone output circuits lines to Central EIA-232 Terminal Station Sample System NFS-640y EIA-232 Options shown in CAB-C4 with KDM-2 and voice alarm system PRN Printer CRT-2_Terminal 6856blok-ml Page 2 of 9 — DN-6856•10/31/05 i a s I ✓ 30-to 120-watt high-efficiency amplifiers'(AA Series). Field Programming Options ✓ Backup tone generator and amplifier option. Autoprogram is a timesaving feature of the NFS-640. It r ✓ Multichannel voice transponder(XPIQ). is a special software routine that allows the NFS-640 to"learn" • High-efficiency offline switching 3.0 amp power sup- what devices are physically connected and automatically load ply(6.0 A_in alarm): them in the program with default values for all parameters. ✓ 120 or 220/240 VAC. Requiring less than one,minute to run,this routine allows the ✓ Displays batterycurrenUvoltage on panel(with display). user to have almost immediate fire pPotection in a new instal- lation, even if only a portion of the detectors are installed. FlashScan® Exclusive New Keypad Program Edit (with KDM-2). The NFS- Morld-Leading Detector Protocol 640, like all NOTIFIER intelligent panels, has the exclusive feature of program creation and editing capability from the At the heart of the NFS-640 is n set(U.S.detection devices and front panel keypad, while continuing to provide fire pro- device protocol — FlashScan® thPatent superior pre- tection. The architecture of the NFS-640 software is such Flash Scan®is an all-digital protocol that gives superior pre that each point entry carries its own program,includin con- cision and high noise immunity. P ry P 9 9 In addition to providing quick identification of an active input trol-Uy-event links to other points-This allows the program to device,this new protocol can also activate many output de be entered with independent per-point segments, while the vices in a fraction of the time required by competitive proto NFS-640 simultaneously monitors other (already installed) w Points for alarm conditions. cols. This high speed also allows the NFS-640 to have the largest device per loop capacity in the industry—318 points VeriFire® Tools is an offline programming and test util- -yet every input and output device is sampled in less than ity that can greatly reduce installation programming time,and two seconds.The microprocessor-based FlashScanOdetec- increase confidence in the site-specific software. It is Win- tors have bicolor LEDs that can be coded to provide ding- dows®based and provides technologically advanced capa- nostic information,such as device address during Walk Test. bilities to aid the installer.The installer may create the entire program for the NFS-640 in the comfort of the office,test it, Intelligent Sensing store a backup file, then bring it to the"site and download Intelligent sensing is a set'of software algorithms that pro- from a laptop into the panel. vide the NFS-640 with industry-leading smoke detection ca" r pability.These complex algorithms require many calculations on each reading of each detector, and are made pos- sible by the'very-high-speed microcomputer used by the NFS-640. ENTER PROG OR STAT PASSWORD, THEN ENTER Drift Compensation and Smoothing. Drift (ESCAPE TO ABORT) ***** compensation allows the detector'to retain its original ability to detect actual smoke,and resist false alarms, even as dirt accumulates. It reduces"maintenance re- O=CLR 1=AUTO 2=POINT 3=PASSWD 4=MESSAGE quirements by allowing the system to automatically per- 5=ZONES 6=SPL FUNCT 7=SYSTEM 8=CHECK PRG form the periodic sensitivity measurements required by NFPA 72.Smoothing filters are also provided by soft- f ware to remove transient noise signals,such as those Above:Keypad program editing. caused by electrical interference. Below:Autoprogram function.` Maintenance Warnings.When the drift compen- sation performed for a detector reaches a certain level, AUTOPROGRAM PLEASE WAIT the performance of the detector may be compromised, and special warnings are given.There are three wam- ing levels: (1) Low Chamber value, usually indicative of a hardware problem in the detector;(2)Maintenance " Alert, indicative of dust accumulation that is near but L1:80 RETS, 15 MODS L2:93 RETS, 35 MODS 1 below the allowed limit;.(3)Maintenance Urgent,indica- PANEL OUTPUTS:24 BELLS: 04 tive of dust accumulation above the allowed limit. ' Sensitivity Adjust.Nine sensitivity levels are pro- vided for alarm detection. These levels carr be set manually, or can change automatically between day .... �....... """"` ----- and night.Nine levels of pre alarm sensitivity can also F. be be selected, based on predetermined levels of alarm Pre-alarmoperation can'be latching or self-restoring, and can be used to activate special control functions. 2. ' Self-Optimizing Pre-Alarm.Each detector mayw � be set-for"Self-Optimizing" pre-alarm. In this special mode, the detector "learns" its normal environment, measuring the peak analog readings over a long pe- j riod of time,and setting the pre-alarm level just above these normal peaks. '" "^°� r " � . Cooperating Multi-Detector Sensing.A pat- 17, S_mw ,'AC�W ented feature of this intelligent sensing is the ability of - _ a smoke sensor to consider readings from nearby sen- sors in making alarm or pre-alarm decisions. Without oa,aGW] N54i statistical sacrifice in the ability to resist false alarms,itI t _allows a sensor to increase its sensitivity to actual __ smoke by a factor of almost two to one. eaeetoom.tu VeriFire®Tools System Programming screen DN-6856.10/31/05 — Page 3 of 9_. • TOP,LEFT to RIGHT J8 Zone Code Input;TB7 DC Power(24 VDC power-limited,both resettable and non-resettable available);TB8 Alarm Relay; TB9 Trouble Relay; TB10 Supervisory Relay; TB11 Security Relay; SW1, SW5 Relay Switches; JP13 General Board Earth Fault Jumper;TB12 EIA-485 Terminal Mode(supervised);TB13 EIA-485 ACS Mode(supervised);TB14 EIA-232 Printer;TBI 5 EIA-232 PC Termi- nal;J1 NUP(network/service connection: power-limited,supervised);TBI 6 SLC#1 Connections(detectors,,modules;supervised);D55 Main SLC Ground Fault LED;JP7 Charger Disable Jumper;JP12 200MA Jumper;JP6 Earth Fault Jumper(SLC#1). 3 J8 T137 TB8 T139 TB10 T1311 TB12 TB13 T1314 TB15 TB16 SW1® ®SW5 D55 JP6 T136 v NAC LEDs J1 (TB5,4,3 also) JP13 behind display ��LLLIII ® O O TB5 a J� f JP7 behind display T134 -The'CPU-640 lal ® ® ® ® ® ® ® ® shown with f T83 FIRE na.- nEwiErr surEnvnowr araf[r, ous n , ro T ALARM *.00uE N� CEo aSAKER KDM-2 Display DisablelEnable v F � o .Switches for o •euowLEoGE — arstEr ur• NAC Circuit J7 D72 Degraded Mode a u behind display ° Q a[N-1 O[N M1 N FE01 L!1'jj ®* .—= a o T132 °❑ _Q Q -••^• D82 °""". Q J3 T81 0 arwcc E.e.. '.:.Qi •A:...Q n I oo "O O D54;Control Switches SW2, J4,J5,J6 behind display J10 Jll 6956CPu.wmf SO,SW4;and System Status Indicator LEDs (for"No-Keyboard Operation'behind display a LEFT SIDE,TOP to BOTTOM.TB6 NAC#1,TB5 NAC#2,TB4 NAC#3,TB3 NAC#4(all NAC circuits power-limited and supervised;and each NAC TB has an NAC LED to the right of it); J7 Accessory Power;Disable/Enable Switches for Degraded Mode;TB2 AC Power Connection; TBI Battery Connection (overcurrent protected). BOTTOM, LEFT to RIGHT., D54 AC On LED; System Status Indicator LEDs for"No- Keyboard Operation";System Switches SW2(Acknowledge),SW3(Silence),SW4(Reset)for"No-Keyboard Operation";J4 KDM-2 Connector; J5,J6 Panel Circuits(ONYX®Panel Output Modules,supervised);D72 General Board Ground Fault LED;J10 Security Tamper Switch;J11 Auxiliary Trouble Input;D82 AC Power LED;J3 LEM-320 Connector(SLC Loop#2). Network Diagram " RPT a m 8 -WF NCS RPT Block Diagram 24V 'WF 'NOTI•FIRE•NETT" NFS-640 ACS PRN Sample Node Configurations NFS-640 Key., 1 PRN `if s 6 o NFN Twisted-Pair Wire NFN Dual Fiber-Optic Link ' LCD-80 Other Interfaces o0 ACS m B PRN x — XPIO OPTIONAL NCS Style 7 Connection k PRN A r NCA speakers speakers 6656wnf.wmf phones phones ACS Page 4 of 9 — DN-6856.10/31/05 The ONYX®Series provides integrated solutions for any fire safety application. �cfxs ubx ee r•� E Placement of Equipment in Chassis and Cabinet OCAUT/ON The following guidelines outline the NFS-640's flexible sys- It is critical that all mounting holes of the NFS-640 are tem design. secured with a screw or standoff to ensure continuity of Rows:The first row of equipment in the cabinet mounts in Earth Ground. chassis CHS-11112. Mount the second,third, or fourth rows of Layers: The CHS-M2 accepts four layers of equipment, equipment in chassis CHS-4MB (see NFS-640 Installation including the control panel.The CPU-640 fills three positions Manual regarding panel output modules)or CHS-4L(for voice (left to right)in the first-installed layer(the back of the chas- components, see Voice Alarm System Manuao. sis); its integral power supply occupies (the left) two posi- Wiring:When designing the cabinet layout,consider sepa- tions in the next two layers; the optional display occupies ration of power-limited and non-power-limited wiring as dis- (the left)two positions at the front,flush with the door. Panel cussed in the NFS-640 Installation Manual. output modules can be mounted in several layers with stand- Positions: A chassis offers four basic side-by-side posi- offs or an L-bracket as required. Some equipment, such as tions for components; the number of modules that can be the NCA,may be door-mounted directly in front of the control mounted in each position depends on the chassis model and panel. The NCA mounts onto the DP-DISP or ADP-46. The the size of the individual module.There are a variety of stand- NCA can be used as a primary display for the NFS-640 by offs and hardware items available for different combinations directly connecting their network ports(required in Canadian and configurations of components. stand-alone applications). Expansion: Installing an LEM-320 Loop Expander Mod- CHS-M2 ule adds a second SLC loop to the control panel.The LEM- 320 is mounted onto the CPU-640, occupying the middle- CPU-640 right,second(back)slot on the chassis. If networking two or Integral more control panels, each unit requires a NCM-W (wire) or power supply NCM-F (fiber) Network Control Module. The NCM-W/-F can be installed in any panel out- Mounting location put module position(see manual);the default for LEM-320 position is at the back of the chassis next to ®� the control panel. Option boards can be N ® \® ` mounted in front of the LEM-320 or NCM mod- rA ules;for ease of access,complete installation of those devices before mounting another @®®®®®@®Q layer. ri® e �e ® rl -Typical '® mounting KDM-2(shown with location dress plate),or NCA for NCM at front,flush with door or TM-4 Panel output module mounted on L-bracket in front of control panel Available mounting slots for panel output modules DN-6856.10/31/05 — Page 5 of 9 Agency Listings and Approvals Configuration Guidelines See the first page of this data sheet for listing agencies and Stand-alone and network systems require a main display. On file numbers.These listings and approvals apply to the basic single-CPU systems(one CPU-6401-640E),display options are NFS-640 control panel.In some cases,certain modules may the KDM-2 or the NCA.On network systems(two or more CPU- not be listed by certain approval agencies,or listing may be 6401-640Es),at least one NCA or NCS annunciation device is in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. required. Other options listed as follows: The NFS-640 complies with UL Standards 864 (Fire) and KDM-2: 80-character backlit LCD display with QWERTY 1076(Burglary). It is designed to meet NFPA 72 Local,Aux- programming and control keypad. Order two BMP-1 blank iliary, Remote Station, Proprietary (not applicable for FM), modules and DP-DISP mounting plate separately. Requires and Emergency Voice/Alarm Fire System Requirements. top row of a cabinet. Required for each stand-alone 80- character display system. The KDM-2 may mount in network Specifications nodes to display"local"node information as long as at least • Primary input power,CPU-640 board:120 VAC,50/60 Hz, one NCA or NCS network display is on the system to display 3.0 amps. CPU-640E board.220/240 VAC,50/60 Hz, 1.5 network information. Amps. NCA: Network Control Annunciator, 640 characters. On • Total output 24 V power: 6.0 A in alarm.' single CPU-640/-640E systems,the NCA is the Primary Display for the panel and connects directly to the CPU-640/- • Standard notification circuits (4): 2.5 A each. 640E. On network systems(two or more CPU-640/-640Es), • Four-wire detector power: 1.25 A. one network display(either NCA or NCS) is required for • Non-resettable regulated power outputs: 1.25 A each. every system. On network systems, the NCA connects (and • Battery charger range:12 AH—55 AH.Use separate cabi- requires)an NCM network communications module. Mounts net for batteries over 25 AH. in a row of FACP node or in two annunciator positions. • Optional high-capacity (25 — 120 AH) battery charger: Mounting options include the DP-DISP,ADP-4B,or in an CHG-120 (see CHG-120 data sheet, DN-6040). annunciator box,such as the ABS-2D. In CAB-4 top-row applications, a DP-DISP and two BMP-1 blank modules are • Float rate:27.6 V. required for mounting. See NCA data sheet DN-6858. • Temperature and humidity ranges: This system meets CPU-640: Central processing unit with integral 3.0 amp NFPA requirements for operation at 0°C to 49°C (32°F to (6.0 A in alarm) power supply for an NFS-640 system. 120°F);and at a relative humidity(noncondensing)of 85% Includes CPU;one Signaling Line Circuit expandable to two; at 30°C (86°F) per NFPA, and 93% ± 2%at 32°C ±2°C installation, programming and operating manuals. Order one (89.6°F± 1.1'F) per ULC. However, the useful life of the per system or as necessary(up to 103 network nodes)on a system's standby batteries and the electronic components network system. may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges CPU-640E:Same as CPU-640 but requires 220 VAC, 1.5 and humidity.Therefore, it is recommended that this sys- amp, (3.0 A in alarm). tem and all peripherals be installed in an environment with CHS-M2: Mounting chassis for CPU-640. One required a nominal room temperature of 15°C to 27°C(60°F to 80°F). for each CPU-6401-640E. "Note: The power supply has a total of 6.0 Amps of available power. This is shared by all internal modules. DP-DISP: Dress panel for top row in cabinet with CPU- 640/-640E installed. System Capacity 13MP-1: Blank module for unused module positions. • Intelligent Signaling Line Circuits ....... 1 expandable to 2 • Intelligent detectors...................................... 159 per loop • Addressable monitor/control modules......... 159 per loop • Programmable internal hardware and output circuits (4 standard)....................................68 • Programmable software zones.....................................99 • Special programming zones ......................................... 14 • LCD annunciators per CPU-640/-640E and NCA (observe power)............................................32 • ACS annunciators per CPU-640/-640E..................... 32 address x 64 points • ACS annunciators per NCA............................ 32 address x 64 or 96'points `Note: The NCA supports up to 96 annunciator address points per ACM-24/48. KDM-2 Controls and Indicators Program Keypad: QWERTY type (keyboard layout). 8 LED indicators: Power; Fire Alarm; Pre-Alarm; Security; Supervisory; System Trouble; Signals Silenced; Points Dis- abled. Membrane Switch Controls: Acknowledge/Scroll Display; Signal Silence; Drill; System Reset; Lamp Test. LCD Display:80 characters(2 x 40)with long-life LED back- light. Page 6 of 9 — DN-6856-10/31/05 t System Modules The NFS-640 includes the ability to communicate with up to VC C-1 B:Voice Control Center. Provides a variety of user- eight conventional modules each with up to eight circuits.Any selectable tones on a single channel. Up to two different mix of notification,relay,speaker, or telephone-may be used. tones or messages may be selected on a single channel. Choose any combination of up to eight output modules:ICM/ Also provides optional digital voice message capability and ICE, CRM/CRE, DCM-4 or VCM/VCE. Panel modules mount on-site programmable voice messages. Includes Audio, on either:the two far-right positions of the DP-DISP(next to Message Generator(AMG-1)microphone,cables,dress the primary display); or on any of the four positions on the panels,and instructions. t CHS-4N chassis(CHS-4MN kit required). NOTES: 1) These VTCC-1 B:Voice/Telephone Control Center. Provides all modules/expanders are NOT to be used for releasing ap- that the VCC-1 provides plus two-way Fire Fighters Tele- plications. 2) For additional information on these panel phone(FFT-7)capability. output modules and expanders,see data sheet DN-6859. TCC-IB:Telephone Control Center. Provides a stand-alone CHS-4MB: Expansion Chassis. Mounts up to four two-way Fire Fighters telephone(FFT-7S). modules. Includes CHS-4N, MP-113(Module Dress Panel), Includes cables,dress panel and instructions., and Expander Ribbon Cable. RM-1/RM-ISA: Remote microphone assemblies,mount ICM-4RK: Notification Appliance Circuit _ on ADP-4(RM-1)dress panel or CAB-RMI-RMR (RM-1SA). Module, provides four Style Y(Class B)or Style stand-alone cabinets. See DN-6728. Z(Class A)alarm Notification Appliance Circuits. ,� AMG-E: (at right)Audio Message o �; 1 Maximum signaling current is 3.0 amps per Generator(without microphone).Order -go I 1 circuit or 6.0 amps per module,subject to power + —SEE supply limitations(includes auxiliary power in addition to VCC-1 or VTCC-1 if two- e a 1 o harness, ELRs and slide-in labels). channel system is required. m o® 11 1° 1 Includes ON/OFF controls and ON/OFF LEDs. 6859icm4.wmi FFTFighters Fire Fi hters E 1 �1IY 029ice4.wml 1 ICE-4: (at right)Notification Appliance Circuit Telephone control with master handset: Expander,expands ICM-4 to provide a total of eight i°i M°Mrfri°� FTM-1:Firephone Control Module Style Y or Style Z alarm Notification Appliance connects a remote firefighter _ Circuits.Circuit ratings are same as ICM-4. Note: = - telephone to a centralized tele- a as oB® maximum of one per ICM-4RK.May phone console.Reports status to also be used to add four Notification i„ panel.Wiring to jacks and handsets p Appliance Circuits to VCM 4. is supervised. W W--. CRM-4RK: (at left)Control Relay AA-30: (at right)Audio Amplifier, o V' Module,four Form-C relay contacts, rated at 5.0 30 watts.Switch-mode power. " V. V" A, 120 VAC or 28 VDC(resistive)per circuit. Includes amplifier and audio input •0 °°°° ULLILLU TZ V__1. Includes manual ON/OFF controls and LEDs. supervision,backup input,and automatic switchover, power 6859crm4.wmf CRE-4:'(at left)Control Relay Expander, supply,.cables. See AA Series data sheet, DN-3224. expands CRM-4 to provide a total of eight Form- AA-120/AA-100:Audio Amplifier provides up to 120 watts C relay contacts. Note:maximum of one per of 25 VRrns audio power for the NFS-640.The amplifier • CRM-4RK.May also be connected to add four contains an integral chassis for mounting to a CAB-134,-C4,or relays to ICM-4,TCM-2,TCM-4,or VCM-4. -D4 backbox(consumes one row).Switch-mode power. VCM-4RK: (at right)Voice Control Includes audio input and amplified output supervision,backup Module provides four Style Y(25 andinput,and automatic switchover to backup tone.Order the AA`5• 70 VRrns)and Style Z(25 VRMS only) s" 100 for 70.7 VRMS systems and 100 watts of power. See AA _ 4 o66scre4.wmf speaker circuits,eight manual select Series data sheet,DN-3224. 3576vrom.wml • switches and indicators;slide-in labels, �" _' VROM-(n): (at right)Factory-pro- r and plug-in terminal blocks.Move jumper to grammed message for installation in AMG- convert to telephone circuits with remote ring 1. Provides up to 24 seconds of evacua- signat and local call-in flash.May be expanded to 6859vcm4.wmf tion message on nonvolatile memory chip. eight circuits with VCE-4,ICE-4,or CRE-4. Choose one of many standard messages 40 VCE-4: (at right)Voice Control Expander adds ill Ill AN available. Up to two of these messages may be.instalted in four circuits to VCM-4. Note: VCM-41 VCE-4 � � one AMG. Includes VROM,instructions for combination must be eight speaker or e _ installation and operation,and written text of t 0740vrem.wml 6859dcm4.wmf eight phone circuits. message. See VROM data sheet,DN-3576. , DCM-4RK: (at left)Dual Channel e VRAM-1: (at right)Field-programmed _ Modulepro-vides four-Class B(Style memory to be installed in AMG-1. Provides Y,25&70 VRMS)or Class A(Style Z, up to 24 seconds of field-program- 25 Valls only)speaker circuits plus 029ice4wf mable evacuation message on a F• - four channel A/B select relays. Not nonvolatile memory chip. Message is r expandable. programmed from microphone or oomm cassette tape. Up to two of these moo Other Option Modules 0461-4.wmf nonvolatile memory chips may be ' ARM-4:Auxiliary Relay Module,four Form-C installed in one AMG. Includes VRAM relays controlled by a relay module(CRM-4 or - and instructions for installation and ' CRE-4). N.O.contacts rated 20 amps; N.C. operation. 3 0 contacts rated 10 amps at 125 VAC and 30 VDC. APS-6R:(at right)Auxiliary Power 's o00 Note:maximum of one for each CRM-4 or CRE-4. ®B Supply(expander).Provides up to 6.0 amperes of regulated power for compat- ible Notification appliance circuits. i Includes battery input and transfer relay,and overcurrent protection.Mounts on one of four positions on a CHS-4L or 1, CHS-4 chassis.See APS-6R data sheet,DN-5952. d DN-6856•10/31/05 — Page 7 of 9 d i ACPS-2406:6.0 amp addressable charger power supply. Compatible Devices, EIA-232 Ports See ACPS-2406 data sheet,DN-6834. PRN-5: 80-column printer. See DN-6769. FCPS-24:The FCPS-24 is a remote six-amp(four-amp PRN-6:80-column printer. See DN-6956. continuous)repeater/power supply. See FCPS-24 data sheet,DN-5132. VS4095/S2:Printer,40-column,24 V.Mounted in external FOPS-2456/-2458: Remote six-amp and eight-amp backbox. See DN-3260;order from Keltron, Inc. power supplies with battery charger. See DN-6927 CRT-2:Video display termi6al. See DN-3756. UZC-256: Programmable Universal Zone Coder provides Compatible De"vices EIA-485 Ports positive non-interfering successive zone coding. Micropro I> > , cessor-controlled,field-programmable from IBM&compat- ACS Series:-Remote serial annunciator/control systems. ible PCs(requires optional programming kit). See UZC-256 See DN-0524. data sheet,DN-3404. FDU-80: Remote LCD display, 80 characters, with LEDs. LC D-80/LC D-80TM/FD U-80: 80-character, backlit See DN-6820. LCD display. Mounts up to 6,000 ft. (1828.8 m)from panel. LCD-80:Remote LCD display,80 characters.See DN-3198. Up to 32 per NFS-640. See LCD-801-80TM(DN-3198)and LCD-80TH: Remote LCD display, 80 characters, terminal FDU-80(DN-6820)data sheets. mode. See M: Re 8. ACS:Annunciator Control Modules ACM-1 6AT, N-052 , LDM Series:Remote custom graphic driver modules.See ACM-32A,and AEM-32A:See ACS data sheet,DN-0524, DN-0551.Series:- Remote ACM-24AT and ACM-48A on DN-6862. AFM:Annunciator Fixed Modules AFM-16A,AFM-16AT, ACM-8R: Remote relay module: 8 Form-C relays. See and AFM-32A. See AFM.data sheet,DN-0056. DN-3558. LDM: Lamp Driver Modules LDM-32, LDM-E32,and LDM- RFX:Wireless interface system. See DN-6739. R32. See LDM data sheet, DN-0551. RPT-485 Series:Repeater,isolator and/or fiber-optic mo- ACM-8111t: Remote Relay Module with eight Form-C dem. See DN-4737. contacts.Can be located up to 6,000 ft. (1828.8 m)from UDACT:Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter, panel on four wires. See ACM-8R data sheet,DN-3558. 636 channel. See DN-4867. SCS:Smoke control station;eight(expandable to 16) UZC-256:Zone Coder.Up to 256 programmable codes.See circuits. See SCS data sheet,DN-4818. DN-3404. RPT-485: Repeats EIA-485 over twisted pair or converts Compatible Intelligent Devices to fiber-optic medium. See RPT data sheet, DN-4737.' p 9 XP5:The XP5-M and XP5-C provide FlashScan®tran- BEAMHK: Heating kit for transmitter/receiver unit of FSB- sponder points. See XP5 data sheet,DN-6625. 200(S)below. See DN-6985. XP:The XP Series Transponder provides conventional BEAMHRK: Heating kit for use with the reflector of FSB- monitor and control points(CLIP mode only). See DN-0759. 200(S)below.See DN-6985. XP IQ:The XPIQ quad intelligent voice transponder for distrib- BEAMLRK: Long-range accessory kit, FSB-200(S)below. uted multichannel voice evacuation systems,an integrated audio BEAMMRK: Multi-mount kit, FSB-200(S)below. amplification and distribution subsystem controlled by FACP. BEAMSMK:Surface-mount kit, FSB-200(S)below. Capable simultaneous playing up to four FSB-200: Intelligent beam smoke detector. See DN-6985. Acepts uptof ur25-messages. FSB-20OS: Intelligent beam smoke detector with integral Accepts up to four 25 watt sensitivity test. See DN-6895. g amplifiers.See XPIQ data y sheet,DN-6821 FSI-851: Low-profile FlashScan® ionization detector, will CHS-4: (at right)Chassis replace FSI-751. See DN-6934. for mounting up to four o s s s FSI-751: Low-profile FlashScan®ionization detector. See APS-6Rs. DN-6714. CHS-4L: (at right)Low- FSP-851:Low-profile FlashScan®photoelectric detector,will profile four-position E replace FSP-751. See DN-6935. Chassis.Mounts two FSP-751: Low-profile FlashScan® photoelectric detector. AA-30 amplifiers or one See DN-6714. AMG-E and one AA 30. -• -• FSP-851 T:Low-profile FlashScanO photoelectric detectorwith D P-1 B: (at right)Blank 135°F(57°C)thermal,will replace FSP-751 T.See DN-6935. Dress panel. Provides dead-fronto f FSP-751T: Low-profile FlashScan®photoelectric detector panel for unused tiers or to cover oa with 135°F(57°C)thermal. See DN-6714. AA-30,AA-120,or AMG-E. CAB-4 Series:The CAB-4 Series 5262dpl- FST-851: FlashScan®thermal detector 135°F(57°C), will cabinets are fabricated from 16-gauge _ replace FST-851. See DN-6936. steel with unique full-front LEXANO, T FST-751: FlashScan®thermal detector 135°F(57°C).See reverse-silk-screened for durability.The DN-6716. cabinet assembly consists of two basic ; FST-851 R:FlashScan®thermal detector 135°F(57°C)with parts:a Backbox(SBB-4),and a Locking rate-of-rise,will replace FST-751 R. See DN-6936. Door(DR_4)that may hinge right or left. FST-751 R:FlashScan®thermal detector 135°F(57°C)with Cabinets are available in four sizes,"A" rate-of-rise. See DN-6716. through"D",with one to four tiers(two- tiered"B"shown-at right).A trim ring option is available for FST-851H: FlashScan® 190°F (88°C) high-temperature semi-flush mounting. See DN-6857, thermal detector. See DN-6936. CAB-M Series:Marine cabinets required for Lloyd's FSD-751P: FlashScan®photo duct detector with housing. Register or U.S.Coast Guard listed use. See DN-5063. See DN-6821. Page 8 of 9 - DN-6856.10/31/05 I m " FSD-751 PL:Low-flowFlashScan@photo duct detector with Other Options , a housing,will,replace FSD-751 P. See DN-6955. DPI-232:Direct Panel Interface,specialized modem for ex- VSD-751 RP:FlashScan@ photo duct detector with relay and tending serial data links to remotely located FACPs and/or housing. See DN-6821. peripherals.,See DN-6870. I FSD-751RPL:Low-f/owFlashScan@photo duct detector with LEM-320:Loop Expander Module.Expands each 640 to two relay and housing,will replace FSD-751 RPL.See ON-6955. Signaling Line Circuits. See DN-6881. I FAPT-851:FlashScan®Acclimate PIusTM low-profile multi- TM-4:Transmitter Module.Includes three reverse-polarity cir- , sensor detector,will replace FAPT-751. See DN-6937. cuits and one municipal box circuit. Mounts in panel module FAPT-751:Acclimate PIusTM low-profile multisensor detector. position (single-address-style) or in CHS-M2 position. See` f See DN-6833. DN-6860. FSH-751:FlashScan@ HARSHTm Hostile Area Smoke Head. NCM-W:Network Communications Module,Wire.Order one See DN-6875. NCM per network node(CPU-640 or NCA). See DN-6861. FSL-751:FlashScan@ VIEW®laser photo detector,will re- NCM-F:Network Communications Module,Fiber.Order one place LPX-751. See DN-6886. NCM per network node(CPU-640 or NCA). See DN-6861. LPX-751: Low-profile VIEW@ laser photo detector. See NCS-W-ONYX: Network Control Station, Wire. UL-Listed DN-5306, graphics PC with mouse, 17" color flat-screen LCD monitor. B224RB: Low-profile relay base. Order as necessary for network systems.Each NCS consumes one of 103 network addresses. See DN-6868 (previous B224B1: Isolator base for low-profile detectors. NCS-W),`ONYX®DN-6869. B71OLP: Low-profile base.Standard U.S.style. NCS-F-ONYX: Network Control Station, Fiber. UL-Listed B501: European-style,4"(10.16 cm)base. graphics PC with mouse, 17" color flat-screen LCD monitor. 6501 B H:Sounder base, includes 6501 base above. Order as necessary for network systems.Each NCS consumes one of 103 network addresses. See DN-6868 (previous FMM-1: FlashScan@ monitor module. See DN-6720. NCS-F), ONYX@ DN-6869. FDM-1: FlashScan@ dual monitor module. See DN-6720. VeriFire-TCD: verfFireO Tools CD-ROM. Contains pro- FZ M-1: FlashScan@ two-wire detector monitor module. gramming software for the NFS-640,NCA,and XPIQ.Includes See DN-6720. local panel connection cable.Programming PC requires a serial FMM-101: FlashScan@ miniature monitor module. See port connection. See DN-6871. DN-6720. ACM-24AT: ONYX@ Series ACS annunciator- up to 96 t FCM-1: FlashScan@ NAC control module. See ON-6724. points of annunciation with Alarm or Active LED,Trouble LED, FRM-1: FlashScan@ relay module. DN-6724. and switch per circuit.Active/Alarm LEDs can be programmed (by powered-up switch selection)by point to be red,green,or FSM-101: FlashScan@ pull station monitor module. yellow;the Trouble LED is always yellow. See DN-6862. NBG-12LX: Manual fire alarm4station, addressable. See AEM-24AT: Same LED and switch capabilities as ACM- DN-6726. 24AT, expands the ACM-24AT to 48, 72, or 96 points. See ISO-X: Isolator module. See DN-2243. DN-6862. XP Series:Transponder.See DN-0759. ACM-48A:ONYX@ Series ACS annunciator-up to 96 points XP5-M: FlashScan@ transponder, five monitor points. See of annunciation with Alarm or Active LED per circuit. Active/ t DN-6625. Alarm LEDs can be programmed (by powered-up switch se- lection) in groups of 24 to be red, green, or yellow. Expand- `XP5-C:FlashScan@ transponder,five control points or Form- able to 96 points with one AEM-48A. See DN-6862. C relays. See DN-6625. � AEM-48A:Same LED capabilities as ACM-48A,expands XP6-C: FlashScan@ six-circuit supervised control module. the ACM-48A to 96 points. See DN-6862. See DN-6924. BAT Series:Batteries. NFS-640 utilizes two 12 volt, 12 to XP6-MA'FlashScan@ six-zone interface module;connects 55 AH batteries. See DN-6933. intelligent alarm system to two-wire conventional detection PS Series:Batteries.NFS-640 utilizes two 12 volt,12 to 55 zone. DN-6925. AH batteries. See DN-1109. XP6-R:FlashScan@ six-relay(Form-C)control module.See Wt-LBB:Battery Box(required for batteries over 25 AH). DN-6926. XP10-M:.FlashScan@ ten-input monitor module. See DN-6923. 1 XPIQ: Intelligent quad transponder. See DN-6823. _ 1 t t DN-6656.10/31/05 - Page 9 of 9 i a t ' t ' `&6ctio.n 3-InstaIii-05n_ { 3.1 Preparing for Installation Choose a location for the fire alarm system that is clean,dry,and vibration-free with moderate temperature.The area-should be readily accessible with sufficient'room to easily install and -maintain it.There should be sufficient space for cabinet door(s)to open completely. r Carefully unpack the system and inspect for shipping damage.Count the number of conductors needed for all devices and find the appropriate knockouts.-(Refer to Section 3.11 "UL Power- ` limited Wiring Requirements"for selection guidelines.) Before installing the fire alarm system,read the following: • Review the installation precautions at the front of this manual,including temperature and - humidity limits for the system(Page 3). L All wiring must comply with the National and Local codes°for fire alarm systems. 1 • Do not draw wiring into the bottom 9 inches(22.86 cm)of the cabinet except when using a 'separate battery cabinet;this space is for internal battery installation. Review installation instructions in Section 3.2"InstallatiorrChecklist". ° t CAUTION: ' Make sure to install system components in the sequence listed below. Failure to do so can damage the control panel and other system components. 1 QWARNING:' , 9 This system contains static`-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any circuits. Use static-suppressive packaging to protect'electronic assemblies E removed from the unit. ' 3.1.1 Standards and Codes r Iri addition,installers should be familiar with the following standards and codes: r • NEC Article 300 Wiring Methods. • NEC Article 760 Fire Protective,Signaling Systems. Applicable Local and State Building Codes. • Requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. ' C22.1-98 The Canadian Electrical Code,Part 1. • CAN/ULC-S5524-01 Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems. NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 . 29 ti 4 Installation. Installation Checklist 3.2 Installation Checklist Table 3.1 provides an installation checklist for installing,wiring,and testing the NFS-640 system. It has references to installation information included in manuals listed in Section 1.2"Supplemental Documentation'. r Seq Task Refer to ` 1. ' Mount the cabinet backbox to the walla Section 3.3"Mounting a Cabinet" 2. Install all required chassis in cabinet. Section 3.5"Installing the Control Panel" 3. Install control panel onto chassis. Section 3.5.1 "Control Panel Circuit Board& Keypad/Display Unit" 4. Optional:Install auxiliary power supply and/or external Auxiliary power manuals battery charger 5. Calculate the proper battery rating. Appendix A"Power Supply Calculations" 6. Conned AC wiring,place batteries into backbox without Section 3.6"Connecting the Power Cables" connecting them,and run cable to optional power supplies, DC power outputs,NACs,and relays. CAUTION:Do not apply AC or DC power at this time., 7. Set switches for backup alarm(SW6-SW3). - Section 3.9"Backup-Alarm Switches" 8. Optional:Install and wire Auxiliary Relay Module(ARM-4). Section 3.13"Auxiliary Relay.Module(ARM-4):Product- 3 - Specific Details" i 9. Optional:Install Panel Circuit Modules(ICM-4RK,CRM Section 3.12"Installing Panel Circuit Modules",and Voice 4RK,VCM-4RK,DCM-4RK)and Voice Alarm System Alarm System Manual `components(AMG-1,FFT-7,Audio Amplifiers) 10. Optional:Install output devices such as a printer,or CRT Section 3.14"Installing Remote Printers and/or CRT" terminal. 11. Optional:Install NCA or NCS. NCA Manual or NCS Manual 12.,, Secure any unused mounting holes in control panel circuit Figure 3.4 board. - i 13. Wire the Signaling Line Circuits. Section 3.15"Wiring a Signaling Line Circuit(SLC)" 14. Connect wire shielding as instructed. SLC Wiring Manual 15. Apply AC power to the control panel by placing the external circuit breaker to the ON position. Do NOT connect batteries" 16. Check AC power. Table 3.3 in Section 3.6"Connecting the Power Cables" ; 17. Connect the batteries using interconnect cable,P/N 75560 and 75561. 18. Install the CAB-4 series door. CAB-3/CAB-4 Series Cabinet Installation Document 19. Program the control panel. NFS-640 Programming Manual. 20.- Field test the system. Section 5"Testing the System" Table 3.1 Installation Checklist p x 3.3 Mounting a Cabinet f This section provides instructions for mounting an CAB-4 Series backbox to a wall.Follow these F guidelines when mounting the backbox: • Locate the backbox so that the top edge'is 66 inches(1.6764 rn)above the surface of the finished floor. • Allow sufficient clearance around cabinet for door to swing freely.(See Section 2.3"System Cabinets".) • Use the four holes in the back surface of the backbox to provide secure mountirig,(See Figure 3.1.) • Mount the backbox on a surface that is in a clean,dry,vibration-free area. i Q CAUTION: Unless you are familiar with the placement of components within this backbox,only use the knockout locations provided for conduit entry. 4- 30 NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 Laying Out Equipment in Cabinet and Chassis Installations Follow the instructions below. I. Mark and pre-drill holes for the top two keyhole mounting bolts(0.25 inch,0.635 cm).-Use mounting hardware appropriate for the mounting surfaces;see UL 2017 Pull-Test Requirements. 2. Select and punch open the appropriate knock-outs.(For selection guidelines,see Section 3.11 "UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements".) 3. Using the keyholes,mount the backbox over the two screws. 4. Mark the location for the two lower holes,remove the backbox and drill the mounting holes. 5. Mount the backbox over the top two screws,then install the remaining fasteners.Tighten all fasteners securely. t 6. Feed wires through appropriate knockouts. 7. Install control panel and other components according to Section 3.5"Installing the Control Panel"before installing hinges and door according to CAB-31CAB-4 Series Cabinet , Installation Document. 8 0 CAB-4 CAB-4 Series Series b 0 Keyholes Backbox, Backbox, 2 places D-size A-size(one- (four-row) row) Mounting holes �. 0 0 2 places ui b 0 a c O O c E � E 10e J-' c 'Figure 3.1 Mounting Holes of a Backbok 3.4 ' Laying Out Equipment in Cabinet and Chassis The NFS-640 allows for flexible system design.Follow these guidelines when deciding where to locate equipment in the backbox. The first row of equipment mounts in chassis CHS-M2.Mount second,third,or fourth rows of equipment in chassis CHS-4N(panel circuit modules,see Section 3.12"Installing Panel Circuit Modules"),or in chassis CHS-41,(voice components,see the Voice Alarm System Manual).Some equipment,such as the NCA and annunciators,may be door-mounted;refer to the equipment's documentation for instructions. There are four basic positions available on a chassis(side-by-side);the number of modules that can be mounted in each position depends on the chassis model and the module size. ' The CHS-M2 accepts four layers of equipment,including the control panel.The control panel fills three positions in the first-installed layer,its integral power supply occupies two positions in the next two layers,and the optional display occupies the two left-most slots in the fourth layer(flush with the door).Panel circuit modules and other modules of the same sizing can be mounted in several layers,depending on the desired configuration;see Table 3.2 to determine hardware.Some equipment,such as the NCA,may be door-mounted directly in front of the control panel.The BMP-1 Blank,Module Plate covers unused positions in'a dress-panel,providing another mounting location for some modules,such as TM-4(see BMP-1 Product Installation Drawing for details). I NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 31 C In'stallatio'n J Laying Out Equipment in Cabinet and Chassis A 0 Mounting location for LEM-320 P4 I 144 ,@� p ODQmO® Typical mounting location �aQ�mOQ®N �®\ o o for NCM-W/F or TM-4 � 0 0 cli KDM-2N E Panel circuit module mounted on flanges above control panel Available mounting slots for panel circuit modules,TM-4, and NCM-W/F. Figure 3.2 Equipment Mounting Locations (First-Row Chassis CHS-M2) NOTE: When designing the cabinet layout,consider separation of power-limited and non-power- limited wiring as discussed in Section 3.11 "UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements". From...' TO... Required Stand-off or Hardware Chassis CHS-M2 Control panel or Not applicable;integral to the chassis. module on first layer Control panel or Option board,2nd layer 4 male-female stand-offs of length 0.937 inch(23.8 mm)P/N 42166. Option board,1st layer (includes LEM-320) Option board,2nd layer Option board,3rd layer 4 male-female stand-offs of length 0.937 inch(23.8 Timm)P/N 42166. Chassis Option board,.4th layer Attaches directly to flanges on chassis.(Screws provided with option (flush with door) boards&panel circuit modules) Chassis Panel circuit module Attaches directly to flanges on chassis.(Screws provided with option (flush with door) boards&panel circuit modules) Control panel KDM-2(upper edge) 2 stacks of male-female stand-offs: P/N 42185(2.0 inch,50.8 mm)and P/N 42186(1.312 inch,33.33 mm) Chassis rail KDM-2(lower edge) 2 male-female stand-offs'of length 0.937 inch(23.8 mm)P/N 42166. Dress panel NCA Attaches directly to dress panel. DP-DISP or ADP-46 (Nuts provided with NCA.) Dress panel Option board BMP-1 attaches to dress panel;option module attaches to BMP-1 DP-DISP or ADP-413 (screws provided with option module). Note:The initial release of chassis CHS-M2 used L-brackets and stand-offs of different lengths than the current model;refer to Doc.51332,Rev A. Table 3.2 Stand-off Lengths 32 NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 l Installing the Control Pane! Installatioii t 3.5 Installing the Control Panel 3.5.1 Control-Panel Circuit Board & Keypad/Display Unit l The control panel mounts in chassis CHS-M2,which is usually positioned in the top row of the , backbox.The control panel's CPU occupies three positions at the back of the chassis;-the KDM-2 occupies two positions flush with the door.The NCA may be door-mounted directly in front of the control panel if no KDM-2 is being used;see the NCA Manual for details and restrictions.' • F, f NOTE: For initial release of NFS-640, mounting instructions were different. Refer to the installation manual shipped with the panel(Rev A). 1. Verify height of the mounting stud in the backbox. In older backboxes,the stud musf be - shortened to prevent damage to the CPU-640. All electronics must be removed from the 3 backbox before shortening. See instructions in the warning below. QWARNING: For retrofit applications,verify the height of the backbox's mounting stud on left side under CPU,as shown in Figure 3.3 below. Stud height must not exceed 0.375 in'(9.525 mm). Early versions of the CAB-4 Series backboxes and all CAB-3 Series backboxes have studs that require shortening. Failure to shorten this 0.625 in.(15.875 mm)mounting stud will cause damage to the control panel's CPU. Remove electron ics`from backbox,permanently mount empty CHS-M2 chassis to backbox, apply nut to mounting stud to protect threading,then cut stud to proper length. Reinstall electronics as discussed in the"steps below.' WARNING: Do not cut witho'ufwashers and nuts in place to protect threading. Wear protective eye covering. If using a new CHS-M2 in a CAB-3 series backbox or in a CAB-4 series ' backbox manufactured before October 2002,verify stud height and cut any stud i that exceeds 0.375 in.(9.525 mm)as „ per Step 1 above if a CPU is being mounted above it.Reinstall electronics as discussed in the steps below. < r, i m 1 4 n U `n X 7 * U y Figure 3.3 Using the Redesigned CHS-M2 with Older Backboxes 2. Screw chassis to the backbox. ` i T A 3. Attach CPU-640 to the chassis. Slide control-panel tabs into slots on chassis and lay the board onto stand-offs so that mounting holes line up with those on the chassis.Secure with six(6) ` screws(four across the top of the board,and two to the left of the power supply)provided with the chassis.(See Figure 3.4.)5- NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 i 33 S Installation). Installing the Control Panel 4. If installing KDM-2,install the stand-offs included with the keyboard kit. (See Figure 3.4.) • The upper edge of the keyboard mounting plate rests on two stacked pairs of male-female stand-offs. Connect P/N 42185(2.0 inch,50.8 mm)to PIN 42186(1.312 inch,33.33 mm). Thread the stacked pairs of stand-offs through mounting holes on the control panel as shown in Figure 3.4. - • Thread two P/N 42166'(0.937 inch,23.8 mm)male-female stand-offs through mounting holes in the chassis rail. • Attach ribbon cable from keypad to J4 connector on control panel.(See Figure 2.3.) Align the keypad with the stand-offs and screw it down. 5. If using the NCA instead of the KDM-2,refer to Section 3.5.2"Using NCA as Primary Display"and the NCA Installation Manual. 6. If not using an LEM-320,secure the last 4 mounting holes with screws. I CAUTION: It is critical that all mounting holes of the NFS-640 are secured with a screw or standoff to insure continuity of Earth Ground. Stack of two male-female stand-offs- connect P/N 42185(2.0 inch,50.8 mm) to P/N 42186(1.312 inch,33.33 mm). Note:If not using this location,' secure these mounting holes �o with screws. • r �-a 0 l �ll`��` / a 3 Attach two(0.937 inch,23.8 mm)stand-offs to chassis rail;screw keypad mounting O ? plate to the stand-offs. t Lower edge of panel circuit modules slide into chassis slots, and upper edge mounts onto PEM studs on the chassis flange. Figure 3.4 ,Locating and Aligning Stand-offs for Keypad/Display and Panel Circuits (Chassis CHS-M2 shown) 3.5.2 Using NCA as Primary Display t The NFS-640 can be set up to use an NCA instead of a KDM-2.In this system design,connect the network/service port on the NFS-640(J1)directly to the network/service port on the NCA(J3);see } the NCA Manual for specific instructions. NOTE: This system design is required in Canadian stand-alone applications. If the NFS-640 and NCA are being used as a stand-alone pair,each device must be programmed_ separately using VeriFire Tools in its off-line programming mode.Because the VeriFire Tools computer also uses the network/service port,NFS-640 and NCA must be temporarily disconnected 34 NFS-640 Installation Manual PIN 51332:C 04/12/2005 t ' Installing the Control Panel 'Clnstallation,_, r for programming.If the NFS-640 with NCA is connected to a network,there are two additional options for programming:either connect the VeriFire Tools programming PC to the network port Ion the NCM board;or program the NFS-640 through another network node.(See VeriFire Tools on-line help for details.) 3.5.3 Loop Expander,Module , r -Installing a Loop Expander Module adds a second SLC loop to the control panel. Refer r, 4 to the Figure 3.6`for connector illustrations. 1. Thread four(4)0.937 inch(23.8 mm) g stand-offs through indicated holes in the- 'o• k CPU-640 board., 2. Plug stacker-connector into B on the CO CPU-640. 3. Lay the LEM onto the standoffs and B+ A+ B A- connect the Loop Expander Module (LEM),into the stacker-connector attached to B. Q 4. .Attach LEM using screws provided with GQ the module. Q 5. After LEM is mounted on the control- Q 13a panel,connect the SLC loops to TB 1 on o 0 — ° !0 the LEM and TB 16 on the CPU-640. Figure 3.5 SLC Connections for LEM-320 This system supports either F1ashScan or CLIP mode devices.Refer to the SLC s loop manual for wiring requirements and specific details. t NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 35 ' t ' i Installat o j Installing the Control Panel ' �r*fit.",;) • e LEM-320 CPU-640 Stacker-connector V v g $ J3 I o$ The short-pin end plugs directly into the top of the a F CPU-640 plug. e The long-pin end plugs into the back of the LEM board. ' R- Qj CAUTION: If the stacker-connector is installed incorrectly,-the short-pin end of the plug can fail to make a secure connection when plugged through the back of the LEM. 4 Figure 3.6 Mounting LEM-320 with the Stacker-connector 3.5.4 Network Control Module If networking two or more control panels(including NCAs),each unit requires a Network Control Module(NCM);wire and fiber versions are'available.The NCM-W/F can be installed in any panel circuit module position(see Section 3.5.5"Panel Circuit Modules"and Other Option Boards");the default position is immediately to the right of the control panel. 1. Mount the NCM in the selected position.If another board is going to be mounted in the slot immediately in front of it,use stand-offs provided with the next board to secure it in place. Otherwise use the screws provided with the NCM. 2. Connect J1 on the control panel to J3 on the NCM using the network cable provided(P/N 75556)as described in the NCMInstallation Document. Do not connect two NCMs via NUP ports(aka NUP to NUP). 5 3. Connect Channel A and/or Channel B as described in the NCM Installation Document. NOTE: Seethe Noti•Fire-Net Manual and NCM Installation Document for wiring diagrams and system configuration information.See the 13MP-1 Product Installation Drawing if considering mounting the module behind blank module plate in a dress plate or annunciator backbox. 36 NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 • s � 'Installing the Control Panel In§tallati n 3.5.5 Panel Circuit Modules and Other Option Boards If installing option boards into a CAB-4 Series backbox,mount and connect those boards at this time.General instructions follow;the sections about individual option boards contain any module- specific instructions.Option boards can be mounted in the front(fourth)layer of CHS-M2(see flanges as shown in Figure 3.4),or in any position on the other row(s)of equipment,using 0.937" (23.8 mm)standoffs between layers. NOTE: An option board can be mounted above a Loop Expander Module or Network Control Module;for ease of access,be sure to complete installation of those devices before mounting a second layer. 1. Slide the tabs at the bottom of the option board into slots on the chassis as shown in Figure 3.7. 2. Lay the board back onto the flanges so that the studs line up with mounting holes on the option board. ° 3. Attach the option board using screws provided with the module. t ,r NOTE: See the BMP-1 Product Installation Drawing for details if considering mounting the module behind blank module plate in a dress plate or annunciator backbox.This dress plate'is suitable for modules that do not need to be visible or accessible when the door is closed. Module Screw t li Slot 3 1 E 10 42 Shown with CHS-M2 Shown with CHS-4N Figure 3.7 Inserting a Module into a Chassis i i r NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 37 %:IGstallation� Connecting the Power Cables Chassis CHS-4N Install stand-offs on these ° two(2)studs in any one of four positions along chassis. o O/ a v , OU Figure 3.8 Location of Stand-offs on Module Chassis Mount single-space blank plate onto compatible dress panel or backbox trim ring Single-spa l blank plate E O v O /'0 Mount optional module onto standoffs on the blank plate Fasten optional module to Q4 • the plate with four screws (included). Figure 3.9 Mounting Single-space Blank Plate with Optional Module 3.6 Connecting the Power Cables QWARNING: Remove all power sources to'equipment while connecting electrical components. Leave the external,main power`breaker OFF until installation of the entire system is complete. WARNING: Several sources of power can be connected to the control panel. Before servicing the control panel, disconnect all sources of input power including the battery.While energized,the control panel and associated equipment can be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules,or interconnecting cables. 3.6.1 Overview Complete all mounting procedures and check all wiring before applying power.Electrical connections include the following: • Primary AC power source—120 VAC,50/60 Hz,3.0 A(NFS-640E uses 240 VAC,50/60 Hz, 1.5 A)from line voltage source.Overcurrent protection for this circuit must comply with v 38 NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 4 i t f 1 .a_ - Connecting the Power Cables `Ins tallation— Article 760 of the National Electrical Code(NEC)and/or local codes.Use'12 AWG(3.1 mm2) wire(maximum)with a 600-volt rating. rR I • Secondary power source—24 VDC,from batteries,installed in the control panel(or in an optional battery cabinet).Secondary(battery)power is required to support the system"during loss of primary power. • External power sources—24 VDC power for Smoke Detectors(4 wire),NACs,and i Annunciators. r See Appendix B"Electrical Specifications"fo-r details and overall installation guidelines. 3.6.2 Connecting the Control Panel to AC Power- Connect primary power as follows(see Figure 3.10 below): 1. Turn off the circuit breaker at the main power distribution panel. f 2. Remove the plastic insulating cover from TB2. 3. Connect the service ground to terminal marked EARTH. 4. Connect the primary neutral line to terminal marked NEUTRAL and the primary Hot line to terminal marked HOT. t , 5. Reinstall the plastic insulating cover over TB2. P Hot ® F F 0 . J Neutral W y Ground , a Battery > Battery(+) ® 8 r Q m B TB1 c Figure 3.10,AC&DC Power Connections 3.6:3 Checking AC Power Table 3.3 contains a checklist for checking'the system with AC power applied: QCAUTION: While checking AC power,make sure batteries are not connected. Follow the sequence of steps in Section 3.2"Installation Checklist",Table 3.1;this is Step 16. + Component Status Control panel circuit The green AC Power indicator on;the system Trouble indicator on because batteries are not connected. + board - Each panel circuit The yellow Trouble indicator may come on for approximately 10 seconds after applying AC power.(This module only applies to an unconfigured system.) Each auxiliary power The yellow Trouble indicator comes on because batteries are not connected. supply Table 3.3 AC Power Checklist NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 f 39 Instar 1rat�on Connecting the Power Cables 3.6.4 Installing and Connecting the Batteries Q WARNING: •, Battery contains sulfuric acid which can cause severe bums to the skin and eyes, and can destroy fabrics. If contact is made with sulfuric acid,immediately flush skin or eyes with water for 15 minutes and seek immediate medical attention. QWARNING: Do not connect the Battery Interconnect Cables(P/N 75560 and 75561)at this time. Make this 4 connection AFTER initial system primary powerup. Follow sequence of steps in Section 3.2 "Installation Checklist",Table 3.1;this is Step 17. Batteries(2)are installed in the control panel'cabinet or in a separate battery cabinet which can be mounted below the control panel or up to 20 feet(6.096 m)away from the control panel,in the same room! Connect the battery as follows(see Figure 3.10 above): 1. Install batteries(2)into bottom of cabinet or into separate battery cabinet. 2. Connect the red cable from TB I(+)on the control panel to the positive(+)terminal of one t battery. 3. Connect the black cable from TBI(—)on the control panel to the negative(—)terminal of the ' other battery. F 4. Connect the remaining cable between the negative(-)terminal on the first battery to the positive(+)terminal on the second battery. '. 3.6.5 APS-6R Auxiliary Power Supply Connections If an optional APS-6R power supply is installed in the cabinet,connect it with no power applied; follow sequence of steps in Section 3.2"Installation Checklist",Table 3.1;this is Step 4. For all information pertaining to these connections see,the APS-6R Instruction Manual. v 3.6.6 External DC Power Output Connections a Terminal TB7 provides two(2)power outputs,resettable and non-resettable.Each output is power- limited.Follow sequence of steps in Section_ 3.2"Installation Checklist",Table 3.1;this is part of Step 6. Non-resettable Resettable Power Power 24V NONRST 24V RESET e m V F- ,• 8 Q o � r Figure 3.11 Power Supply DC Outputs-T137 24 VDC Resettable Power Circuit(Four-Wire Smoke Detectors).The power supply provides a single 24 VDC filtered,power-limited,resettable power circuit for devices that require resettable power(such as four-wire smoke detectors).This circuit is power-limited,but must be supervised.To provide supervision,install a UL-listed end-of-line power supervision relay(such as the EOLR-1)after the last device.Connect the power supervision relay normally open contact in k 40 NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 k A R I NAC Connections'&Releasing Circuits' 1 Ins allation F series with an Initiating Device Circuit(IDC).The four-wire power circuit energizes the power supervision relay.When you reset the system,the control.panel removes power from these terminals for approximately 15 seconds. Connect external field wires to the power supply terminals TB7 RESET(+)and(—)to provide up to .1.25 A of current for powering four-wire smoke detectors.See Figure 3.11 above. 24 VDC Non-resettable Power Circuit.The power supply provides one 24 VDC filtered, power-limited,non-resettable power output,capable of up to 1.25 A.Use this circuit to power devices that require low-noise 24 VDC power(such as annunciators or the TM-4). Connect external field wires to power sup (—)ply terminals TB7 NONRST(+)andto provide up to 1.25'A of non-resettable current for powering external devices such as annunciators:See Figure 3.11 above. CAUTION: '+ During system reset,power remains at terminals TB7 NONRST(+)and(—). 4 3.7 NAC Connections & Releasing Circuits The control panel provides four NAC terminals as shown in Figure 3.12.Each can be configured as ' Style Y(Class B)or Style Z,(Class A)as shown in Figure 3.13.Each circuit can provide 2.5 A of ' current,but the total current drawn from the main power supply cannot exceed 6.0 A in alarm r condition(refer to Table A.2).NAC circuits are supervised and power-limited.Use UL-listed 24 VDC notification appliances only(refer to the Device Compatibility Document). UL-listed ELR-2.2K, O °° 1/2 W(supplied) TB6-NAC#1E , I E TB5-NAC#2 nB- B- A+ A- B+ B- A+ A- B+ -B- A+ A- 5 TB4-NAC#3 • e d c � ' a Unused Circuits Style Y(Class B) Style Z(Class A) G, T63-NAC#4 :- Connection Connection + V Figure 3.13 Notification Appliance/Releasing Figure 3.12 NAC Terminals Circuit Connections NOTE: Any NAC can be programmed as'a releasing circuit,but only one releasing device per circuit is allowed..For more information, refer to Section 4.5"Releasing Applications"in this Y manual and the NFS-640 Programming Manual. Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for UL-listed compatible releasing devices. Sample connections for NAC terminals are shown in y. Figure 3.13. Follow sequence of steps in Section 3.2"Installation Checklist",Table 3.1;this is part of Step 6. a + NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 - 41 i 5 t Installation Output Relay Connections 3.8' Output Relay Connections The panel provides a set of Form`-C relays.These are rated for 2.0 A at 30 VDC(resistive): Alarm-T138 • Trouble'T139 • Supervisory-TB 10 • Security-TB 11 The Supervisory and Security contacts can also be configured as Alarm contacts by setting switches SWI and SW5 away from the factory default positions shown in Figure 3.14. Follow r i sequence of steps in Section 3.2"Installation Checklist",Table 3.1;this is part of Step 6. ALARM RELAY TROUBLE RELAY' SUPERVISORY RELAY SECURITY RELAY NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO J\y�NNCC{ C SWI is set to Supervisory Tea T89 TWO SW1 SW5 SW5 is set to Security t-FNU]— . f-PXJI—► Move switch to opposite u I SUPV ALARM SECUR ALARM position to set to Alarm. Y � d i m i. Figure 3.14 Form-C Relay Connections 3.9 Backup-Alarm Switches r t WARNING: Do not enable the BACKUP option switch for any of the four Notification Appliance•Cii`cuits(1 ACs)if they are used for releasing functions! Backup alarm switches are provided that enable NACs 1 NAC 3 and the alarm relay to activate during a backup alarm T condition.If the main board's microcontroller fails and z an alarm is reported by any detector or a monitor 2 w 4 module tfiat has backup reporting enabled,the NAC will turn on if the corresponding switch was enabled. y� The alarm will activate during microcontroller failure 8` regardless of the settings of Switch 6-9. r • Switch 6-NAC#1 a� 1 • Switch 7-NAC#2 • Switch 8-NAC#3 Figure 3.15 Backup Alarm Switches • Switch 9-NAC44 So,for example,if Switch 6 and Switch 8 were enabled at the time of an alarm during microcontroller failure,NAC#1 and NAC#3 would activate.Follow sequence of steps in Section 3.2"Installation Checklist",Table 3.1;this is Step 7. 42 NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 ` r } Installing a Transmitter Module TM-4 Installation 3.10 Installing a Transmitter Module TM-4 TM-4 is power-limited.Connections are on TB7 nonresettable output and TB 13 EIA-485 ACS Mode.Refer to the Transmitter Module TM-4 installation document for installation details. 3.11 UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements Power-limited and nonpower-limited circuit wiring must remain separated in the cabinet.All power-limited circuit wiring must remain at least 0.25 inches(6.35 mm)from any nonpower- limited circuit wiring.All power-limited and nonpower-limited circuit wiring must enter and exit the cabinet through different knockout and or conduits.To maintain separation,group non-power limited modules together,i.e.,group modules on the same side of the enclosure or in separate rows. Figure 3.16 shows one configuration that meets these UL requirements.The first two rows of modules are configured with at least a 0.25 inch(6.35 mm)separation between power-limited and nonpower-limited wiring;AC and battery wiring is routed away from power-limited wiring. Power-limited Circuits mm t r 1 Nonpower- limitedPower- circuits 't7 limited circuits 4 91 a 0 To cabinet-mounted battery Figure 3.16 Typical Wiring for UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements NOTE: AC and battery wiring are not power-limited. Maintain at least 0.25 inches(6.35 mm) between power-limited and non power-limited circuit wiring. Install tie wraps and adhesive squares to secure the wiring. Use a power-limited source for relay output on terminals TB8—TB11. 3.11.1 Labeling Modules and Circuits ' ` At the time of installation,each nonpower-limited circuit connected to ACM-8R,ARM-41 CRM- 4RK,CRE-4,and LDM-R32 modules must be identified in the space provided on the cabinet door label when connected to a non-power-limited source of power. The label lists all compatible power-limited modules and circuits;also see Figure 2.3 at the start of this manual. The following devices are power-limited only when connected to power-limited sources:ARM-4, CRM-4RK,CRE-4,LDM-R32.When one of these devices is connected to a non-power-limited source,the power-limited marking must be removed. j NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 43 Installation.—, Installing Panel Circuit Modules 3.12 Installing Panel Circuit Modules 3.12.1 Overview Installation of a panel circuit module is divided into five(5)operations: • Mounting an optional expander board to the module(e.g.mounting ICE-4 onto an ICM-4RK). • Connecting communication ribbon cables from Control Panel to the module. • Installing the module onto a chassis. • Connecting modules to the power supply. • Field wiring the module. Refer to Section 2.10"Panel Circuit Modules"for a complete list of modules and their expanders. 3.12.2 Mounting Expander Boards Expander Board Modules,such as ICE-4 or CRE-4,need to be mounted onto their respective modules(ICM-4RK,CRM-4RK)prior to installation onto a chassis.Figure 3.17 illustrates the steps to mount an Expander Module: I. Remove one module support screw and set it aside for later use. 2. Replace the module support screw with one module stand-off. 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the three remaining module support screws. 4. Insert pins on the front of the expander board into connector on the back of the module.Make sure the pins are in line;then,press the two units together until they snap into place. 5. Install the four module support screws(removed earlier)through the back of the expander board and into the stand-offs.Tighten securely. Remove existing module supportInstall module ° screw stand=off Steps 1 8,2 Plug in the expander board ` I Secure with module * � i support screws Y 8` . 41 O O lobF O .d Steps 4 8,5 Figure 3.17 Expander Module Installation 44 NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 Installing Panel Circuit`Modules - Installation - a 3.12.3 Connecting Ribbon Cables.for a CAB-4 Series Backbox Expander Row Ribbon Cables connect panel circuit modules to the Control Panel. .Figure 3.18 shows a typical wiring setup using two Expander Row Ribbon Cables(P/N 71088)to connect the control panel to two rows of four(4)panel circuit modules each below the Control Panel in a CAB-4'Series backbox. a J6-Third Row J5-Second Row r Expander Row Ribbon Cable(P/N 71088) r — - Group of panel V modules in second cabinet row $ ` P1.1—P1.8 P2.1—P2.8 P3.1—P3.8 P4.1—P4.8 r Expander Row Ribbon Cable(P/N 71088) ry ... . ........ l Group of panel modules in third cabinet row W P5.1—P5.8 P6.1—P6.8 P7.1—P7.8 P8.1-138.8 r Figure 3.18 Expander Row Ribbon Cable Setup 3.12.4. Installing the Panel Circuit Modules To install a panel circuit module such as a ICM-4RK or CRM-4RK into the chassis: a. r I. Angle the module into the chassis so that the lower board edge slips into the chassis slots as shown in Figure 3.7. 2. Push the upper end of the module into the upper,opening in the chassis. 3. Secure the module to the chassis with the two module screws(provided with the module). Tighten securely. 4. Connect the Ribbon Cable to the module. h. y. 4 • NFS-640 Installation Manual PM 51332.0 04/12/2005 45 i 6 N..Instal�—1 Installing Panel Circuit Modules 3.12.5 Connecting ICM-4RK and ICE-4 Modules, I The total current available for any group of Notification Appliance Circuits(NACs),other than the four NACs on the control panel,cannot exceed the following: • 6.0 A when powered from the APS-6R l 1.25 A when powered from a NFS-640 DC power output terminal 9 Figure 3.19 shows the wire connectors on the bottom of the ICM-4RK and the ICE-4 modules. a a J5 00 00 ICM-41RK 3 J6 0 U E t J5 o-o oo 0 " _ ICE-4 J6 Figure 3.19 ICM-4RK/ICE-4 Connectors R ' Power Supply Connections Figure 3.20 illustrates typical connections from main power supply. Eight NACs that ` Bell power cable(P/N 75400)or Ei 9 alternate Power Harness(P/N 71093,with share 1.25 A lug's removed and wires stripped), A lack wire(—),Blue wire(+) J5 J6 ICM-4 m - ~ / J5 � U ICE-4 0 # 24V NONRST` 24V RESET L Power Cable P/N 71091 TB7 on Control Panel 1 figure 3.20 Main Power Supply Connection i e Multiple Power Supplies Cut JPl and JP2 on ICM-4RK when supplying 24V power from two separate sources to the ICM-4RK.ICM-4RK circuits 1-2 will receive their power from J5;ICM-4RK circuits 3-4 will ` receive their power from J6. Cut JP1 and JP2 on ICE-4 when supplying power from separate sources to expander circuits 5-8. ICM-4RK circuits 5-6 will receive power from J5 on the ICE-4 and ICM4RK circuits 7-8 will receive power from J6 on the ICE-4. See Figure 3.21 for jumper locations. r ' 46 NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 t 'InstallingPdnel Circuit Modules LInsiallation ICM-4RK/ICE-4 Jumpers i JP1 )JP2 J5 J6 Two circuits that APS-6R#1 J5 share 3 A of one, APS-6R(#1) ICM-4RK• Two circuits that APS-6R#2 J6 share 3 A of one APS-61R(#2) i Figure 3.21 Sample ICM-4RK Configuration for Multiple Power Supplies, 3.12.6 Field-Wiring the ICM-4RK and ICE4 (NFPA Style Y or Z) Guidelines for field-wiring: • Notification Appliance Circuits(NACs)are supervised,power-limited,and can connect to an energy-limited cable: • Use only the compatible,UL-listed notification appliances listed in the Device Compatibility Document. • Wire notification appliances according to the manufacturer's instructions. , • Maximum current per circuit is 3.0 A.Maximum current per module depends on the type of ` power supply(standard or auxiliary). • Canadian installations require model N-ELR End-of-Line Resistor Assembly(Style Y only). • Size NAC wiring so the voltage drop does not exceed the minimum rated voltage of the notification appliance used as the last device on the circuit. y • For zone coded applications,refer to the UZC-256 Universal Zone Coder manual. • The ICM-4RK is California Code programmable(micropiocessor P/N 34077 Rev.B or higher).To program for California Code,cut diode D35 as shown in Figure 3.23.(See ' appendix section of the Programming Manual for more detail.) :Typical NFPA Typical NFPA Style Y(Claim B),NAC Style Z(Class A)NAC 4.7K, 1/2 watt ELR + P/N 71252 1. + UL-listed 24 VDC + Polarized Devices + Jumpers for + Jumpers for unused circuits unused,circuits n n Inn : 00000000 00000000 j B+A+A—B—•B+A+A—B— B+A+A—B—B+A+A-B— 4 i U Figure 3.22 field-Wiring'an ICM-4RK/ICE-4 NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 47 ti Installation Installing Panel Circuit Modules r R35 0 0 R40 R3S ® D35 D36 R32 CM CM ® i + 6 a ® ® Cut D35 on the circuit board to ® ® produce California code. Y E { Figure 3.23 Location of D35 on ICM-4RK Circuit Board 3.12.7 Connecting CRM-4RK/CRE-4 Modules Guidelines for field-wiring the CRM-4RK and the CRE=4: • Form=C relay contacts(silver alloy)used for medium duty switching or pilot duty. • Terminals will accept wire sizes from 12 AWG to 18 AWG(3.1 to 0.78 mm2). • Activation of a module or expander relay occurs automatically when an alarm is detected on a programmed IDC. • UL contact ratings are 5 A at 125 VAC(resistive)or 30 VDC(resistive)and 2 A at 125 VAC 9 (inductive). • For more information,refer to Section 3.11 "UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements". • For typical field-wiring connections,refer to Figure 3.24. Optional CRE-4 Contro Relay Expander NO NC C NO NC C NO NcC NO NC C 000000000000 NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 k @ O MODULE CONTROL MODULE CONTROL $ TYPE RELAY- TYPE RELAY y SPS GREEN• LAMPS GREEN• K Typical connections for a YMOW• YELLOW. d Form-C control relay in swrtON X normal position. CRM-4RK w " LU U t t Figure 3.24 Field-Wiring a CRM-4RK or CRE-4 Module D - t . t 48 NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 t Auxiliary Relay Module(ARM-4):Product-Specific Details Installation 3.13 Auxiliary_ Relay Module (ARM-4): Product-Specific Details 3.13.1 Overview If a CRM-4RK/CRE-4 is to be incorporated into the control panel and an ARM-4 is being driven by it,note the following: • Each ARM-4 must be supported by one CRM-4RK or one CRE-4. • If using ARM-4's for both modules,mount two ARM-4's in separate positions. • If mounted in FACP enclosure keep all non-power limited wiring separate from power limited wiring. For ease of installation,service,and wiring mount the ARM-4 module in a position on the chassis that will not have any other module or expander board in front of it.However,you can install the ARM-4 directly behind the CRM-4RK or CRE-4. ARM-4 mounts in the second,third or fourth row,of a CAB-4 series backbox,against the back of a chassis CHS-4 or CHS-4L. The ARM-4 may be mounted in any of the 8 adjacent backbox positions the cable can reach. 3:13.2 Installation To install the Auxiliary Relay Module in the chassis: • Select a mounting position for the module on,the chassis. • Install two(2)mounting stand-offs onto the studs of the chassis,at the selected location,as shown in Figure 3.8 on page 38 and Figure 3.25.Tighten securely. • Install three(3)support stand-offs,with screws,onto the PC board in the locations shown in Figure 3.8 or in the two right-hand positions on the first row.Tighten securely. • Position module over the stand-offs on the chassis;fasten the module to the chassis with the two(2)retaining screws.Tighten securely. j • Connect one end of the Cable(P/N 71092)to plug P1.on the ARM-4. Ndte:The other end of the cable is connected to jumper JP5 on the CRM-4RK or CRE-4. • Connect all available external wiring at this time.Refer to Section 3.13.3 "Field Wiring an Auxiliary Relay Module". g KI Terminal TB1 Assignments (typ.4 places) On 2 K3 ILS II-K2 These 2 holes for These 3 holes for, mounting stand-offs. �K3 �Ka support stand-offs. I NC NO c Nc o c (Also see Figure 3.8 T TB3 - on page 38 for t chassis drawing.) r P-1 2h ' Connection fore °' r Cable P/N 71092 ...P1 �� , a K3 K4 4 s { Figure 3.25 ARM-4 Stand-off and Terminal Locations I NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 49 i Installation Installing Remote Printers and/or CRT 3.13.3 Field Wiring an Auxiliary Relay Module The figure.above shows terminal assignments for ARM-4 module control relays Kl-K4,which control nonpower-limited circuits.Power-limited and nonpower-limited circuit wiring must remain separated by at least 0.25 inch(6.35 mm)within the cabinet and exit the cabinet through different knockouts,conduits,or both. NOTE: For more information, refer to Section 3.11 "UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements". The table contains contact ratings for relays K1-K4 on the ARM-4 module: Contacts Resistive Load Normally Open(N.O.)Normally Closed(N.C.) 125 VAC 20A 10A 30 VDC 20A 10A Table 3.4 Contact Ratings for K1-K4 on the ARM-4 Module 3.14 Installing Remote Printers and/or CRT 3.14.1 Custom Cable Fabrication A custom cable needs to be fabricated to connect the PRN Printer,Keltron Printer or the CRT-2 Monitor to the system.Length of the cable will vary with each installation,but should not exceed a maximum length of 50 feet(15.24 meters).Printer must be installed in the same room as panel. Construct cable as follows: 1. Using overall foil/braided-shield twisted-pair cable,properly connect one end to the DB-25 Connector using the wiring specifications shown in the table below.(Custom cable kit P/N 90106 is provided.) 2. Tighten clamp on connector to secure cable. DB-25 Connector TB14 on Control Panel (Custom cable kit 90106) Pin 3 TX Pin 2 RX Pin 7 REF 3.14.2 Installing and Configuring the PRN Series Printer When connected to the Control Panel via an EIA-232 interface,the PRN prints a copy of all status changes within the control panel and time-stamps the printout with the time of day and date the event occurred.It provides 80 columns of data on standard 9"by 11"tractor-feed paper. NOTE: You can also use the EIA-232 printer interface with UL-listed information technology equipment,such as personal computers,to monitor the control panel for supplementary purposes. This section contains information on connecting a printer to the control panel and for setting the printer options. Connecting a Remote PRN Series Printer Remote printers require a 120 VAC,50/60 Hz primary power source.If required for the fire alarm system configuration(for example,a Proprietary Fire Alarm System),a remote printer requires a secondary power source(battery backup).Because a secondary power source is not provided,use a 50 NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 Installing Remote Printers and/or CRT ('In allation� separate Uninterruptable Power Supply(UPS)that is UL-listed for Fire Protective Signaling.You may use your building emergency power supply,so long as it meets the power continuity requirements of NFPA 72.Refer to NFPA 72 for further details.- ,. Connect the remote printer to the Control Panel as follows: 1. Connect the three(3)open leads of the custom cable to the TB 14 terminal block on the control panel as shown in Figure 3.26. ' 2. Plug the DB-25 connector end of the custom cable into the EIA-232 port of the remote(printer. Tighten securely. 3 2 Note:Outputs are power-limited but ? o 0 o are not supervised. DB-25 connector on PRN series printer(female �_ Terminate one end of t socket shown) shield at backbox r ' ®RR PVCRT ,. fT TX RX REF 8 Control Panel c 3 TB 14 TB15 C i c i 1 Figure 3.26 Remote Printer Connections Setting Printer Options Refer to the documentation supplied with the PRN series printer for instructions on using the printer menu controls.Set the printer options(under the menu area)according to the settings listed in Table 3.5. r Option +Setting Option Setting Font+ HS Draft CPI 10 CPI LPI 6 LPI Skip 0.5 I ESC Character ESC Emulate Epson FX-850 Bidirectional Copy ON 1/0, ' CG-TAB Graphic Buffer 40K Country E-US ASCII Serial Auto CR OFF Baud 9600 or 2400 Color Option Not Installed Format 7 Bit,Even,1 Stop Fofmlen Protocol XON/XOFF 'Lines 6LPI=60 Character Set Standard Standard Exec 10.5 SI.Zero On Auto LF Off PAPER BIN 1 12/72 k BIN 2 12/72" A SINGLE 12/72" PUSH TRA 12/72" PULL TRA 12/72" a PAP ROLL 12/72" Table 3.5 PRN Setup Options j - . • ,r NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 r 51 - r t�Installation Installing Remote Printers and/or CRT 3.14.3 Installing and Configuring a Keltron-Printer Connect the remote printer to the Control Panel as follows: 1. Connect the three(3)open leads of the custom cable to the TB 14 terminal block on the control panel as shown in Figure 3.27. 2. Connect DC power from TB7 terminal block on the control panel as shown in Figure 3.27. ' 3. -Plug the DB-25 connector end of the custom cable into the EIA-232 port of the Keltron printer. Tighten securely. 9 Keltron printer 31 2 24 VDC o o e o s connections DB-25 connector (14 AWG on Keltron Printer 2.00 mm ) (female socket Terminate one end of I shown) shield at backboX MMMif NV RESE PRI TER PCICRT R F TX RX REF n}. ~ Control Panel 3 TB14 TB15 S Figure 3.27 Keltron Printer Connections Setting up the Keltron Printer ' Set up a Keltron printer as follows: 1. The printer communicates using the following protocol: •Baud Rate:9600 •Parity:Even •Data bits:7 2. Set the printer DIP switches SPI and SP2 according to settings in Table 3.6. .R SP1J On Off SP2 On Off 1 X 1 X 2 X 2 X 3 X 3 X 4 X 4 X 5 X 5 X 6 X 6 X 7 X 7 X e 8 X 8 X r Table 3.6 Keltron DIP Switch Settings 3.14.4 Installing and Configuring a CRT-2 A CRT-2 can only be used in a non-networked application when used with the NFS-640.For further details on setting up the CRT-2,refer to the NFS-640 Operations Manual. Connect a CRT-2 to the Control Panel as follows: 1. Connect the three(3)open leads of the custom cable to the TB f5 terminal block on the control E panel as shown in Figure 3.28. 2. Plug the DB-25 connector end of the custom cable into the EIA-232 port of the CRT-2.Tighten securely. r 3. Set parameters as discussed in Table 3.28. 52 NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 ,e Installing Remote Printers and/or CRT Installation y 3 2 0 0 . 0 Y DB-25 connector on CRT-2(female socket shown) Terminate one end of a shield at backbox PRINTER 'TR RT 9 r; Control TX RX REF R F A, 3 , Panel TB14 TB15 v G ' fi Figure 3.28 Connecting a CRT-2 a Setting CRT-2 Parameters The CRT-2 communicates with the control panel through a protocol defined by thirteen gr'oup's of parameters.To access a parameter group,press the corresponding function key(FI-F12)as shown in Table 3.7 below.You can then program parameters in each group.' Enter the CRT-2 setup menu by pressing and holding the<Ctrl>key while pressing the<Scroll Lock>key:Use arrow keys to move through the selections in each setup group;Ipress the space bar to view the options for each parameter.When finished programming all setup groups,press the <Pause>key.To save all changes,press'<Y>. ' Table 3.7 shows the standard settings for using the CRT-2 with the NFS-640;for one instance where these settings may change slightly see Section 3.14.6"Connecting Multiple Printer's,CRTs, or,CRT/PRN Combination". The basic settings for using the CRT-2 with NFS-640 are: •Baud Rate 9600 •Data format 8 1 N •.Protocol xon/off. i NOTE: .This section covers installation only;for information on how the CRT-2 functions as part of the fire alarm system,see the NFS-640 Operations Manual. Function Key CRT-2 Parameters ,; J F1:Quick Emulation=CRT-2 EIA Baud Rate=9600 EIA Data Format=8/l/N ("Read Status"key) Comm Mode=Full,Duplex Aux Baud Rate=9600 Aux Data Format=8/l/N Enhanced=On Language=U.S. Host/Printer-EIA/Aux F2:Genrl Emulation=CRT-2 , Enhanced=On Auto Wrap=Off ("Alter Status"key) Auto Font Load=On Auto Page=Off Auto Scroll=On Monitor Mode=Off Bell Volume=09 Warning Bell=On HosUPrinter-EIA/Aux I F3:Displ Page Length=24 Screen Length=26 Lines Screen Video=Normal ("Prog"key) Display Cursor--On Cursor-Blink Line Auto Adjust Cursor--On Columns=80' , Width Change Clear-Off Speed=Normal- ' Scroll=Jump Refresh Rate=60 Hz '_ Overscan Borders=Off F4:Kybd Language=U.S. Char Set Mode=ASCII Key Mode=ASCII ("Spl Funct"key) Keyclick=Off Key Repeat=Off Margin Bell=Off -,-.Key Lock=Caps' Keyboard Present=Yes F5:Keys Enter Key=<CR> Return Key=<CR> Backspace=<BS>/<DEL> ("Prior"key) Alt Key=Meta Disconnect--Pause Desk Acc=Disabled Pound Key=U.S. F6:Ports EIA Baud Rate=9600 . EIA Data Format=8/l/N EIA Parity Check=On 1 ("Next"key) Aux Baud Rate=9600 Aux Data Format=8/l/N Aux Parity Check=On EIA X4--Xon-Xoff EIA Recv=Xon-Xoff(XPC) EIA Xmt Pace=Baud Aux Xmt=Xon-Xoff Aux Recv=Xon-Xoff(XPC) Aux Xmt Pace=Baud EIA Break=Off EIA Modem Control=Off EIA Disconnect=2 sec Aux Break=Off Aux Modem Cbntrol=Off Aux Disconnect=2 sec t r Table 3.7 Standard CRT-2 Settings for Use with NFS-640 (Sheet 1 of 2) NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 53 I ' ' 6 q:�Jn'stalla`tion-,7� Installing Remote Printers and/or CRT Function Key CRT-2 Parameters F1:Quick Emulation=CRT-2 EIA Baud Rate=9600 EIA Data Format=8/l/N ("Read Status"key) Comm Mode=Full Duplex Aux Baud Rate=9600 Aux Data Format=8/l/N Enhanced=On Language=U.S. Host/Printer-EIA/Aux FT Host Comm Mode=Full Duplex Local=Off• Recv<CR>=<CR> ("Auto Step"key) Recv<DEL>=Ignore Send ACK=On Send Line Term=<CR><LF> Send Block Term=<CR> Null Suppress=On F8:Print Prnt Line Term=<CR><LF> Prnt Block Term=<CR> Secondary Recv--Off ("Activ Signal"key) F9:Emul Attribute=Page Bright Video=Off Page Edit=Off WPRT Intensity=Dim WPRT Reverse=Off -WPRT Underline=Off WPRT Blink=Off Display NV Labels=Off Save Labels=On I Status Line=Off Fkey Speed=Normal F10 Setup Group F10 does not affect communications with the control panel. F11 Setup Group F11 does not affect communications with the control panel. F12:Prog Program the function keys as follows: F1 -A F2-B F3--C�F4-D F5-E F6-F F7-G ("Ack Step"key) F8-H F9-1 F10-J F11 -K F12-L F13-M F14-N F15-O F16-P Shift F13-Q Table 3.7 Standard CRT-2 Settings for Use with NFS-640 (Sheet 2 of 2) 3.14.5 Connecting a PC A PC can be hooked up to the Control Panel EIA-232 port(JI)to allow the VeriFire Tools programming utility to upload and download the operating program of the control panel.Refer to the insert in the VeriFire Tools CD and to the program's on-line help function for instructions. NOTE: Download operations that change the basic program of the control panel must be performed by responsible service personnel in attendance at the control panel.After downloading ' a program,test the control panel in accordance with NFPA 72-1999. k 3.14.6 Connecting Multiple Printers, CRTs, or CRT/PRN Combination Connecting multiple devices requires changing the CRT-2 setup using the FI(Quick)menu: • Set Host/Printer—EIA/AUX. • Set EIA Data Format--8/1/N. L • _ If the AUX device is a printer,set the Printer and AUX Data Format--7/1/E. • If the AUX device is a second CRT-2,set the AUX Data Format=8/I/N. r Connect multiple devices as shown in Figure 3.29. r To Control Panel TB15-REF TB15-TX 3 3 TB15-RX O 000000 000 o O O 000000 0 o O o 00000000 oo0 oa0000000000 To AUX Port of CRT-2 To EIA-232 port of CRT-2 r (female socket shown) (female socket shown) " o a o C To EIA-232 port of next CRT-2 or PRN(female socket shown) E a Note:For wire'requirements,see Table B.1 in Appendix B"Electrical Specifications". w Figure 3.29 Connecting Multiple Devices on the EIA-232 Circuit 54 NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 i 3 Wiring a Signaling Line Circuit(SLC) i lnstallation 3.15 Wiring a Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) ■Overview Communication between the control panel and intelligent and addressable initiating,monitor,and control devices takes place through a Signaling Line Circuit(SLC).You can wire an SLC to meet the requirements of NFPA Style 4,Style 6,or Style 7 circuits.This manual provides requirements and performance details specific to this control panel;for installation information and general information,refer to the SLC bring Manual. ■Wiring Maximum wiring distance of an SLC using 12 AWG(3.1 mm2)wire is 12,500 feet(3810 meters) total twisted-pair for Style 4,Style 6 and Style 7 circuits. ■Capacity The NFS-640 provides one(1)SLC,with a total capacity of 318 intelligent/addressable devices: • 01-159 intelligent detectors • 01-159 monitor and control modules An optional expander board provides one(1)additional SLC,with the same capacity. i ■Installation This control panel supports one or two SLC loops;a second SLC loop is obtained by installing an LEM-320 module.SLC loop#1 connects to TB 16 on the control panel;SLC loop#2 connects to TB 1 on the LEM-320.For details on designing,installing and configuring SLC loops,see the SLC Wiring Manual. I SLC1 B+ A+ B- A- OB+ A+ B- A-TB1 TB16 SLC Loop#1 Connections a SLC Loop#2 Connections on FACP's main circuit board on Loop Expander Module k SLC B SLC A 8 a s a SLC B(output loop) 3 a • s 0 SLC A(loop return) T-Tapping is not allowed a on a four-wire SLC. g R Use either B+ A+ B- :A- `SLC Loop#1 S+ A+.B .A_ or SLC Loop#2 Style 4 SLC Loops Style 6 SLC Loops 1 Figure 3.30 SLC Loop Connections and Wiring i NFS-640 Installation Manual P/N 51332:C 04/12/2005 55 M1 � a S I DN-60645:A MPFF8(E) and s HPFF8CM(E) NOTIFIER R; 8 Amp and 24-Volt Power Supplies by Honeywell Power Supplies I Description The Honeywell HPFF8(E) and HPFF8CM(E) are Notification Appliance Circuit(NAC)Expander Power Supplies designed to r extend the power capabilities of`existing NACs and provide 1 power for auxiliary devices. The HPFF8 and HPFF8CM con- nects to any 12 or 24V Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) or � � operates stand-alone. They provide regulated and filtered 24VDC power to four NAC's and an auxiliary output. The NAC outputs are rated at 3.0 amps each and.the auxiliary output is rated at 2.0 amps (this output is continuously supplied,even in alarm,and there- a fore must be taken into account for power supply loading and battery size calculations).The combined output cannot exceed 8.0 amps. The HPFFB and HPFFBCM provide independent output circuit //�HPFF8 supervision so in the event of a NAC fault they can notify the tom..._..._ attached FACP. In addition they have a trouble memory fea- ture that displays past troubles(by NAC)for rapid diagnostics. Synchronization is built in for five appliance brands. The HPFF8 and HPFF8CM have two fully independent super- vised initiating circuits that can be used for synchronized strobes and coded horns. Their NAC outputs may be config- ured as any of the following: r,•"'foucClass B(Style+Y) • two Class A(Style Z) • two Class B and one Class A — • four Class A with the optional HPP31076 Class A adapter These power supplies contain an internal Battery charger capable of charging up to 26.0 amp-hour(AH)batteries. HPFF8CM The HPFF8 is mounted,in a lockable wall cabinet that can accommodate up to two 18AH batteries. The HPFF8CM is_T Two Class B&one Class A. designed to mount in Notifier's large equipment enclosure (D- —Two Class A(Style Z). sized EQ series cabinet; order separately). Up to four —Four Class A(requires the HPP31076 Class A adapter). HPFF8CM supplies can be mounted in a D-sized EQ cabinet. Four field-programmable operational modes: Each HPFF8CM can accommodate two 12AH batteries. • One of the most challenging aspects of a retrofit application is —Pass-through. locating the existing End-of-Line(EOL)resistor. In these appli- —Temporal generator. cations that have EOL values other than the 3.9k normally —Sync generator. used with the HPFF8, a single resistor matching the existing —Pass-through Filtered. EOL can be used as a reference for all the outputs.This fea- Temporal coding and sync protocols compatible with the fol- ture speeds installation and system checkout because the lowing notification appliance brands: actual EOL does not need to be located and changed in the circuit.The reference resistor must be within the range of 1.9k —System Sensor. to 25k. —Faraday. NOTE:4 separate programming resistors for the HPFF8 are pro- —Amseco. vided in the hardware kit shipped with each HPFF8(E) and —Cooper-Wheelock. HPFFBCM(E). They are 3.9K(5 of these are provided,need only —Gentex. 1 for programming),2.2K(1 each),4.7K(1 each)and 1 O(1 each) 1 • Protocol pass-through for synchronizing large systems. Features • Two fully independent supervised input/output control circuits. • Listed to.UL Standard 864,9th edition. • Redundant activation operation for survivability. • Four (4) power limited supervised notification application ' Supports FACP's Selectable Silence ability. .t circuits (NAC's) capable of supplying +24VDC at 3.0 amp • 2.0 amp auxiliary continuously supplied output. maximum each. • Eight status LEDs. t • NAC output circuits may be configured as any of the follow- • Supervised AC input,battery voltage,auxiliary'output,Char- ing: ger,and earth ground faults. —Four Class B(Style Y). DN-60645:A•08/06/2010—Page 1 of 2 t F " k • Trouble indication for supervision of the following: HPFFBCME:240VAC/50Hz version of HPFMM;y- ; ; -NAC circuits. _ HPP31076:Class A(Style Z) NAC Adaptor. Increase Class A -Auxiliary output. circuits from 2 to 4. -AC input. _ Large Equipment Enclosure: EQ series cabinet for mounting -Battery charger voltage. HPFFBCM power supplies consists of a backbox (EQBB-D4) -Earth ground faults. and a locking door(EQDR-D4). Order separately. • Optional two-hour delay for AC loss. XP6-C: Six-circuit supervised addressable control module • Separate Trouble and AC Fail Form-C relay contacts. _ activated through FACP programming on a select basis to con- trot power supply activation or output. • The.Trouble Form-C relay contacts selectable for immediate FCM-1: Supervised addressable control module activated ora 2 hour delay with AC failure. r through FACP programming to activate power supply. • 26 AH battery charger capability: ' -HPFF8(E)supports two 12V 18AH batteries BAT-12180: Battery,'12 volt, 18.0 AH(two required). ' -HPFFBCM(E)supports two 12V 12AH batteries per unit. BAT-1 2260: Battery, 12 volt,26.0 AH(two required). • NAC Overload protection and indication. BAT-12120: Battery, 12 volt, 12.0 AH(two required). • Provision for mounting single or 6 circuit addressable con- BAT-1270:Battery, 12 volt,7.0 AH(two required). trol or relay modules inside the enclosure, (Use mounting 90474: Mounting kit;"required to attach an addressable mod- kit PN 90475.) ,n ' ule onto the control circuit board(included with supply). f • Standard Honeywell key'and,lock can be replaced with the ' NOTIFIER key and lock: 17045KIT:,Notifier key and lock set. Specifications:.~�- -_ :_ Listings and Approvals Primary~ Input Power: 120VAC 60Fiz, 3.6A standard; Listings and approvals below apply to all. In some cases,cer- L 240VAC,50 Input on units with E suffix. tain modules may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be'in process.Listed under UL 864 9th Edition. (-Secondary Power:24 volt operation:two 7-26 AH batteries. UL Listed:S24562 QBatteyCharging Capacity:U-to 26 AH batteries. . FM Approved _ HPFF8 Cabinet: Holds up to two 18AH batteries. • `CSFM:7315-1637:0102 _HPFFBCM:Holds up to two 12AH batteries. NYFD:COA#6032 Total Output Current:8.OA max. f"Standby Current:0.075 A. AuxiliaryPower Output:2.OA under all conditions. NAC.Output Ratings: 24VDC fully regulated,-3.OA max per, circuit(8.OA total). a End-of-Line Resistor Range:1.9K to 25k ohm,,h watt. Prod- r uct ships with 4 separate programming resistors. They are f 3.9K(5 each-only need ode for programming),2.21K(1 each), 4.7K(1 each)and 1 O(1 each) ' Common Trouble:2.OA at 30VDC. Relay Fail Relay:2.OA at 30VDC. a R Input Control Circuits:compatible with 12 and 24 VDC con- trol panel NACs. F Input Control Current (alarm): 5.68 mA @ 12 VDC, 12.28 mA® 24 VDC. a. Temperature Rating:32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C). Relative Humidity: 10%to 93%non-condensing. Cabinet Dimensions: • HPFF8 Cabinet: 16.65" W x 19.0" H x 5.2" D (42.29 W x 48.26 H 13.23 D cm) • Large equipment enclosure(EQBB-D4):24"W x 45.9" H x 5.15"D(60.96 W x 116.52 H x 13.1 D cm) Product Line Information HPFF8: 8.OA fire rated power supply. Unit includes red enclo- sure,battery cable and installation instructions. 120VAC/60Hz. t HPFFBE:240VAC/50Hz version of HPFF8. HPFFBCM: 8.OA fire rated power supply (chassis mounted). Unit includes mounting hardware, battery cable and instruc- tions for installation in large equipment enclosure. 120VAC/ 60Hz. Page 2 of 2-DN-60645:A•08/06/2010 cSection2:_Installation k 9 ' The standard cabinet may be either semi-flush or surface mounted.The large equipment enclosure can only be wall mounted.Each cabinet mounts using two or three key slots and two 0.250"(6.35 mm)diameter holes in the backbox.The key slots are located at the top of the backbox and the two securing holes at the bottom. { 1 Carefully unpack the system and check for shipping damage.Mount the cabinet in a clean,dry, vibration-free area where extreme temperatures are not encountered.The area should be readily accessible with sufficient room to easily install and maintain the panel.Locate the top of the cabinet approximately 5 feet(1.5 m)above the floor with hinge mounting on the left.Determine the -number of conductors required for the devices to be installed.Sufficient knockouts are provided for ' wiring convenience.Select the appropriate knockout(s)and pull the conductors into the box.All wiring should be in accordance with the National and/or Local codes for fire alarm systems and d power supplies. 2.1 Backbox Mounting Qj CAUTION: THE CIRCUIT BOARD CONTAINS STATIC-SENSITIVE COMPONENTS. ALWAYS GROUND YOURSELF WITH A STATIC STRAP BEFORE HANDLING ANY BOARDS SO THAT THE STATIC CHARGES ARE REMOVED FROM THE BODY.USE STATIC SUPPRESSIVE PACKAGING TO PROTECT ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLIES. To prevent damage to the circuit board and to facilitate backbox mounting,the chassis with the 24 VDC power supply and the Control circuit board can be easily removed.Loosen the two 3/8" nuts securing the top flanges of the chassis,then slide the chassis up to free it from the lower tabs. y Place the chassis assembly in a safe location until it can be reinstalled in the backbox. 1. Mark and predrill a hole in the wall for the center top keyhole mounting bolt using the dimensions illustrated in Figure 2.2,"Standard Cabinet:Dimensions for Wall-mounting" on page 17 or Figure 2.3,"Large Equipment Enclosure: Mounting Details Backbox- E Mounting Holes and Chassis-Mounting Studs"on page 18. ' 2. Install the center top fastener in the wall with screw head protruding. 3. Place backbox over the top screw,level and secure. 4. Mark and drill the left and right upper and lower mounting holes. 5. Note:outer holes(closest to sidewall)are used for 16"O.C.stud mounting. 6. Install remaining fasteners. 1 a l 1' i HPFF8(E.ITP— E)�AC'E __ ep'nnder,— PiN{53499JA 1 477/2010 15 �. . r 4 Installation Backbox Mounting Dept 1=5.207"(13.23 cm) - oa�aa + ~=Door=16.821"(42.73cm)- Depth= t Backbox=16.65"(42.29 cml (_5.257"_0 (13.353 cm) Door=19.26"(48.92 cm) Backbox=19.0"(48.26 cm) ! q f i V y Lek Side ° Right Side 1 •�&as�.Y> Eaiaa'Ai •.ate• .a..• #} y t Bottom ;f i ' r r Figure 2.1 Standard Cabinet: Dimensions � a t , k L. d w � { f k r V 1 .4 K f 16 _ HPFF8(E)yHPFF8C�11(E)WAGExpander,�, P/N 53499AT 4%7/`2010 Backbox Mounting C Instal a• 3.37 cm i 5.1 cmi i 1 13.37 cm I 1.325""*2.00"►,F2.00"*;t 2.00"-►i~2.00`-+if-2.00"-►it2.00'+.f2.00`►i'-1.325' 1.625"(4.128 c IIm) _ ,i• - ! Semi-Flush Mounting 7 i;---- f=� - - - -'a- Do not recess box more T i' fi than 3.875"into wall to avoid covering venting oa +_ holes on top of box. 4.13 cm 14 16.65"(42.29 cm 1, !-I.625".; 2,325"(5.91 cm 4,1 I t ��-► If-----------12.00"(30.48 cm) %i -1.625A-1.625A4.13 crh 1.25"(3.2 0 a 4.1 m 1.625" 7.0 cm _t___ - _ _ _ -- -'t•-i 1 62vS -* -�- -- 2.75`, -�- --`-------- --------------- 01 7.94 cm I 6.0- p; I 3.127`��. 3.1127" I 15.24 cmCD I 29.95 cm i (40.64 con 11.792" 48.37, cm I 19.0" I 1 38.11 cm ; 22.00cm ;38.1 cm i 1' 8.665" 115.00" I I 4.45cm 1 11.75' I I I - i t i 4.45cm I i - - U - t 0_ -------------------------- ----------------- - y (5!.. ..8 0 11 112.00` 16.00"(40.64 cm) +I 4.128 cm ,5.207" 13.23 cm j 000ao roc ao>ococ.>oo aoc00000..oococono�>eo oon00000, j 4.535' 13.23 cm 11.52 cm 1 5.207" 1= 3 '.y:,' 1.00"(2.54 i) i m ' N r 1.30' 3.30 cm 1 Figure 2.2 Standard Cabinet: Dimensions for Wall-mounting ) r r f F 1 Vis;. HPFFB(E)1HPFF8 I((E)__V. EErgnnder Pi1V 53499:A I 1/7/20.10 1 17 { inst�aillaift-,� Backbox Mounting Top knockout: Inner 1,375"(3.49) Outer 1.750"(4.45) 24"(60.96) 5-5/32" 2-1/16" 1-5/8" (10.• 16); : (13.1) (5.24) 24-1/8"(61.28) ► 4 -04- 16"(40.64) (4.13) ------------- --------- SWW._1_1 =N -------- --- ----- INNS a. MN 11-1/2" (29.21) IN M .M1=N1M 0 1= 0 1 I 0. NINE M (5.08 !!M1M1 (2.54)37-1/32" (27.94) . M (94.06) 'k ------------------ 0 P_ j 0 1 V NOW= (27.94) 45-7/8") 45-3/4" (116.52 4 C_�)L---------------------i MNIP .8 NM (116,21)I EVEN 5/16'dia. 5/16'dia. D (0.79) (0.79) 11110—M - ------------ HE 19-1/2"(49.53) 2-1/4" (5.72) MM:l - "M 2-1/4" (5.72) (cm) ecIcalb-cl.wrtif 2-5/8" (4.699) (6.604) Four lower knockouts Inner 0.875'(2.22) Outer 1.125"(2.86) Height of Four rows of mounting bolt after installation 1.125� ;0*250 Equipment I .(2. cm) (0.635 cm) I 0.500 (1.27 cm) E (13,097) (6.197) 0.500 I^ 5.156" 2.44 Keyholes (1.27 cm) 2 places T/ Keyhole dimeAsions T 5.93' (15.062) Chassis- i mounting studs 7.12* in w (2 per row of i (18.084) I backbox) KNOCKOUTS: 5.93' I(L Inner: -------- i'm Mounting holes 0.875"12.223) (15.062) 2 places Outer: 1,125"(2,858) iE i Top View of Backbox Figure 2.3 Large Equipment Enclosure: Mounting Details Bac.kbox-Mounting Holes and Chassis-Mounting Studs 18 CYPFT8(=�IHPFF�8CU(E) Expander—_PN.53499:A-?4/7/2010 LNA C,Exp= i Chassis-Mounting in Large Equipment Enclosure rfnstalla`tioon"� _l _. . 2.2 Chassis-Mounting in Large Equipment Enclosure Up to four HPFFBCM units can fit into the large equipment enclosure. Align the chassis with the backbox's mounting studs. Fasten securely with the hardware provided. The Large Equipment Enclosure is made up of backbox EQBB-D4 with Notifier door EQDR-D4, or GW-FCI door FCI-VDR-D4B. " r o . i o . f . ° r O O 0 0 Note:Drawing not to state. . n v w m rn m J 1 LL a t = Figure 2.4 Chassis-Mounting in a Large Equipment Enclosure f See power-limited wiring Section 2.5.2,"Power-Limited Wiring,Large Equipment Cabinet",on r page 27. 4 HPFF37E)"HPFF8GVI(E)'N':=1GExpander.-- P/N 53499:A1 4/7/2010 19 t I Installation=— lNAC Circuit Wiring 23 NAC-Circuit Wiring, For wiring sizes,see Section 6.5,"NAC Circuit Loop Wiring Requirements". 2.3.1 Four NACs Configured for Class B (Style Y) Figure 2.5 shows four NACs configured for Class B(Style Y). .............. 00 ......... . ... SWI T821 SW2 ............ LEDs H E.H.BE • Trouble on NAC1 @ will illuminate 5 LED1 SIG1 TRBL. 0 n C'3 0 T83 • Trouble on NAC2 Reference Resistor will illuminate U U G t El LED2 SIG2 TRBL. 9W Trouble on NAC30 0 U will illuminate 01 0 LED3 SIG3 TRBL. 0 C ❑ • Trouble on NAC4 will illuminate ELR same as LEN SIG4 TRBL. @ Reference Resistor Cd NAC 4 -4 Horn Strobe nw 00jo < 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 OC 0 00 0 Z I r _111 I + - + - + - + B r0j J2 Horn Strobe LFriT_N I Horn Strobe 100 j Alarm Polarity Shown NAC 1 NAC 2 NAC 3 NACs 1-3 are wired the same as NAC4 and use ELR the same as Reference Resistor. Figure 2.5 Four NACs in Class B(Style Y) NOTE: 1.Typical ELR's for new installations can be 3.9k or 4.7k ohm. 2.The same gauge wire must be used if two conductors are connected to the same terminal of any terminal block. 3. Do not complete a continuous circuit around the screw terminal.There must be two separate -wires on either side of the screw at the terminal block. "T-tapping"is absolutely NOT ALLOWED. 20 rHPFF81(E—)IHP�FF8C.-VI(�E)-,V,4C�L.,p,,d,,�—,P/N 53499:A1 4/7/2010 I NAC Circuit Wiring --: Installation, 2.3.2 Two NACs Configured for Class A (Style Z) Figure 2.6 shows two NACs configured for Class A(Style Z). -.........................-- ('`l wioaw r ro iav h sW1 • Trouble on NAC1 TB2 E d* c4ssac _ will illuminate ' + d :.:�sw2 �.S 'LW � , LED1 SIG1 TRBL and LEDs 7 LED2 SIG2 TRBL • Trouble on NAC2O O a )0 rBs 4 will illuminate LED3 SIG3 TRBL - ( El ® [ and LED4 SIG4 TRBL ° c°a " "r n z c J, ( 0 00 Fy C� ro o160i] U OU U 0 ............i;�l N Q rdj M,:c c 0 0 0 0 0 CO 0 00 0000 c d2 + Horn Strobe �t *. *•€rBa * "° * * * * * * * e Horn Strobe LL ? + _ O�� sir•sAn- _ 1. Horn Strobe + l NAC 1 NAC 2 Note:NAC 1 Class A Note:NAC 2 in Class A; Alarm Polarity wired same as NAC2. no ELR required. Shown Figure 2.6 Two NACs in Class A(Style Z) I - 1 NOTE: 1.Typical ELR's for new installations can be 3.9k or 4.7k ohm. 2.The same gauge wire must be used if two conductors are connected to the same terminal of , any terminal block. - 3. Do not complete a continuous circuit around the screw terminal. There must be two separate wires on either side of the'screw at the terminal block. "T-tapping"is absolutely NOT ALLOWED. I KPFF8(E)7HPFF8C,Ll(E)NAC E� rpander,�— P/N 5344 A-1.'4/'77',2610 21 I 9 7 Instaliation NAC Circuit Wiring 2.3.3 Mixing Class B and Class,A NACs; a Figure 2.7 shows two NACs configured for Class B(Style Y)and one NAC configured for Class A(Style Z). O� 11 ............... M SW1 a-41 g 4e2131no SW2' • Trouble on NAC1 - `" LEDs n�—I a will illuminate 4`G � L LED1 SIG1 TRBL • Trouble on NAC2 0 - O ,`" T83;. a will illuminate °=° s Reference Resistor :G G ❑ (Same as ELRs for C LED2 SIG2 TRBL 0 f NAC 1 &NAC2) • Trouble on NAC3 a== ° p —D g will illuminate a 01 D j LED3 SIG3 TRBL and0 © = LED4 SIG4 TRBLMIUMU� � " ¢! `+L C 77670 ]LC�OC C]�� i n a � 0. 0 a C C n n a G o ,:.�.y C0 MON E 3 7.�: OG�17CG G° :ppnG V ac �z{ .,u : i� ! :rt 0On ::_ .. f-zp Horn Strobe aoac�oa�c 000 N + - + - 'ZJ A + - Tse, rear G r * Z�, Horn Strobe d IC` mac.aea- _ _ ;Q•, Horn Strobe f _ + i NAC 1 NAC 2 NAC 3 NOTE:NAC 1 and NAC 2 in. Class B(Style Y)-See Note:NAC 3 in Class A; Alarm Polarity Section 2.3.1 for wiring. no ELR required. Shown ` Figure 2.7 Configuring Two Class B NACs and One Class A NAC on One HPFF8 NOTE: 1.Typical ELR's for new installations can be 3.9k or 4.7k'ohm , 2.The same gauge wire must be used if two conductors are connected to the same terminal of any terminal block. • 3. Do not'complete a continuous circuit around the screw terminal..There must be two separate wires on either side of the screw at the terminal block. "T-tapping"is absolutely NOT ALLOWED. x 22HPFF8_ ,1HPFF8CM(E)YV:d�C E p der— PM 53499:A tF'4/7!2010 r _ i NAC Circuit Wiring nstallation t 2.3.4 HPP31076 Optional Class A (Style Z) Adaptor The HPP31076 is an optional adaptor to connect four Class A(Style Z)NAC circuits. It mounts directly onto the terminal block T134 of the Control circuit board.The adaptor kit includes two plastic standoffs to provide support.The same gauge wire must be used if two conductors are connected to the same terminal of any terminal block. t NOTE: Only use batteries with a maximum height of 4 inches in applications that require this adaptor in the standard enclosure. Otherwise,there is insufficient space to connect NAC field wiring, and a separate NFPA and UL864 rated enclosure is required. .... — � ..._....... • Trouble on NAC1 O oa aH -a w Sw1 c will illuminatef ° a Tat iBEE 3•B � x ¢,95w2 , LED1 SIG1 TRBL LEDs ity--1 • Trouble on NAC2r i © will illuminate ,;7 „ v p �: L LED2 SIG2 TRBL O O e u U TB3 Reference • Trouble on NAM '° ° g o01 v Resistor will illuminate sn d r A 0 O'm • 3.9K ohm is _[� naaaa LED3 SIG3 TRBL a.� G [ required for • Trouble on NAC4 o '' the Class A r will illuminate for „ ,�-� � _ � C7 ; adaptor LED4 SIG4 TRBL O J1`�ii� � wF C;� Jo i _.........._ I Z al _ ©. a:Rne0OCl0OJ00GGC0 N t�r 3 a J2 4 LL T81 LL J `1 (L _ + + + 4 +, 4: i 4 J NAC Out p - +l'w + NAC Retum . u Y NAC1 NAC2 NAC MA Note:ELR is not required,but _ + the 3.9kohm reference resistor is required. NACs 1 -3 are wired the same + as NAC4. Note:Use wire gauge from _ + Alarm Polarity 12AWG-18AWG. Shown Figure 2.8 Four Class A(Style Z) NACs with HPP31076 Adaptor NOTE: 1.Typical ELR's for new installations can be 3.9k or 4.7k ohm. 2.The same gauge wire must be used if two conductors are connected to the same terminal of any terminal block. 3. Do not complete a continuous circuit around the screw terminal. There must be two separate wires on either side of the screw at the terminal block. "T-tapping" is absolutely NOT ALLOWED. HPFF8(E)7HPFF8C,tl(E)'N:aC EYpander,;� P/N 53499:A1 4/7/2010 23 1 Installation Mounting Addressable Modules 2.4 Mounting Addressable Modules. The HPFF8 and HPFFBE are designed to mount Honeywell Fire Systems addressable control or relay modules on the Control circuit board inside the power supply cabinet.This allows power to be fed from the Auxiliary output directly to the module,if needed,without running the power wires outside the cabinet.For a list of compatible optional modules that can be connected to the Auxiliary output,see Appendix A,"Device Compatibility". Two single-output modules may be mounted directly above each other if required by applications such as Split Alarm or Selective Silence. Alternately,two outputs of a six-output addressable module can also be used and mounted on the Control board. NOTE: An optional module mounting kit(P/N 90475)is required to install an addressable module on the Control circuit board.The kit includes four male/female standoffs as well four mounting screws.The standoffs install directly onto PEMs that are factory installed in the Control, circuit board. 2.4.1 Mounting Modules from Honeywell Fire Systems Addressable modules can be mounted directly to the Control circuit board as shown in Figure 2.9 for the wall cabinet.This allows wiring to remain in the cabinet.Two modules can be mounted on top of each other if the application requires two independent inputs,such as silencing.Alternately, two outputs of a six-output addressable module can also be used.The six-output module can also be mounted directly on the Control board. i Mounting addressable modules on the Control circuit board is also possible in the HPFFBCM and HPFFBCME units.However,the six-output module has to be mounted in an optional multi-module chassis if used in the large cabinet enclosure. See Section 2.5,"Power-Limited Wiring Requirements". . r�,w i....... la' 9 Stand-off n�ncr,d Stand-off o -off 3J 9 oo Stand-off ''Stand-off ( b � d ytoi.oe I:CJ JOOCCW COOG 9mr � �...wF.. .# E o 0 3 U E N � I a j x Figure 2.9 Mounting Details for Control 8 Relay Modules from Honeywell Fire Systems 24 HPFF8(E)yHPFFBCV/(E)_NAC Expanders,,PN 53499:A 1 4/7/2010 1 Power-Limited Wiring Requirements rinstallationl 2.4.2 Mounting Six-Circuit Modules from Honeywell Fire Systems k Six-output addressable modules can be mounted directly to the control circuit board as shown in Figure 2.10 for the wall cabinet.This allows wiring to remain in the cabinet.However,the six- output module cannot be mounted as shown in the HPFFBCM or HPFFBCME's units when used in the large equipment enclosure.An optional multi-module chassis is available from Honeywell Fire Systems. See Section 2.5,"Power-Limited Wiring Requirements". i • -z Stand-off o c c o doff Stand off �� o o 0-,G v O O �--� — --•til ,•�Y �a I Stand-off Stand-off - . 1 E ° d c N m I LL i LL 0- Figure Figure 2.10 Mounting Details for Six-Output Modules from Honeywell Fire Systems I 2.5 Power-Limited Wiring Requirements Power-limited and non-power-limited circuit wiring must remain separated in the cabinet.All power-limited wiring must remain at least 0.25" away from any non-power-limited circuit wiring. Furthermore,all power-limited circuit wiring and non-power-limited circuit wiring must enter and exit the cabinet through different conduits.An example of this is shown below.Your specific application may require different conduit knockouts to be used in the standard cabinet.Any conduit knockouts may be used.For power-limited applications,use of conduit is optional. t F I L t HPFFB(E)/HP,FF8_CI�L(E)1VE'Ezpander— P/N 53499:A1-4/7/2010 25 -P-... (fi'tallation---") Power-Limited Wiring Requirements `2.5.1 Power-Limited Wiring, Standard Chassis t Relay Contacts Nonpower-limited TY"C,a Input Circuits Power-limited 0 4. Specific Application: Power&SLC are : - ° ' i power-limited ®�oCCC CCS CCdO a®nj Output Circuits Power-limited Battery connections E Nonpower-limited ; AC Circuits3 Nonpower-limited E m r LL LL a 7 = Figure 2.11 Power-Limited Wiring Example: Single-input Control Module Relay Contacts i Nonpower-limited Vit`_. 'r, P"o o C c C Input Circuits z� 1 Power-limited ® y a Maintain vertical j O; l x Specific separation where fic Application: power-limited and a J Power&SLC are nonpower-limited t :�: power-limited —sli circuits appear ,I> close together. , =. =--_-..:..:- output Circuits ' Power-limited 3 Battery connections Nonpower-limitedE e 3 AC Circuits Nonpower-limited N LL LL Figure 2.12 Power-Limited Wiring Example: Multi-mod r i 26IPFF8(E)'/PI �53499:Al,4%7%2010 Power-Limited If'iring Requirements Installation 2.5.2 Power-Limited Wiring, Large Equipment Cabinet nput`Circuits: oop: Power-limited Power-limited 4 Relay on ac s: " a ery connections: y Non-power-limited Non-power-limited. AU ower. Non-power-limited. 1 (See Figure 2.14 fo wiring detail.) ufput circuits and uxiliary Output: Power-limited Knoc ou o Knockout for Power-limited wiring Power-limited wiring i Knockout for Power-limited wiring c� 61 a 3 V C W d Q W Knockou o Er Non-power-limited wiring = NOTE: Maintain vertical separation where power-limited and non-power-limited circuits appear to"cross" (e.g. Relay Contacts and AC Power). Figure 2.13 Power-Limited Wiring Example: Large Cabinet HPFF8(E)IHPFF8C,LI(E)N.AC Expander— P/N 53499: 1 4/7/2010 -'? Installation Power-Limited Wiring Requirements Ground Stud,,:,, Wire Nut I \\ TBS on 24VDC circuit board i� u fGround 3 a a f E ........_. �___.\ a ................... ............ . c E N LL CL x Line Neutral Ground Figure 2.14 Power-Limited Wiring Example: Large Cabinet AC Wiring (Expanded) 28 HPFF8(E).HPFF8C.L/(E).N-.4C Expander P/N 53499:A 14/7/2010 . 1 I 1 t August 23, 2004 DN-6935•H-202 ® CFSP_=851) and FSP-851 T �J NOTIFIER Intelligent-Plug=in-Photoeletteic-l�-- Smoke-Detectors-with-FlashScan@ — Section: Intelligent/Addressable Devices GENERAL t NOTIFIER 851 Series intelligent plug-in smoke detectors with & I MEA FM integral communication provide features that surpass conven- tional detectors.Detector sensitivity can be programmed in the 225-02-E t control panel software.Sensitivity is continuously monitored and t reported to the panel.Point ID capability allows each detectors LISTED CS915 APPROVED address to be set with decade address switches,providing ex- (FSP-851A, California + act detector locations for selective maintenance when cham- S1115 FSP-851 TA) i'. State Fire ber contamination reaches an'unacceptable level. The FSP- i :;;' ; Marshal 851 photoelectric detector's unique optical sensing chamber MARYLAND � 'J' 7272-0028:206 is engineered to sense smoke produced by a wide range of State Fire Marshal combustion sources. Dual electronic thermistors add 135'F Permit#2122 BSM1 (57'C) fixed-temperature thermal sensing on the FSP-851T. FSP-851 and FSP-851T detectors are compatible with all U.S. Coast Guard C1313066760036 NOTIFIER intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panels(FACPs). 161.002/23/3(AFP-200) r FlashScan@(U.S.Patent 5,539,389)is a communication pro- 161.002/27/3 (AFP10101AM2020) tocol developed by NOTIFIER Engineering that greatly en- 161.002/42/1 (NFS-640) • • hances the speed of communication between analog intelligent - devices and certain NOTIFIER systems.Intelligent devices com- municate in a grouped fashion. If one of the devices within the group has new information, the panel's CPU stops the group m. , poll and concentrates on single points.The net effect is response speed greater than five times that of earlier designs. �° 03/60011 t FEATURES t a • Sleek, low-profile design. ' • Addressable-analog communication. (693.4phol.iN • Stable communication technique with noise immunity. FSP-851 with • Low standby current. B71OLP base `-- • Two-wire SLC connection. • FlashScan@(NFS-640,NFS-3030,AFC-600)and classic CLIP _ ' system(AFP-100,AFP-200,AFP-300,AFP-400,AFC-600,NFS s93sPh°,.;� t, �. 640,AFP1010,AM2020,and NFS-3030)compatible. FSP-851 T with • Rotary, decimal addressing (1 —99 on current classic sys- 6710LP base tems, 1 —159 on FlashScan@ systems). • Optional remote,single-gang LED accessory(RA4002). Operating temperature:FSP-851:0'C to 49'C(32'F to 120'F); • Dual LED design provides 36W.viewing angle. FSP-851 T.•0'C to 38'C(32'F to 100'F).Low-temperature sig- Visible bicolor LEDs blink green every time the detector is nal for FSP-851 T at 45'F+/—10'F(7.22'C+/—5.54'C). addressed,and illuminate steady red on alarm. UL-Listed velocity range: 0—4000 ft./min. (1219.2 m/min.), • Remote test feature from the panel. suitable for installation in ducts. • Walk test with address display(an address of 121 will blink Relative humidity: 10%—93%noncondensing the detector LED:12-(pause)-1)(FlashScan@ systems only). Thermal ratings:fixed-temperature setpoint 135'F(57'C). • Built-in functional test switch activated by external magnet. DETECTOR SPACING and APPLICATIONS: • Built-in tamper-resistant feature. NOTIFIER recommends spacing detectors in compliance with • Sealed against back pressure. NFPA 72. In low airflow applications with smooth ceilings,space • Constructed of off-white Bayblend@, designed to commer- detectors 30 feet(9.144 m)for ceiling heights 10 feet(3.048 m) cial standards,and offers an attractive appearance. and higher. For specific information regarding detector spacing. t • 94-5V plastic flammability rating, placement, and special applications, refer to NFPA 72. System • SEMS screws for wiring of the separate base. Smoke Detector Application Guide,document A05-1003,is avail- • Optional relay,isolator,or sounder bases. able at systemsensoncom. • Listed to UL 268. FSP-851 and FSP-851T are Listed for use in ducts, but they are NOT Listed for use inside duct smoke detector housings. • Backward-compatible. See Duct Application Smoke Detectors Guide,document A05- SPECIFICATIONS 1004,available at systemsensor.com,for details on pendant- Size: 2.1"(5.3 cm) high x 4.1"(10.4 cm)diameter installed in mount applications. B501 base,6.1"(15.5 cm)diameter installed in B71 OLP base. FlashScan@ is a registered trademark of NOTIFIER. Shipping weight:5.2 oz.(147 g). Bayblend@ is a registered trademark of Bayer Corporation. NOTIFIER®nt i Honeywell company. '�O 9001 This document s not intended.to be used for Installation purposes.We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate.We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements.All specifications are subject to change without notice. 0176-7103:= i For more information,contact NOTIFIER. Phone:(203)484-7161 FAX:(203)484-7118 ENGINEERING A MANUFACTURING I NOTI FE E RT 12 Clintonville Road,Northford,Connecticut 06472 QUALITY SYSTEMS ON-6935-08/23/04 — Page 1 of 2 i ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS: B501A:Standard European flangeless base, ULC Listing. i Voltage range: 15-32 volts DC peak. •;444fi*% 8501 BH(A):Sounder base,includes B501(A)base above. Standby current(max.avg.):250 pA @ 24 VDC(with no com- B501 BHT(A): Same as B501 BH(A), but includes temporal munication enabled);360 pA @ 24 VDC(one communication sounder. eve 5 seconds with LED enabled). ";^"'` `' every ) B224RB(A): Intelligent relay base. LED current(max.):6.5 mA @ 24 VDC("ON"). B224BI(A): Intelligent isolator base. Isolates SLC from loop BASES AVAILABLE. shorts. B71OLP:6.1"(15.5 cm)diameter. Accessories: B501:4.1"(10.4 cm)diameter. F110: Retrofit replacement flange for BX-501 base. Converts B501 BH or B501 BHT:Sounder base assembly. Includes B501 BX-501 base for use with FlashScan®detectors. base. RA400Z(A): Remote LED annunciator. 3-32 VDC. Fits U.S. B224RB Relay Base: Screw terminals: up to 14 AWG (2.0 single-gang electrical box. Supported by B710LP(A) and mm2). Relay type: Form-C. Rating: 2.0 A @ 30 VDC resis- B501(A)bases only. tive; 0.3 A @ 110 VDC inductive; 1.0 A @ 30 VDC inductive. SMK400: Surface mounting kit provides for entry of surface I Dimensions:6.2"(15.748 cm)x 1.2"(3.048 cm). wiring conduit.For use with B501(A)base only. B224B1 Isolator Base: Dimensions:6.2"(15.748 cm)x 1.2" RMK400: Recessed mounting kit. For use with B501(A)base (3.048 cm).Maximum:25 devices between isolator bases. only. INSTALLATION SMB600:Surface mounting kit for use with B710LP(A). FSP-851 plug-in detectors use a separate base to simplify in- BCK-2006: Black detector covers,box of 10. stallation,service,and maintenance.A special tool allows main- M02-04-01:Test magnet. tenance personnel to plug in and remove detectors without us- M02-09-00:Test magnet with telescope stick. ing a ladder. XR2B:Detector removal tool.Allows installation and/or removal Mount base on an electrical backbox which is at least 1.5"(3.81 of FlashScanO Series detector heads from base in high ceiling cm)deep.Suitable mounting base boxes include: installations. • 4.0" (10.16 cm)square box. T55-127-000: Detector removal tool without pole. • 3.5"(8.89 cm)or 4.0"(10.16 cm)octagonal box. XP-4:Extension pole for XR2B.Comes in three 5-ft.sections. • Single-gang box(except relay or isolator base). Detector Guards: • With 8501 BH or B501 BHT base, use a 4.0" (10.16 cm) NOTE.Some guards listed below may not be applicable to FSP models. square box. SDG-773: Smoke detector guard; cover is 7.0" (17.78 cm) • With B224RB or B224BI base,use a 3.5"(8.89 cm)octago- square x 3.0"(7.62 cm)deep. This guard is mechanically com- nal box,or a 4.0"(10.16 cm)octagonal or square box. patible with FSP-751.It is UL-compatibility listed with the FSP- NOTES:1)Because of the inherent supervision provided by the 851 (file UL S5515). SLC loop.end-of-line resistors are not required. Wiring`T--taps" STI 9601:Low-profile,flush-mount smoke detector guard,wire.* or branches are permitted for Style 4(Class"B')wiring.2) When using relay or sounder bases, consult data sheet`DN-2243 STI 9602: Low-profile, surface-mount, smoke detector guard, (ISO-X)for device limitations between isolator modules and isola- wire.* for bases. STI 9609:High-profile,flush-mount,smoke detector guard,wire.* STI 9605: High-profile,surface-mount,smoke detector guard, PRODUCT LINE INFORMATION wire.* NOTE. `A"suffix indicates ULC Listed model. t STI 9604:Flush-mount heat detector guard,wire.* FSP-851`. Low-profile intelligent photoelectric sensor. Must be STI 9610:Surface-mount heat detector guard,wire.* mounted to one of the bases listed below. *For dimensions and additional information on STI Steel Web Stop- FSP-851A:Same as FSP-851 but with ULC Listing. pers, see data sheet DN-4936. FSP-851T: Same as FSP-851 but includes a built-in 135°F STI-8200-SS:Flush-mount stainless steel smoke detector guard (57°C)fixed-temperature thermal device. (compatibility pending). FSP-851TA:Same as FSP-851T but with ULC Listing. STI-8230-SS: Surface-mount stainless steel smoke detector Bases: guard (compatibility pending). B71OLPBP:Standard U.S.low-profile base,pkg.of 10. B71OLPA: Standard U.S.low-profile base, ULC Listing. B501 BP:Standard European flangeless base, pkg.of 10. REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR WIRING DIAGRAM + ----------- I 6833addo.f a Listed i Compatibler CONTROL / 3 i 3 2 f PANEL I J 1 ---- �� .Aw. address dial on back of detector _----------------------------------------------- OPPN 1----------------------4LRc---- OOP------- Page 2'of 2 - DN-6935•08i23iO4 k i i I Y 3 NOTIFIER I J (FSP 851, FSP-851T and FAPT_851tIntelligen'-t Photoelectric Smoke-SensorsJ CInstallation.and Maintenance,instructions.-:D This sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system installation manual.The installation must meet the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ).Sensors offer maximum,performance when installed in compliance with the National Fire Protection Association(NFPA);see NFPA 72. GENERAL DESCRIPTION Models FSP-851,FSP-851T and FAPT-851 are plug-in type smoke sensors that combine a photoelectronic sensing Chamber with addressable-analog communica- tions.The sensors transmit an analog representation of smoke density over a communication line to a control panel.Rotary decade switches are provided for setting the sensor's address. Two LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status.An output is provided for connection to an optional remote LED annunciator(PIN RA40OZ).Models FAPT-851 and FSP-851T combines a photoelectronic sensing chamber and 135°F(57.2°C)fixed temperature heat detector. Notifier panels offer different features sets{across different models.As a result,certain features of the FSP-851,FSP-851T and FAPT-851 may be available on some control panels,but not on others.The possible features available in the FSP-851,FSP-851T and FAPT-851,if supported by the control unit are: 1.The panel controls the LED operation on the sensor.Operational modes are RED blink,RED continuous,GREEN blink,and off. 2.The remote output may be synchronized to the LED operation or controlled independent of the LEDs. Please refer to the operation manual for the UL listed control unit for specific operati6n of the FSP-851,FSP-851T and FAPT-851. The FSP-851, FSP-851T and FAPT-851 require compatible addressable communications to function properly.Connect these sensors to listed-compatible control panels only. I SPECIFICATIONS } REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR Operating Voltage Range: 15 to 32 VDC - Standby Current: 300pA @ 24 VDC(one communication every 5 seconds with LED blink enabled) -' Max. Alarm Current(LED on): 6.5 mA @ 24 VDC Operating Humidity Range: 10%to 93%Relative Humidity,noncondensing m Operating Temperature Range: 0°to 49'C(32°to 120°F);FSP-851 <W Z 3 2 3 ? 0°to 38°C(32°to 100°F);FSP-851T,FAPT-851 a Height: 2.1`inches(51 mm)installed in B71 OLP Base °o Diameter: 6.1 inches(155 mm)installed in B71OLP Base W 4:1 inches(104 mm)installed in 8501 Base 0o Weight: 5.2 oz.(147 g) SPACING Notifier recommends spacing sensors in compliance with NEPA 72.In low air flow =---------------- gETugN_LooP applications with smooth ceilings,space sensors 30 feet apart.For specific informa- Figure 1.Wiring Diagram Ala-2<ei-on tion regarding sensor spacing,placement,and special applications,refer to NFPA 72 Caution:Do Not Loop Wire Under Terminal 1 or 2. or the System Smoke Detector Application Guide,available from Notifier. Break Wire Run To Provide Supervision of Connections. Duct Applications:FSP-851 and FSP-851T are listed for use in ducts. See Duct Applications Guide A05-1004 for details on pendant mount applications. Breakaway Stop NOTE: These products are not listed for use inside duct smoke detectors. WIRING GUIDE 6 789 r 6 7 8 9 All wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code,applicable 5 0 5, local codes,and any special requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 4 11 4 Proper wire gauges should be used.The installation wires should be color-coded to 3 13 3 limit wiring mistakes and ease system troubleshooting.Improper connections will pre- 21 0 1514 21 0 vent a system from responding properly in the event of a fire. Remove power from the communication line before installing sensors. TENS ONES 1 ` A78-2745-00 1. Wire the sensor base(supplied separately)per the wiring diagram,see Figure 1. Figure 2.Rotary Address Switches 2. Set the desired address on the sensor address switches,see Figure 2. I NOTE: Some panels support extended addressing.In order to set the sensor above address 99 on compatible systems,carefully remove the stop on the upper rotary switch with thumb as shown in Figure 2. i 3. Install the sensor into the sensor base.Push the sensor into the base while turning it clockwise to secure it in place. 4. After all sensors have been installed,apply power to the control unit and activate the communication line. 5. Test the sensor(s)as described in the TESTING section of this manual. } ACAUTION Dust covers provide limited protection against airborne dust particles during shipping.Dust cov- SENSOR ers must be removed.before the sensors can sense smoke. Remove sensors prior to heavy —COVER remodeling or construction. r - TAMPER-RESISTANCE Models FSP-851,FSP-851T and FAPT-851 include a tamper-resistant capability that prevents their removal COVER R SENSING CHAMBER from the bracket without the use of a tool.Refer to the base manual for details on makinguse of this capability. `— °vER AND SCREEN REMOVAL.ABS TESTING -�( SENSING Before testing,notify the proper authorities that the system is undergoing maintenance,and will ll CHAMBER temporarily be out of service.Disable the system to prevent unwanted alarms. All sensors must be tested after installation and periodically thereafter.Testing methods must satisfy the Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ).Sensors offer maximum performance when tested and maintained in com- ®m pliance with NFPA 72. ve 2747:03 Figure 3. N200-12-00 1 156-1925-OOR f Notifier, 12 Clintonville Rd. North`ord, CT 06472, (203)484-7161 i a The sensor can be tested in the following ways: A. Functional:Magnet Test(P/N M02-04-01 or M02-09-00) a This sensor can be functionally tested with a test magnet.,The test magnet electronically simulates smoke in the sensing chamber, testing the sensor elec- tronics and connections to the control panel 1."Hold the test magnet in the magnet test area as shown in Figure 3. 2.The sensor should alarm the panel. Two LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor stahis:',Coded signals,transmitted from the panel,can cause the LEDs to blink,latch on,or latch off.Refer to the control panel technical documentation for sensor LED status operation a`nd'expected delay to alarm. B. Smoke Entry:Aerosol Generator(Gemini 501) The GEMINI model 501 aerosol generator can be used for smoke entry testing.Set the generator to represent 4%/ft to 5%/ft obscuration as described in the GEMINI 501 manual.Using the bowl shaped applicator,apply aerosol until the panel alarms. For FAPT-851,smoke entry testing should be performed immediately following the magnet test.Magnet test initiates an approximately 10 minute period when the detector's signal processing software routines are not active.Failure to first perform the magnet test will introduce a time delay before the detector alarms. C. Direct Heat Method(Hair dryer of 1000-1500 watts).FSP-851T and FAPT-851 only. A hair dryer of 1000-1500 watts should be used to test the thermistors.Direct the heat toward either of the two thermistors,holding the heat source approxi- mately 12 inches from the detector in order to avoid damaging the plastic housing.The detector will reset only after it has had sufficient time to cool.Make sure both thermistors are tested individually. r A sensor that fails any of these tests should be cleaned as described under CLEANING,and retested. If the sensor fails after cleaning,it must be replaced and returned for repair.' r When testing is complete,restore the system to normal operation and notify the proper authorities that the system is back in operation. HIGH SENSITIVITY SETTING _ The use of the 0.2%to 0.5%per foot sensitivity setting requires a 90-day test period to ensure that the detector's environment is suitable for this setting.The following steps must be followed to meet Notifier and UL requirements for this high sensitivity application: --covERR 1. Each detector intended for 0.2%to 0.5%per foot alarm application shall have its initial alarm setting t set for 0.5%obscuration per foot alarm level.The initial prealarm setting for the detector shall be set to the intended alarm setting of the system.Prealarm shall be set for nonlatching operation. / Li 2. Detectors set at 0.2%to 0.5%per foot are intended for use in smoke-free, environmentally con- ICOVER V SENSING CHAMBER trolled applications,such as computer rooms and clean rooms.In order to determine if an environ- REMOVAL TABSCOVER AND SCREEN ment is suitable for installation,the detectors shall be operated continuously for 90 days with all envi-' ronmental factors,including temperature,humidity,air flow,occupancy,etc.,similar to the intended s SENSING t application for these detectors.An electronic history file or printer shall be used to record all events' CHAMBER associated with the detectors under testing. 3. At the end of 90 days,the results of the test shall be inspected by an authorized Notifier represen- tative or the end user,if trained by an authorized Notifier representative.If no alarms or prealarms ®m are recorded for the detectors under testing,the system may be set to the tested prealarm level in A78-2747-03 the 0.2%to 0.5%pe'i•foot range. FSP-851 CLEANING ° Before removing the detector,notify the proper authorities that the smoke detector ' r system is undergoing maintenance and will be temporarily out of service. Disable the zone or system undergoing maintenance to prevent unwanted alarms. 1. Remove the sensor to be cleaned from the system.`, SENSOR 2. Remove the sensor cover by pressing firmly on each of the four removal tabs that hold the a `COVER cover in place. 3. Vacuum the screen carefully without removing it. If further cleaning is required continue Li a with Step 4,otherwise skip to Step 7. 4. Remove the chamber cover/screen assembly by pulling it straight out. SENSING CHAMBER COVER COVER AND SCREEN 5. Use a vacuum cleaner or compressed air to remove dust and debris from the sensing REMOVAL TABS chamber. 6. Reinstall the chamber cover/screen assembly by sliding the edge over the sensing Cham- Hnrsna R ber.Tum until it is firmly inplace. 7. Replace the cover using the LEDs to align the cover and then gently pushing it until it locks into place. Make sure that the thermistors do not become bent under the cover on the FSP-851T and FAPT-851 models. 8. Reinstall the detector. i A78-va7-ca FSP-8517 and FAPT 851 9. Test the detector as described in TESTING. 10.Reconnect disabled circuits. Figure 4. 11.Notify the proper authorities that the system is back on line. s Please refer to insert for the Limitations of Fire Alarm Systems FCC Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1)This device may not cause harmful interference.and(2)this device mus:accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesired operation. t Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.This equipment generates,uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and,if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,may cause harmful interference to radio communications.However.there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,the user is encouraged to try' to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: -Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. -Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver- - eceiver-Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. -Consult the dealer or an experienced radiaTi technician for help. t N200-12-00 2 156-1925-OOR '��2002 Notifier 9 3 June 5,2001 _ DN-6821'•H-215 ` FSD=751-P and FSD-75'1 RP NOT I F I E":RSO SI'ntN_iigen,-_Ft"o_,oelectric.DuctSmoDetectors wittEmisliScanV j Section: Intelligent Addressable Devices GENERAL MEA An HVAC system supplies conditioned air to virtually every area U� U L� 143-00-E F M of a building. Smoke introduced into this air duct system is thus V V (FSD-751 P) distributed to the entire building. Smoke detectors for use in air duct systems sense the presence of smoke in the duct. 389-00-E Approved The FSD-751 P air duct smoke detector is a photoelectric detector, LISTED (FSD308 pA (FSD-751 RP) combining this detection technology with an efficient housing 51115 FSD-751RPA) MARYLAND design that samples air passing through the duct,allowing detec- State Fire Marshal tion of a developing hazardous condition. When sufficient smoke California is sensed,an alarm signal is initiated at the fire control panel State Fire Permit #2036 (FSD-751P) mohitoring the detector,and appropriate action can be taken to ... - Marshal Permit #2060 (FSD-751RP) shut off fans and blowers and change over air handling sys- 3240-0028:205 tems,etc. This can isolate toxic smoke and fire gases or prevent o `� their distribution throughout the areas served by the duct system. Two LEDs on each detector can be programmed by the system control panel to provide a local alarm indication.A remote alarm i output is provided for use with auxiliary devices. The FSD-751 P has remote test capability with the RTS451/RTS451 KEY Remote ) Test Station. , _—_�,``. 6821cm..f t Traditional panels support addresses of 0-99. The FlashScan® protocol supports addresses of 0-159. Patented FlashScan® local visible indication. Remote LED annunciator capability is avail- is a new communication protocol developed by NOTIFIER Engi- able as an option. Each duct smoke detector can only be wired to neering that greatly enhances the speed of communication be- one remote accessory. 4 i tween analog intelligent devices. Intelligent devices communi- NOTIFIER panels offer different feature sets across different cate in a grouped fashion. If one of the devices within the group panel models. As a result,certain features of the FSD-751 P/ has new information,the panel stops the group poll and concen- trates FSD-751 RP may be available on some control panels,but not on than five times that of earlier designs.on single points. The net effect is response speed greater others. Possible features,if supported by the control panel are: t ' Panel controls the LED operation on sensor. Operational modes APPLICATIONS t are: RED blink,RED continuous,GREEN blink,GREEN continu- Duct smoke detectors have specific limitations. ous,and OFF. Duct smoke detectors are: °1'' SPECIFICATIONS • NOT a substitute for open area smoke detectors.1 E+FSD=751P"� .... • NOT a substitute for earl warning detection. " I Y 9 Operating voltage range: 15 to 32 VDC.` - • NOT a replacement for a building's regular fire detection sys- -Standby current: 300 pA @ 24 VDC(one communication every tem. -5 seconds with LED blink enabled). - Call NOTIFIER for a copy of System Sensor's application guide, Operating temperature range: 32*to 131'F(0°to 55°C). Proper Use of Smoke Detectors in Duct Applications, (A05- Humidity range: TO%to 93%(non-condensing). 1004-00). Duct air velocity: 500 to 4,000 feet/min.(152.4 to 1219.2meters/' INSTALLATION k , kn.)`.— — I Wiring: For signal wiring (the wiring between detectors or Dimensions: 14.375"(365.125 mm)wide x 5.500"(13.970 mm) from detectors to auxiliary devices),it is recommended that single high x 2.750"(69.850 mm)deep. x conductor wire be no smaller than 18 AWG(0.75 mm2). The duct Options: RTS-451,RTS-451 KEY,RA400t Separate auxiliary smoke detector terminals accommodate wire sizes up to 12 AWG Power not required. (3.25 mm2). Flexible conduit is recommended'for the last foot FSD-751 RP (30.48 cm)of conduit;solid conduit"connections may be used if Operatingvoltage range: 15 to 32 VDC(comm.line voltage) desired. - and 24 VAC/VDC or 120/240 VAC auxiliary power*(separate Smoke detectors and alarm system control panels have specifi- source). *NOTE: The FSD-751 RP requires a separate auxil- cations for Signaling Line Circuit(SLC)wiring. Consult the con- iary source. trol panel specifications for wiring requirements before wiring;Standby current: 300 NA @ 24 VDC(one communication every 1ithe detector loop. The FSD-751 P/FSD-751 RP detector is de- 5 seconds with LED blink enabled)- signed for ease of wiring;the housing provides a terminal strip Auxiliary power current draw(@ 24 VDC)` 26 mA(standby), with clamping plates. 87 mA(alarm). LED Features: If programmed with the system control Options: RTS-451,RTS-451 KEY,RA40OZ,APA451. panel,two LEDs on each duct smoke detector light to provide FlashScan®is a registered trademark of NOTIFIER. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our 1S0 �oo� product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information,contact NOTIFIER. Phone:(203)484-7161 FAX:(203)484-7118 ' 8 M NG ANOFAeTWO ��!N OT FI E R 12 Clintonville Road,Northford,Connecticut 06472 ENGINEERI DN-6821 •06/05/01 — Page 1 of 2 t 1 r v r Operating temperature range: 32°to 131°F(0°to WC). f PRODUCT LINE-INFORMATION a Humidityrange: 10%to 93%(non-condensing)..,, -. 9 ( 9)• Model Description Duct air velocity: 500 to 4,000 feeUmin.(152.4 to 1219.2 meters/ FFSD-751 P_ ._Duct detector housing with FlashScanO photoelec- ;,r min.). - tric smoke detector. Dimensions: 14.375"(365.125 mm)wide x 5.500"_(13.970 mm) FSD-751 RP Duct detector housing with FlashScan®photoelec- high x 2.750"(69.850 mm)deep. i ,. Relay contact ratings: 2 Form-C,DPDT,10 A @ 250 VAC,10 A tric smoke detector,DPDT relay. @ 30.VDC(resistive). Minimum switching current of 100 mA @ ST-1.5 Metal sampling tube,duct widths V to 2'(see table 5 VDC. a at left for metric lengths). Programming specifications/requirements ST-3 Metal sampling tube,duct widths 2'to 4'. for intelligent system control panels: ST-5 Metal sampling tube,duct widths 4'to 8'. The number of devices that can have their LEDs programmed to ST-10 F Metal sampling tube,duct widths 8'to 12'. illuminate is limited by the features of the panel and the individual RA40OZ Remote annunciator alarm LED. devices. The actual number of devices is determined by the control panel and its ability to supply LED current. Refer to the RTS451 Remote test station. Mounts in single-gang box. control panel installation manual for details. Includes red alarm LED and magnet test switch. RTS451KEY Key-activa►edremote test station. INLET TUBE SELECTION 6621initAbi F36-09-00 Replacement filters. r• Outside Duct Width Inlet Tube* M02-04-00 Replacement test magnet. Up to 2 feet(0.6096 m) ST-1.5 S0839-01 Replacement photo insect screen. P48-55-00 Replacement end cap for plastic sampling tube. 2 to 4 feet(0.6096 to 1.2192 m) ST-3 P48-21-00 Replacement end cap for metal sampling tube. 4 to 8 feet(1.2192 to 2.4384 m) ST-5 A5053FS Replacement photoelectric sensor board., 8 to 12 feet(2.4384 to 3.6576 m) ST-10 A5067 Replacement power board(without relay). f *NOTE: Inlet tube is required and must be purchased separately. A5060 Replacement power board(with relay). Order one inlet tube for each duct smoke detector ordered. r y a SAMPLE WIRING DIAGRAMS See product Installation Intructions for wiring diagrams for the FSD-751RP., r �� COMMUNICATION00 U LINE _ 1 st Detector 2nd Detector in Loopin Loop W UL Listed Control Pane - - 6821wir1.wmf The RA40OZ .. y Z A6, FSD-751 P Duct Smoke Detector _ ---- CD using a UL Listed control panel V 6821wir2.wmf I FSD-751 P F r I RA40OZ i FSD-751 P Duct DetectorI+ ,<* , Smoke Detector Terminals with optional 3 I RA40OZ r{ 1, a Y Z The RTS451 o 0 t i U) Ir O O O ` 'f ' 6821wir3.wmf FSD-751 P Duct ~ " ' Smoke Detector _ COMMON TEST with RTS451/ • FSD-751P ! 1 Detector - — `�4 ,5 6' '!: RTS451KEY Terminals \Field-Installed NOTE: For RTS451, JUMPER Terminal 3 is not used. -VT c % ` RTS451 does not have a Terminal 6. LEO RESET For RTS451KEY,Ter- minals 3 and 6 are not i..._._........._-__.._...--.......... .....- -- ' used. RTS451/RTS451 KEY The RTS451KEY Page 2 of 2 — DN-6821-06/05/01 6. Re-connect wiring to terminal block. Figure 12.Testing detector alarm: O [111 Model FSD-751 PL Air Duct Smoke Detector SpecificationsNOTIFIER° m Operating Voltage Range 15 to 32 VDC c o Standby Current 300 pA 0 24 VOC o �Y a (one communication every FSD=751 P6 INTELLIGENT PHOTOEL'ECTRONIC-DUCTPSMOKE DETECTORS 55ewnds with LED blink tWITH EXTENDED_AIR SPEED RANGEY_ enabled) I �� ..-lit' NSTAL Operating Temperature Range 32°to 131°F(0`to 55`C) LATIONAND,MAINTENANCEIN_S_TRUCTIONS 4 _ Storage Temperature Range -22v to 158-F Before installing detectors,please thoroughly read the NEMA Guide Im Proper Use of Smoke Detectors in Duct Applications,which provides detailed (-30e to 70`C) e information on detector spacing,placement,zoning,wiring,and special applications.Copies of this manual are available from NEMA(National Electrical Humidity Range 10%to 93% Manufacturers Ass 7ation,2101 L Street NW,Washington,DC 20037).NFPA Standards 72 and 90A should also be referenced for detailed inforni (non-condensing) tion. Air Velocity 100 to 4000 It/min " (.05 to 20.32 Msec) NOTICE:This manual shall be k8 with the owner/user of this equipment. Dimensions 1434' L x 5+a"W x IMPORTANT..This detector must be tested and maintained regularly following NFPA 72 requirements.The detector should be cleaned at least once 23w"D(37 cm L x a year. -a 14 cm W x7cm D) � rw+3740 GENERAL DESCRIPTION _ An HVAC system supplies conditioned air to virtually every area of a building.Smoke introduced into this air duct system is distributed to the entire Programming Specifications/Requirements for Intelligent System Control Panels.There are a limited number of devices that can have their LEDs building.Smoke detectors designed for use in air duct systems are used to sense the presence of smoke in the duct. programmed to illuminate.The actual number of devices is determined by the control panel and its ability to supply LED current.Refer to the Control Panel The FSD-751 PL air duct smoke detector is a photoelectric detector.This smoke detectionmethodcombines with an efficient housing design that Installation Manual for details. samples air passing through a duct and allows detection of a developing hazardous condition.When sufficient smoke is sensed,an alarm signal is initiated at the fire control panel monitoring the detector,and appropriate action can be taken to shut off fans,blowers and change over air handling Accessories Part No. systems,etc.This can prevent the distribution or it can isolate toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas served by the duct system. Remote LED R Magnetic Remote Test RTS451 S451 Two LEDs on each detector may illuminate,if programmed by the system control panel,to provide a local alarm indication.There is also a remote Key-Activated Remote Test RTS451KEY alarm output for use with auxiliary devices.The FSD-751 PL has remote test capability with the RTS451/RTS451 KEY Remote Test Station. Replacerneni Fitters F36-09-11 - Replacement Test Magnet M02.04-00 CONTENTS OF THE DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR HOUSING KIT Replacement Photo Insect Screen S08-39-01 The FSD-751 PL Duct Smoke Detector consists of the following items:(See Figure 1.) Replacement End Cap for Plastic Sampling Tube P48-81-00 Replacement End Cap for Metal Sampling Tubes P48-21-00 Figure 1:Exploded View Of Duct Smoke Detector Components Contents Of The Duct Replacement Photoelectric Sensor Board A5053FS Replacement Power Board(w/o relay) A5067 Smoke Detector 1. Complete duct smoke detector assembly with �f~® sensor 6�E�� y 1O1E5 2. Two#10 x 11a"sheet metal mounting screws 4 # ei+0U6We swPUNcs aE � 3. Two sampling tube litters 4. One test magnet sNrevu%iva6� —in. S. Drilling template Pows4 eonso 6. Two foam gaskets Pusncsaen�iNo+vea o 7. Four#6-se#tapping mounting screws for the —F rePPiNe fimew sampling tube and optional exhaust tube exten- sion o6r6crm aoNNo 8. One sampling tube end cap Please refer to insert for the Limitations of Fire Alarm Systems r. 9. One plastic sampling tube o6Trcma 10.One#8 self-tapping screw for plastic sampling tube To keep your equipment in excellent working order,agoing maintenance is required per the manufacturer's recommendations and UL and NFPA standards.At a minimum, NOTE:A detector sensor board DOES me requirements of Chapter 7 of NFPA 72,the National Fire Alarm Code,shall be followed.A preventative maintenance agreement should be arranged through the local anutacturer's representative.Though smoke detectors are designed for long life,they may fail at any time.Any smoke detector,fire alarm equipment,a any component NOT need to be ordered separately. of that system which fails shall be repaired or replaced as soon as possible. + FCC Statement This device complies with part 15 1 me FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1)This device may not cause harmful interference,and(2)this .r device must accept any interference received,including interference that may muse undesired operation. NOTE: For ducts over tta feet(0.46m),longer sampling tubes must be ordered to complete the installation.They must be the correct length for the Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with thelimitsfor a Class B digital device,pursuant to Pan 15 of the FCC Rules.These limits are designed to width of the duel where the will be installed.See Table 1 on e 3 to determine the sampling tuber ulnad for different duct widths. provide reasonable protection against harmful interference residential installation.This equipment generates,uses and can radiate rad*frequency energy and, _ Y page P n9 eq if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,may muse harmful interference to radio communications.However,there Is no guarantee that interference will car occur in a partkufar installation.It this equipment does muse harmful interference to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: -Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. -Increase the separalion between the equipment and receiver. - Connect the equipment into an curer on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an expenenced radto/lV technician for help. N200-20-00 8 156.1978.0038 N200-20-00 1 156-1978-0038 ,. ®2004 System Sensor Notifier,One•Fire-Lite Place,Nonhford,CT 06472,(203)484-7161 WARNING 2. Lift the photo chamber in the same fashion.Vacuum the screen and cover.Use clean,compressed air to loosen and blow out any remaining debris. LIMITATIONS OF DUCT DETECTORS W Replacement screens(p/n S08-39.01)are available. % AWARNWG 3. Vacuum photo chamber,then use dean compressed air to blow area clean. 4. Replace the chamber by pressing it onto the base.Press the screen into place.It should fit tightly on the chamber. The National Fire Protection Association has established that DUCT DETECTORS MUST NOT BE USED AS A SUBSTITUTE FOR OPEN AREA DETECTOR PROTECTION'as-a means of providing life safety.Nor are they a substitute forearly warning in a building's regular fire detection_sys_ T _ tem. [10]Board Replan nt - - It is strongly recommended that the user read NFPA Standards 90A,72,and 101. 1101]S.-Board R.pl.¢.m.at _ 1. Remove the two sensor board mounting screws. AWARr4NC 2. Pull gently on the board to remove it. This device will not operate without electrical power.Fire situations may cause an interruption of power.The�system safeguards should be discussed 3. To replace the board,align the board mounting features,holes,and the interconnect terminals.Push the board into place. with your local fire protection specialist. 4. Secure board with the two mounting screws. ,e + AWARNWG [10.4]Power Bond Rep1.c.m.M 1. Disconnect wiring from the terminal bock. This device willnot sense smoke unless the ventilation system is operating.; ` 2. Remove the two power board mounting screws. AWARF2NG 3. Pull gently on the board to remove it. pa In order to function property,this detector must be Installed according to the Instructions.Do not exceed the electrical or ambient specifications or the 4. To replace the board,align the board mounting features,holes,and the interconnect terminals.Push the board into place. detector will riot function properly.This detector must be protected from the elements. 5. Secure board with the two mounting screws. INSTALLATION SEQUENCE :. Step 1. Verity duct air flow direction and velocity.....................................................................................................................................................2 Figure 9.Wiring Diagram for FSD-751 PL Duct Smoke Detector using a UL listed control panel'' Step2. Drill the mourning holes...............................................................................................................................................................................2 i i Step 2.1 Install the sampling tube for ducts less than 1'12 feet(0.46.)wide............................................................................................................2 [5 Step3. Secure the detector housing to the duct......................................................................................................................................................3 + Slop 4. Install the sampling tube for ducts greater than 1'2 feet(0.46m)wide......................................................................................................3 o o ' Slop 4.1 Installation for ducts greater than 1'n feet(0.46m)but less than 8 feet(2.4m)wide ................................................................................3 COMMUNICATION e e Step 4.2 Installation for ducts more than 8 feet(2.4m)wide ...................................................................................................................................4 LINE Step5. Install the filters............................................................................................................................................................................................4. 00 ° 00 ° Step6. Field wiring........................................................................................................................................................................._. ...................4 _ Step 7. Perform detector check...............................................................................................................................................................................5e UL LISTED CONTROL 1ST DETECTOR 2ND DETECTOR Motor-co Step 8. Install the cover............................................................................................................................................................................................5 PANEL IN LOOP IN LOOP Step 9. Detector Maintenance and Test Procedures................................................................................................................................................5 ` k [11 VorHy Duet Air Flow Dir.ction And V.bcay Figure 10.Wiring Diagram for FSD-751 PL Duet Figure 11.System Wiring Diagram for.FSD-751 PL The FSD-751 PL duct smoke detector is designed to be used in air handling systems having air.velocities of 100 to 4000 feet per minute.Be sure to Detector With optional RA40OZ Duct Smoke Detector With RTS451/RTS451 KEY check engineering.specifications to ensure that the air velocity in the dud falls within these_parameters.If necessary,use a velocity meter to check the air velocity in the duct. f� 121 Drill The M.umirrs Rola Remove the paper backing from the mounting template supplied.Affix the template to the duct at the desired mounting location.Make sure the tem- couuDM r plate lies flat and smooth on the duct.Center punch holes A and B.Drill the holes as Indicated on the template. D ° 4 5 u REID H4TALLED 12.11 Sampling Tube Installation for Ducts less Than 112 Feet(0.46m)Wide vDwEa - (ss.Figure 2) .. r 0 1 2 3O 00 - 1. Remove the front cover. RESET 2. Slide the plastic sampling tube into the housing bushing. FlgUre 2.P18StIC sampling tube 00 3. Align the brier in the bushing with the holes in the sampling tube. Connected to duct smoke7zAccessory FSO.751PL RA40OZ FSD-751 PL RTS451/RTS451KEY FOR RTS451,TERMINAL 31S NOT USED. Make sure there are 6 exposed holes on the plastic sampling tube. HM7e (RTS451 DOES NOT HAVE ATERMINAL 6.) Secure with the 48 self-tapping screw into the bottom of the perma- a FOR RTS451 KEY,TERMINALS 3 AND 6 ARE NOT USED. nent tube(shown in Fig.2). Current Loads at 24VDC r M NOTE: For duds greater than 12 feet(0.46m)in width,refer to sec DEVICE STANDBY ALARM f ; tions 141,[4.1]and[4.2). RA40OZ OmA 10 mA Max. I!L e RTS451/RTS451 KEY OmA 7.5 mA Max. ranoo N200-20-00 2 156-1978-003R N200.20-00 7 156.1978-003R [9.1.4]Air no Test Using Dwyer Series 907 Differemial Pressure Transmitter lel secure The Detector Houshi To The Duct Figure 3.Installation of foam gaskets over sampling Slide the foam gaskets over the tube bushings as shown in Figure 3. tube bushings' Verify the air speed of the duct using an anemometer.Air speed must be at least 100 FPM.Wire the Dwyer transmitter as shown in Figure Use the two 11A'long sheet metal screws to screw the detector housing 8.Connect the leads of the meter to either side of the 1000Q resistor.Allow unit to warm up for 15 seconds.With both HIGH and LOW SCREW HOLES FOR to the duct. ATTACHING HOUSING pressure ports open to ambient air, measure and record the voltage drop across the 100052 resistor(measurement 1),4.00 volts is typi- e e TO DUCT WORK- cal. ORKcal. Using flexible tubing and rubber stoppers,connect the HIGH side of the transmitter to the sampling tube of the duct smoke detector CAUTION:Do not overtlghtsn the screwc s.. housing, and the LOW side of the transmitter to the exhaust tube of the dud smoke detector housing.Measure and record the voltage (41 Smnplltlg Tube Installation for Duets @eater Than 11/s Feet drop across the 100052 resistor (measurement 2). Subtract the voltage recorded in measurement 1 from the voltage recorded in mea- (SAMe)wide surement 2. If the difference is greater than 0.15 volts,there is enough air flow through the dud smoke detector for proper operation. ® O The sampling tube is identified by a series of air inlet holes on the tube. A plastic tube is included for ducts up to 112 feet(0.46m)wide.All other 191.81 Filter Replace rout lengths must be purchased separately.Order the correct length,as speci- ra10- The filters do not substantially affect smoke performance even when up to 90%of the filter is clogged.Quarterly visual inspection usually suffices to bed In Table 1,for width of the dud where It will be installed.it is remm- Table 1.Sampling tubes recommended for different duct determine whether the filters should be replaced because only a high percentage of contamination affects performance.If further testing is required, mended that the sampling tube length extend at least 2,B across the dud Widths' compare differential pressure readings with and without the filters installed.If the difference exceeds 10%replace the filters.In no case should the width for optimal performance.The exhaust tube is molded onto the base Outside Duct Width Sampling Tube Recommended* pressure differential tall below 0.0015 inches of water. of the duct housing,and the A2440-00 Exhaust Tube Extension is avail- 1 to 2 N.(0.3 to 0.6 m) ST-1.5 able as an accessory in those cases where the molded exhaust port does 2 to 4 N.(0.6 to 1.2 m) ST-3 19.21 Standby,Alarm,And Sensitivity Teats not extend at least 2 inches(50mm)into the duct. 4 to 8 fl.(1.2 to 2.4 m) ST-5 19.211 Standby And Trouble The sampling tube is always installed with the air inlet holes facing into 8 to 12 N.(2.4 to 3.7 m) ST-10 Standby- It programmed by the system control panel,look for the presence of the flashing LEDs through the transparent housing cover. The the air flow.To assist proper installation,the tube's mounting flange is "Must extend a minimum of 2/3 the duct width LED will flash with each communication. marked with an arrow.Make sure the sampling tube is mounted so that Trouble- If programmed by the system control panel and the detector LEDs do not flash,then the detector lacks power(check wlnng,panel the arrow points into the air flow(see Figure 4).Figure 5 shows the Figure 4.Air duct detector sampling tube: programming,or power supply),the detector board is missing(replace),or the unit is defective(return for repair). various combinations of tube mounting configurations with respect to air AIR HOLES flow.Mounting the detector housing in a vertical orientation is acceptable, FLANGE SAMPLING TUBE Test- The trouble condition can be caused intentionally to verify correct operation of the system.Remove the detector board to cause a provided that a metal sampling tube is used and the air flows directly into ` END CAP trouble condition locally and at the system control panel. the sampling tube holes as indicated in Figure 4. q [9.2.2]Alarm Tests 14.1]ItmtaBetlon For Duets Greater Than 11a Feet(0.18m)But M02-04-00[9.2.2.11 M02-04D Magnet Test Less Than S Feet(24m)Wide ARROW RMUST FACE AIR FLOW DIRECTION 1. Place the painted surface of the magnet onto the TEST locator on the bottom of the detector housing(Figure 12). 1. If the tube is longer than the width of the air duct,drill a 3A"(19mm) INTO AIR FLOW 2. Verify system control panel alarm status and control panel execution of all intended auxiliary functions(i.e.fan shutdown,damper control,etc.) hole in the duct opposite the hole already cut for the sampling tube. HO-2 3. The detector is self-restoring when the magnet is removed.Verity that the system Control panel has reset. Make sure the hole is 1"to 2"(25 to 50.m)below the inlet hole on 19.2.2.21 RTS451/RT8451NEY Remote Station Test Figure 8.Procedure for verifying air Now: the opposite side of the duct to allow moisture drainage away from the Figure 5.Tube mounting configurations with varying detector.If the tube is shorter than the width of the air duct,instar the air flow direction: The RTS451/RTS451 KEY Remote Test Station facilitates test of the alarm end cap into the sampling tube as shown in Figure 4.Sampling tubes DOTSINUCA E-111UNOF capability of the duct smoke detector.These accessories provide the stimulus SAMPLING TUBE HOLES over 3 ft.(0.91 m)long must be supported at the end opposite the duct to initiate an alarm condition at the detector.The detector is salt-restoring qP FLOW DIRECTroN smoke detector. DIRECTION when the accessory test stimulus is removed.Verity that the system control DEttcral DETECTOR ®Low 2. Slide the tube into the housing Bushing that meets the air Now first. HouslNcn HouswG panel has reser. Position the tube so that the arrow points into the air flow,as shown 19.2.31 Sensitivity Tests in Figure 4. A 9. Notify the proper authorities that the smoke detector system is undergoing 3. Secure the tube flange to the housing bushing with two s6 seN•tapping SAMPLING EXHAUST EXHAUST SAMPLING maintenance,and that the system will temporarily be out of service.Disable screws. TUBE TUBE TUBE I WE the device or system undergoing maintenance to prevent unwanted alarms4. For tubes longer than me width of the air duct,the tube should extend HORIZONTAL MOUNTING OF HOUSING and possible dispatch of the fire department.Please refer to the operation out of the opposite side of the dud.If mere are more it=2 holes in the manual for the UL listed control panel for specific operation. section of the tube extending out of the duct,select a different length r _"Mu Q using Table 1.Otherwise,trim the and of the tube protruding through EXHAUST AIRFLOW TUBE qai hLUW 19.31 Maintenance of Duct Smoke Detectors the dud so that 1"to 2'(25 to 50mm)of the tube extend outside the DIRECTION °IraECTION dud.Plug this end with the and cap and tape closed any holes in the DETECTOR S"MPLMxi 19.3.11 Air FlNers protruding section of the tube.Be sure to seal the duct Where the tube HOUSING c TUBE 1. Turn off power to the system. M16X t protrudes. VERTICAL MOUNTING OF HOUSING HB105-0t 2. Remove and inspect sampling tube filters. NOTE: Only metal sampling tubes can be installed in 3. If filters are heavily coated with dirt,replace them with new filters(p/n F36-09-11).If they are not heavily coated,use a vacuum cleaner or corn- NOTE:The sampling tube and cap Is critical to the proper operation of orientations C.and D. - pressed air nozzle to remove dust,then reinstall the filters. ..� the duct smoke detectors.The end Cap is needed to create the [9.3.2]Photo Detector Boards proper air Now to the sensor of the duct smoke detector. 1. Remove the screen by gently grasping on each side and pulling straight off N200-20-00 6 156-1978-003R N200-20-00 3 156-1978-003R (4.21 Installation For Duds More Than 8 Feet(2.4m)Wide 1. Panel controls the LED operation on the duct smoke detector.Operational modes are RED blink,RED continuous,GREEN blink,GREEN continu- NOTE: To install sampling tubes in ducts more than 8 feet(2.4m)wide,work must be performed inside the air dud.Sampling of air in ducts wider ous,and off. than 8 feet(2.4m)is accomplished by using the ST-10 sampling tube.If the tube Is shorter than the width of the air dud,Instal the end cap 2. The remote output may be synchronized to the LED operation or controlled independent of the LEDs. into the sampling lube as shown in Figure 4 and support the end opposite the duct smoke detector. Please refer to the operation manual for the UL listed control panel for specific operation of the FS0.761 PL Install the sampling tube as follows: 1. Drill a w-inch(19mm)hole in the duct directly opposite the hole already drilled for the sampling tube.Make sure the hole is 1'to 2'(25 to 50mm) Wiring Instructions below the inlet hole on the opposite side of the duct to allow for moisture drainage. 2. Slide the sampling tube with the flange into the housing bushing that meets the air How first.Position the tube so that the arrow points into the air Disconnect power from the communication line before Installing the FS0.751PL duct smoke detectors. flow.Secure the tube flange to the housing bushing with two#6 self-tapping screws. Wire the FSD-751 PL duct smoke detector per the Control Panel Installation Manual and Figures 9,10 or 11.Set the desired address on the sensor 3. From inside the duct,couple the other sections of the sampling tube to the section already installed using the 12-inch(12mm)conduit fittings sup- board code wheel address switches. " plied.Make sure that the holes on both of the sampling tubes are lined up and facing into the air flow. 4. Trim the end of the tube protruding through the duct so that 1"to 2"(25 to SOmm)of the tube extend outside the dud.Plug this end will the end NOTE:Some panels support extended addressing.In order to set the sensor above address number 99 on compatible systems,carefully remove the cap and tape closed any holes in the protruding section of the tube.Be sura to seal the duct where the tube protrudes. stop on the left hand rotary switch with pliers as shown in Figure 7. NOTE: An alternate method to using the ST-10 is to use two ST-5 sampling lubes.Remove tM flange from one of the tubes and install as described (71 Perform Debater chock above.Aller the installation,use electrical tape to close off some of the sampling holes so that there are a total of 10 to 12 holes spaced as 1. Perform STANDBY AND TROUBLE TEST per Section[9.2.1]. evenly as possible across the width of the duel. 2. Perform MAGNET TEST per Section[9.2.2.1].The RTS451 test of Section 19.2.2.21 may substitute for this requirement. 3. Perform AIR FLOW TEST per Section 19.1). NOTE: Air currents inside the duct may cause excessive vibration,especially when the longer sampling tubes are used.In these cases a 3 inch 4. Perform SMOKE RESPONSE TEST per Section(9.1.1). (75mm)floor flange(available at most plumbing supply stores)may be used to fasten the sampling tube to the other side of the duct.When (81 Install The cover using the flange/connector mounting technique,drill a 1-inch to 11A-inch(25 to 32mm)hole where me flange will be used. Install the cover using the six screws that are captured in the housing cover.Be certain fitters are installed as specified in Section[5).Make sure that 151 Install The Full the cover fits into the base groove and that all gaskets are in their proper positions.Tighten the six screws.,. To install the sampling tube filters,simply push the fitters into the sampling and exhaust tube holes,as shown in Figure 6.If a metal sampling tube BREAKAWAY STOP 191 Duet invoke Detector Maintenance and Proceduresct Prodares is used,install the fitters into the tube end. Test and maintain dud smoke detectors as recommended In NFPA 72.The tests 16]Field Wiring Installation guidelines contained in this manual were devised to assist maintenance personnel in verification 8 7 89 8 7 89 All wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code and the local codes having jurisdiction.Proper wire gauges should be used, of proper detector operation. 5 5 The conductors used to connect smoke detectors to control panels and accessory devices should be color�coded to prevent wiring mistakes.Improper 4 11 4 Before conducting these tests,notify the proper authorities that the smoke detection connections can prevent a system from responding property in the event of a fire. 3 12 3 system will be temporarily out of service.Disable the device or system under test to 2 13 2 Figure 6.Sampling tube filter installation: prevent unwanted alarms. 1 0 15 1 0 ACADTIDN o � N0120° Filters require periodic cleaning or replacement,depending on the [81]Smoke Entry Teets Switches Address 18111 Air Flow 7.Rota w g Rotary amount of dust and dirt accumulated.Visually Inspect the fitters at This product is designed to operate over an extended air speed range of 100 to 4000 FPM.To verity sufficient sampling of ducted air,tum the air han- least quarterly;inspect them more often If the dust accumulation war• dler on and use a manometer to measure the differential pressure between the two sampling tubes.The differential pressure should measure at least rants it.See Section[9.1.2]for more information.Replacement filters • can be ordered from Notifier(fitter P/N F36-09.11). 0.0015 inches of water and no more than 1.2 inches of water.Because most commercially available manometers cannot accurately measure very low - �Cgp - pressure differentials,applications with less than 500 FPM of duct air speed may require one of the following:1)the use of ecurrent-sourcing pressure transmitter(Dwyer Series 607)per Section 9.1.4 or;2)the use of aerosol smoke per section 9.1.2. For signal wiring,(the wiring between detectors or from detectors to auxil- iary devices),it is usually recommended that single conductor wire be no 181.21 Air Flow Test using Aerosol Smoke smaller than 18 gauge.The dud smoke detector terminals accommodate wire sizes up to 12 gauge.The last foot of conduit should be flexible This test is intended for low-flow systems(100.500 FPM).If the air speed is greater than 500 FPM,use a conventional manometer to measure differ- conduit(available in electrical supply houses),which facilitates easier ential pressure between the sampling tubes,as described in 6.1.1. installation and puts less strain on the conduit holes in the housing.Solid Mmosao conduit connections may be used if desired. - Drill a 1/40 hole 3 feet upstream from the duct smoke detector.With the air handler on,measure the air velocity with an anemometer.Air speed Smoke detectors and alarm system control panels have specifications for Signaling-Une Circuit(SLC)wiring.Consult the control panel manufacturer's must be at least 100 FPM.Spray aerosol smoke'Into the duct through the 1/4"hole for five seconds.Wait two minutes for the duct smoke specifications for wiring requirements for the particular model control panel being used before wiring the detector loop. detector to alarm.If the duct smoke detector alarms,air is flowing through the detector.Remove the duct smoke detector cover and blow out the residual aerosol smoke from the chamber and reset the dud smoke detector.Use duct tape to seal the aerosol smoke entry hole. The FSD-751 PL detector is designed for ease of wiring.The housing provides a terminal strip with damping plates.Wiring connections are made by ' stripping about 3e-inch(9mm)of insulation from the end of the wire,sliding the bare end under the plate,and tightening the damping plate screw. 'Aerosol smoke can be purchased from Home Safeguard Industries,Malibu,CA.Phone:310/457-5813. Two LEDs on each duct smoke detector may light,if programmed by the system control panel,to provide a local,visible indication. Remote LED annunciator capability is available as an option.Each duct smoke detector can only be wired to one remote accessory. L81.8]Smoke Entry Test To determine if smoke is capable of entering the sensing chamber,visually identity any obstructions.Plug the exhaust and sampling tube holes Notifier panels offer different feature sets across different panel models. As a result,certain features of the FSD•751 PL may be available on some to prevent ducted air from carrying smoke away from the detector head,then blow smoke such as cigarette,cotton wick,or punk directly at the control panels,but not on others.The possible features available in the FSD-751 PL,if supported by the control panel are: head to cause an alarm.REMEMBER TO REMOVE THE PLUGS AFTER THIS TEST,OR THE DETECTOR WILL NOT FUNCTION PROPERLY. N200-20-00 4 - 156-1978-003R N20D-20-00 5 156-1978-003R i A , , DetectorInnova Duct Smoke Accessories SENSOR Models Available APA451 Piezo Annunciator RA40OZ Remote Annunciator x u 6 RTS451 Remote Test Station - N RTS451KEY Remote Test Station with Key SSK451 Multi-Signaling Accessory PA400R Mini-Alert Sounder(red) PA400W Mini-Alert Sounder(white) " K PS24LO Mini-Alert Add-on Strobe (red) max_ PS24LOW Mini-Alert Add-on Strobe (white) A, ' PS12/24SLENSW Wall-Mount "SMOKE" Lens Product Overview APA451 UL 54011 RA40OZ UL 52522 System Sensor provides system flexibility with a variety of accessories, including three remote test devices and several different means of visible and audible system annunciation. Like System Sensor's duct detectors, all duct smoke detector accessories are UL listed. APA451 The APA4.51 provides a red alarm LED,with an audible annunciation of an alarm signal,and a green power LED. It is u •' "' intended for use in System Sensor 4-wire conventional duct smoke �•r,, detector applications without a system control panel,to comply with NFPA 90A. RA40OZ The RA40OZ remote annunciator is designed for both conventional and intelligent applications.The red LED provides RTS451 UL s2522 RTS451KEY UL S2522 visual indication of an alarm condition. RTS451 and RTS451KEY The RTS451 and RTS45IKEY are automatic fire detector accessories designed to test remotely locat- ed duct detectors. For 4-wire detectors,the RTS451KEY featuresITI -; a multi-colored LED that alternates between steady green and red. For 2-wire detectors,the LED illuminates red for alarm. SSK451 The SSK451 multi signaling accessory is designed for use with System Sensor 4-wire conventional duct smoke detectors. It combines a horn feature with the key-activated test and reset functions. Green, amber and red LEDs provide visual indication 1 of power, trouble and alarm conditions,respectively. PA40OR and PA40OW The 111k400 models are 90dBA pulsed SSK451 UL 525222 SSK451 with PS24LOW strobe and sounders for applications where a smaller notification device is PS12/24LENSW"SMOKE"lens required. The PS24L0 anis PS24LOW add-on strobes can be attached for visual alarm signaling. PS24LO and PS24LOW The PS24LO and PS24LOW strobes can . '� 07? 11 be attached to the I?A400 or SSK451 for visual alarm signaling. The PS12/24SLENSW"SL-IOU" lens is available to meet special code requirements in certain jurisdictions. . « a t � � L1STED PA40OW UL 54011 P f 400 w it5 P324LOW aRld-ori strabe APA451 Specifications RTS451 Specifications SSK451 Specifications Voltage Power Require;,�ents Voltage Regulated 24VDC Alarm LED: 2.8-32VDC, 10mA max. 24VDC Total Current: 105mA max. Operating Volt��ge Power Requirements 16-33VDC Test Switch Standby: 8mA ' Maximum Alarm Current 10VA @ 32VDC Trouble: 16mA 30mA Reset Switch Alarm without strobe: 40mA VA @ 32VDC Alarm with strobe: 65mA 10se Temperature Range Sounder , -10°C to 38°C (14°F to 100°F) Alarm Response time 87dBA at ten feet 40 seconds max. Relative Hurnidity Temperature Range 95% non-condensing Temperature Range -10°C to 60°C (14°F to 140°F} -10°C to 60°C (14°F to 140°F) Wire Gauge Relative Humidity 14 to 18AWG Relative Humidity 95% non-condensing Dimensions 95%non-condensing 4.6"H x 2.75"W x 1.5"D Wire Gauge Wire Gauge 14 to 18AWG 14 to 22AWG Dimensions PA400 Specifications Dimensions 4.8"H x 4.7"W x 1.5"D Voltage 4.6"H x 2.75"W x 1.8"D 12/24VDC PS24L0 Specifleations RTS451KEY Specifications Temperature Range Power Requirements -10°C to 60°C (14°F to 140°F) Voltage --- 24VDC Power LED(Green):14-35VDC, 12mA max. Wire Gauge Alarm LED(Red): 2.8-32VDC,7.5mA max. 12 to 18AWG Temperature Range Total Current: 103mA maximum Dimensions 0°C to 49°C (32°F to 120°F) Alarm Response Time 4.6" x 2.8" x 1.4" Wire Gauge 40 seconds maximum 12 to 18AWG Temperature Range RA400Z Specifications Dimensions -10°C to 60°C (14°F to 140°F) Voltage Range 3.8" x 1.6" x 1.6" Relative Humidity Conventional System: 3.1 to 32VDC 95% non-condensing Intelligent System: 18 to 32VDC Wire Gauge Maximum Alarm Current 14 to 18AWG 10mA Dimensions Dimensions 4.6"H x 2.75"W x 1.8"D 4.6" x 2.8" x 1.3" For the very latest product specifications, please visit the System Sensor web site at www,systerriserisor.coni. System Sensor Sales and Service System Sensor Headquarters System Sensor Canada System Sensor in China System Sensor-Far East System Sensor-India 3825 Ohio Avenue Ph:905.812.0757 Ph:86.29.8832.0119 Ph:85.22.1.91..9003 Ph:91.124.237.1770 x.2700 St.Charles.EL 601.74 Fx:905.812.077:1. Fx:86.29.8832.5110 Fx:85.22.736.6580 Fx:91.12.4.237.3^_18 Ph:800/SENSOR2 System Sensor Europe System Sensor in Singapore System Sensor-Australia System Sensor-Russia s x:630,"_,'77-64911 Ph:44.1403.891920 Ph:65.6273.2230 Ph:613.54.28^.142 Ph: 70.95.937.7982 www.systemsensor,coir Fx:44.14O3.891921 Fx:66,6273.2610 Fx:613.54.281.172 Fx: 70.9b.937.7983 �D 2004 System Sent,,r.The oompany rser:-es he right to change product specifications w thoih notice. 03750()0.06,r 04•#1291 (INSTALLATION.AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCT S N SYSTEM 6 SENSOR® (TS151 3825 Ohio Avenue,St.Charles,Illinois 60174 1-800-SENSOR2,FAX:630-377-6495 Remote-Test_Station! www.systemsensor.com SPECIFICATIONS Dimensions: 4.8"H x 2.90"W x 1.4"D Weight: .16 lbs.f Power Requirements Alarm LED: 2.8-.32 VDC,10 mA max. Coil Current:. 95 mA max. Test Switch: 10 VA @ 32 VDC Reset Switch: 10 VA @ 32 VDC Alarm Response Time: 40 sec.max. Temperature: -10°C to 60°C(14°F to 140°F) Humidity: 95%RH Non-condensing Max Listing: UL,FM,CE NOTE:RTS151 replaces RTS451. FIGURE 1.RTS151 REMOTE TEST STATION: NOTICE:This manual shall be left with the owner/user of this equipment. NOTE:A test coil is required only for use with D2/DNR/DH400/DH500 mod- els. For D2 model's order part uDCoil. For the DH400/500 models order part (O is ucoil. GENERAL INFORMATION u System Sensor's RTS151 is an automatic fire detector accessory designed to test a remotely located detector. Consult detector installation instructions for additional information. i TEST ASSET The National Fire Protection Association has published codes,standards,and ® O recommended practices for the installation and use of the above product.It is recommended that the installer be familiar with these requirements,with local O codes,and any special requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction. j H0196-01 RTS151 CONTENTS 1 RTS151 remote test station FIGURE 2.WIRING DIAGRAM FOR RTS151 TO D4120 4-WIRE DUCT 1 screw pack(2 mounting screws) SMOKE DETECTOR: 1 M02-04 test magnet RTS151 D4120 WIRING OF RTS151 1 Consult the appropriate detector installation instructions for the applicable 19 AUxOUT+ wiring diagram. The RTS151 mounts to a single gang box (2 1/2" minimum FIELD 2 20 AUX OUT- depth),or directly to the wall or ceiling. INSTALLED 4 JUMPER See Figure 8 for wiring diagram of RTS151 with Duct Smoke Detectors. 1 In Canadian applications, the RTS151 is intended to be located in the same (RED LED) 1 15 ALARM room as the smoke detector and within 60 feet of the unit. ALARM 5 11 R TEST 3 2 OPERATION R RESET Test Function Place and hold the painted side of the magnet to the test location RTS151. Alarm Indication H0582-20 With the magnet in place some time will elapse(40 sec.maximum) depend- FIGURE 3.WIRING DIAGRAM FOR RTS151 TO DNR 2-WIRE DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR: ing on the detector type,before the alarm indicating LED will light. TEST COIL+ i Reset Function TEST COIL- uPPLY a s ® -1 sT y SU Gently insert a 1/8"maximum diameter tool into the hole until it stops andCOMM+ ® z LED turns off.The RTS151 is capable of resetting only certain System Sensor models of detectors. Refer to detector installation instructions for additional OUT(CONV ONLY)+ Rrs,s, information. COMM- REMOTE TEST STATION 1 RAIRTS- LED OPTION RA+ ® 1PER UNIT I OmA CURRENT DRAW RTS+ NOTE:THE RTS151 TEST COIL CIRCUIT TEST COIL OPTION 1 PER UNIT REQUIRES AN EXTERNAL 24 VDC POWER 95mACURRENT DRAW SUPPLY WHICH MUST BE UL LISTED. NOTE:THE USE OF A REMOTE TEST STATION REQUIRES THE INSTALLATION OF AN ACCESSORY COIL,PART NUMBER DCOIL, SOLD SEPARATELY. 11.0571-08 D440-01-00 1 156-0469-013 FIGURE 4.WIRING DIAGRAM FOR RTS151 TO D2-2WIRE DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR: �b MAGNET +TEST COIL +TEST COIL TEST 24 VDC X VDC 4 SWITCH -TESTCOIL AUXPOWER AUX DIED TEST MAGNET -TEST COIL -) UPPLIED SU S 5 BY USER SWITCH BY USER100mA +IN (+) SUPPLY) SUPPLY ) ILI& j &+IN (-) 0+OUT ALARM +OUT 24 VAC(+10%,-15%) 24 VAC(+10%,-15* (-) I L D ED (RED) .� 1 (+) FULL WAVE RECTIFIED, FULL WAVE RECTIFI , _ - UNFILTERED POWER UNFILTERED POWER ALARM MAY BE USED MAY BE USED LED(RED) +. 1 (+) MAY -RA RTS151 (OPTIONAL)REMOTE +RA TEST STATION (OPTIONAL)REMOTE +RA +RTS TEST STATION 0+FITS D2 D2 METHOD#1 -AUX POWER LOCATED METHOD#2-AUX POWER LOCATED AT DUCT DETECTOR AT STATION NOTE:THE USE OF THE RTS151 REQUIRES THE INSTALLATION OF AN ACCESSORY COIL,DCOIL,SOLD SEPARATELY. H0612-11 FIGURE S.WIRING DIAGRAM FOR RTS151 TO DH100ACDC 4-WIRE FIGURE 6.WIRING DIAGRAM FOR RTS151 TO DH100 2-WIRE DUCT DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR: SMOKE DETECTOR: DH100ACDC RTS151 DH100 RTS151 Alarm Signal+ 15 1 (Red LED)Alarm Test+ 1 5 Test Test/Reset- O 4 Aux.Power- 20 2 Reset+ 3 3 Reset 2 3 Reset RA+ 4 O LIED Reset Field i✓ Installed 4 RA- 5 2 W Jumper 4 Test 11 5 Test V Out+ 0 0 No Connection + H0197-01 H0198-04 I 1 FIGURE 7.WIRING DIAGRAM FOR RTS151 TO DH400ACDC DUCT FIGURE 8.WIRING DIAGRAM FOR RTS151 TO BEAM1224/ SMOKE DETECTOR: BEAM1224S SMOKE DETECTOR: ' DH400ACDC RTS151 1 BEAM1224/BEAM1224S RTS151 ALARM SIGNAL(+) REMOTE ALARM OUT 1 T2-1 1 (RED LED)ALARM 8 2:4R D AUX(-) 2 T2-2 2 AUX POWER(-) 71 RESET { 4 RESET INPUT 3 T2-4 3 EE o I REMOTE TROUBLE OUTPUT q T3.3 4 u sr.uED �D,�pER OVTONRL YELLOW LED RESET(-) &3 RESET TEST INPUT 5 T2-3 5 TEST 4 TEST(-) 5 TEST H0149-02 H0586-03 i Three-Year Limited Warranty System Sensor warrants its enclosed product to be free from defects in materials and u ,3825 Ohio Avenue,St.Charles,IL 60174.Please include a note describing workmanship under normal use and service for a period of three years from date of the malfunction and suspected cause of failure.The Company shall not be obligated to manufacture.System Sensor makes no other express warranty for the enclosed product. replace units which are found to be defective because of damage, unreasonable use, No agent,representative,dealer,or employee of the Company has the authority to in- modifications,or alterations occurring after the date of manufacture.In no case shall the crease or alter the obligations or limitations of this Warranty.The Company's obligation Company be liable for any consequential or incidental damages for breach of this or any of this Warranty shall be limited to the replacement of any part of the product which other Warranty,expressed or implied whatsoever,even if the loss or damage is caused by is found to.be defective in materials or workmanship under normal use and service the Company's negligence or fault.Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of during the three year period commencing with the date of manufacture.After phoning incidental or consequential damages,so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply System Sensor's toll free number 800-SENSOR2 (736-7672) for a Return Authorization to you.This Warranty gives you specific legal rights,and you may also have other rights number,send defective[nits postage prepaid to:System Sensor,Returns Department,RA which vary from state to state. D440-01-00 2 156-0469-013 -12009 System Sensor August 23, 2004 DN-6936•H-211 ® 'FST=8'51`Series-, NOTIFIER dntglli4e—n—tThermal,'(Heat)'Detectors --withFlas4Sc.an®;. Section: Intelligent/Addressable Devices GENERAL NOTIFIER 851 Series intelligent plug-in smoke detectors with U �j <S> MEA integral communication provide features that surpass conven- tional detectors. Detector sensitivity can be programmed in APPROVED the control panel software. Sensitivity is continuously moni- LISTED CS630 tored and reported to the panel.Point ID capability allows each (ML255) —, California detector's address to be set with decade address switches, S747 (FST-851A, W State Fire providing exact detector locations for selective maintenance FST-851HA, ; Marshal when chamber contamination reaches an unacceptable level. � P FST-851RA) FST Series thermal detectors use an innovative thermistor ;l 7270-0028:196 sensing circuit to produce 135'F/57'C fixed-temperature(FST- U.S.'Coast Guard 851)and rate-of-rise thermal detection (FST-851R)in a low- 161.002/23/3 (AFP-200) profile package.FST-851 H provides fixed high-temperature de- 161.002/27/3 (AFP10101AM2020) ' tection at 190°F/88'C. These thermal detectors provide cost 161.002/42/1 (NFS-640) ' effective,intelligent property protection in a variety of applica- BSM 1 tions. FST-851 Series detectors are compatible with all NOTIFIER intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panels(FACPs). C1313066760025 FlashScan®(U.S.Patent 5,539,389)is a communication pro- 03/60011 tocol developed by NOTIFIER Engineering that greatly en- hances the speed of communication between analog intelli- gent devices and certain NOTIFIER systems. Intelligent de- vices communicate in a grouped fashion.If one of the devices within the group has new information,the panel's CPU stops the group poll and concentrates on single points.The net effect is 6936pMo1.;pg response speed greater than rive times that of earlier designs. FEATURES • Sleek,low-profile,stylish design. • State-of-the-art thermistor technology for fast response. FST-851 in 8701 LP base • Rate-of-rise model(FST-851 R), 15°F(8.3°C)per minute. Plugs into separate base for ease of installation and main- • Factory preset at 135°F(57°C);high-temperature model at tenance. Separate base allows interchange of photoelec- 190°F(880C) tric, ionization and thermal sensors. • Addressable by device. SEMS screws for wiring of the separate base. • FlashScan®(NFS-640,NFS-3030,AFC-600)andclassicCLIP Constructed of off-white Bayblend®,designed to commer- system (AFP-100, AFP-200,AFP-300, AFP-400, AFC-600, cial standards,and offers an attractive appearance. NFS-640,AFP1010,AM2020,and NFS-3030)compatible. 94-5V plastic Flammability rating, i • Rotary, decimal addressing (1 —99 on current classic sys- Remote LED output connection to optional RA40OZ remote tems, 1 —159 on FlashScan®systems). LED'annunciator. • Two-wire SLC connection. Optional sounder,relay,and isolator bases. I ' • Visible LEDs"blink"every time the unit is addressed. Optional recessed (RMK400) or surface (SMK400) base • 360°-field viewing angle of the visual alarm indicators(two mounting kits. bicolor LEDs). LEDs blink green in Normal condition and SPECIFICATIONS turn on steady red in Alarm. • Integral communications and built-in device-type identification. Size: 2.1"(5.3 cm)high x 4.1"(10.4 cm)diameter installed in • Remote test feature from the panel. 8501 base,6.1"(15.5 cm)diameter installed in B71 OLP base. 1 Shipping weight:4.8 oz.(137 g). • Built-in functional test switch activated by external magnet. I Operating temperature range: FST-851, FST-851R:—20°C • Walk test with address display(an address of 121 will blink to 38°C (-4'F to 100°F); FST-851H:—20°C to 66°C (-4'F to the detector LED 12-(pause)-1). 150°F). • Low standby current. i Detector spacing:UL approved for 50 ft.(15.24 m)center to • Listed to UL 521. I center. FM approved for 25 x 25 ft. (7.62 x 7.62 m)spacing. • Backward-compatible: I Relative humidity: 10%—93%noncondensing, • Built-in tamper-resistant feature. Thermal ratings: fixed-temperature setpoint 135'F (57C), • Designed for direct-surface or electrical-box mounting. rate-of-rise detection 15'F(8.3°C)per minute,high tempera- • Sealed against back pressure. 'Lure heat 190'F(88°C). FlashScan®is a registered trademark of NOTIFIER. Bayblend®is a registered trademark of Bayer Corporation. NOTIFIER)is a Honeywell company. ��0 9001 This document is not intended to he used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate.We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information,contact NOTIFIER. Phone:(203)484-7161 FAX:(203)484-7118 INGINERING&MANUFACTURING N OTI F I E R 12 Clintonville Road,Northford,Connecticut 06472 QUALITY SYSTEMS DN-6936•08.123.104 — Page 1 of 2 I ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS: FST-851H:Intelligent high-temperature thermal detector. Voltage range:15=32 volts DC peak_ -` FST-851 HA:Same as FST-851 H but with ULC Listing. (.,Standby current(max.avg.):200 NA @ 24 VDC(without com= Bases: _mnions with 300 pA @ 24 VDC(one communication every 5 B71OLPBP:Standard U.S. low-profile base, pkg.of 10. secdith LED enabled) ,. �- 6710LPA:Standard U.S.low-profile base, ULC Listing. LED current(max.):6.5 mA @ 24 VDC("ON"). ' BASESAVAILABLE.T`-� B501 BP:Standard European flangeless base,pkg.of 10. B71 OLP:6.1"(15.5 cm)diameter. B501 A:Standard European flangeless base, ULC Listing. B501:4.1"(10.4 cm)diameter. B501BH(A):Sounder base,includes B501(A)base above. B501BH or B501 BHT:Sounder base assembly. Includes 8501 8501 BHT(A): Same as 8501 BH(A), but includes temporal base. sounder. B224RB Relay Base: Screw terminals: up to 14 AWG (2.0 B224RB(A):Intelligent relay base. mm2). Relay type: Form-C. Rating: 2.0 A @ 30 VDC resis- B224BI(A): Intelligent isolator base. Isolates SLC from loop tive;0.3 A @ 110 VDC inductive; 1.0 A @ 30 VDC inductive. shorts. Dimensions:6.2"(15.748 cm)x 1.2"(3.048 cm). Accessories: B224BI Isolator Base: Dimensions:6.2"(15.748 cm)x 1.2" F110: Retrofit replacement flange for BX-501 base. Converts (15.748 cm)"Maximum:25 devices between isolator bases. BX-501 base for use with FlashScan@ detectors. See Note 2 under Installation. RA40OZ(A):Remote LED annunciator. 3-32 VDC. Fits U.S. APPLICATIONS single-gang electrical box. Supported by B71OLP(A) and Use thermal detectors for protection of property. For further B501(A)bases only. information,go to systemsensoncom for manual 156-407-00, SMK400: Surface mounting kit provides for entry of surface Applications Manual for System Smoke Detectors,which pro- wiring conduit.For use with B501(A)base only. vides detailed information on detector spacing, placement, RMK460: Recessed mounting kit.For use with B501(A)base zoning,wiring,and special applications. only. INSTALLATION SMB600:Surface mounting kit for use with B71OLP(A). The FST Series plug-in intelligent thermal detector uses a sepa- BCK-20OB: Black detector covers,box of 10.M02-04-01:Test magnet. rate base to simplify installation, service, and maintenance. Installation instructions are shipped with each detector. M02-09-00:Test magnet with telescope stick. Mount base(all base types)on an electrical backbox which is XR2B:Detector removal tool.Allows installation and/or removal at least 1.5"(3.81 cm)deep.Suitable boxes include: of FlashScan@ Series detector heads from base in high ceil- • 4.0"(10.16 cm)square box. ing installations. • 3.5"(8.89 cm)or 4.0"(10.16 cm)octagonal box. T55-127-000:Detector removal tool without pole. • Single-gang box(except relay or isolator base). XP-4:Extension pole for XR2B.Comes in three 5-ft.sections. • With B501BH or B501BHT base,'use a 4.0" (10.16 cm) Detector Guards: square box. NOTE.Some guards listed below may not be applicable to FST Series. • With B224RB orB224BI base,use a 3:5"(8.89 cm)or 4.0" STI 9601:Low-profile,flush-mount smoke detector guard,wire.* (10.16 cm)octagonal box,or a 4.0"(10.16 cm)square box. STI 9602:Low-profile,surface-mount,smoke detector guard, NOTES:1)Because of the inherent supervision provided by the wire.* SLC loop,end-of-line resistors are not required. Wiring"T-taps" STI 9609:High-profile,flush-mount,smoke detectorguard,wire.* or branches are permitted for Style 4(Class"B)wiring.2) When using relay or sounder bases. consult data sheet DN-2243 STI 9605:High=profile,surface-mount,smoke detector guard, (ISO-X)for device limitations between isolator modules and isola- wire.* for bases. STI 9604: Flush-mount heat detector guard,wire.* PRODUCT LINE INFORMATION STI 9610:Surface-mount heat detector guard,wire.* *Fordimensions and additional information on STI Steel Web Stop- NOTE:'A"suffix indicates ULC Listed model. pers,see data sheet DN-4936. FST:851'Intelligent thermal detector.Must be mounted to one STI-8200-SS: Flush-mount stainless steel smoke detector of the bases listed below. guard(compatibility pending). FST-851A:Same as FST-851 but with ULC Listing. STI-8230-SS: Surface-mount stainless steel smoke detector FST-851 R:Intelligent thermal detector with rate-of-rise feature. guard(compatibility pending). FST-851 RA:Same as FST-851 R but with ULC Listing. REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR WIRING DIAGRAM t tid33addrwmf + � i I IyI ir, / Control -h3 I !r i i' i Panel I ;�,' 1 , t _! 7 .Abk� address dial on ..... back of detector .+. ______ S_YLE6`1O_PTIONALWIRbVG ____�____ __=_____ �,.,.,„�.f.r Page 2 of 2 -- DN-6936•08/23/03 INSTALLATION.AND MAINTENANCE.INSTRUCTIONS (�J NOTIFIER Li by Honeywell F`ST=851, FST-851R, and FST-851H 12 Clintonville Road In._te-lli e-n--t--'P�lug- - ture-Sensors Northford,CT 06472-1653 InTem-PeaPhone:203.484.7161 SPECIFICATIONS 14 Diameter: 6.1;(155 mm)installed in B710LP;4.1'(104 mm)installed in B501 Height: 2.0'(51 mm) Weight: 4.8 ounces(137 gm) Installation Temperature: -4°F to 100°F(-20°C to 38°C),FST-851 and FST-851R;-4°F to 150°F(-20°C to 660C),FST-851H Operating Humidity Range: 10%to 93%Relative Humidity,Non-condensing Mounting: B71OLP flanged base;B501 flange less base Voltage Range: 15 to 32 Volts DC Peak Standby Current: 300 pA @ 24 VDC(one communication every 5 seconds with LED blink enabled) LED Current: 6.5 mA @ 24 VDC Fixed Temperature Rating: 135°F(57°C),FST-851 and FST-851R;190°F(88°C),FST-851H i Rate-of Rise Detection: Responds to greater than 15°F/minute;FST-851R This sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system 4. After all sensors have been installed,apply power to the control unit and installation manual.The installation must meet the requirements of the Au- activate the communication line. 4 thority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ).Sensors offer maximum performance when 5. Test the sensor(s)as described in the TESTING section of this manual. installed in compliance with the National Fire Protection Association(NFPA); FIGURE 1.WIRING DIAGRAM: see NFPA 72. REMOTE CAUTION:DO NOT LOOP WIRE Before installing sensors, please read the system wiring and installation man- ANNUNCIATOR UNDER TERMINAL 1 OR 2. ual thoroughly. This manual provides detailed information on sensor spac- + ' - BREAK WIRE RUN TO PROVIDE ing,placement,zoning,and special applications.Copies of these manuals are + SUPERVISION OF CONNECTIONS. available from Notifier. zLU j I GENERAL DESCRIPTION 0 w Models FST-851, FST-851R and FST-851H are intelligent sensors that utilize Zi Z I a state-of-the-art thermistor sensing circuit for fast response. These sensors H a< 3 2 3 2 3 2 1 are designed to provide open area protection with 50 foot spacing capability. Z Q Model FST-851 is a fixed temperature sensor with 135°F fixed temperature a: I LU alarm. Model FST-851R is a rate-of-rise temperature sensor with 135°F fixed FLO I temperature alarm. Model FST-851H is a high temperature sensor with 190°F ~O U fixed temperature alarm. Z - ___LLB;;PDF-1i4N94 ELI 51_--__j-------- Two LEDs on each sensor light to provide a local, visible sensor indication. Remote LED annunciator capability is available as an optional accessory(Part Ctolo-oo No.RA400Z). FIGURE 2: p Notifier panels offer different feature sets across different models.As a result, G 7 g n 6 7 v 9 certain features of the FST-851,FST-851R and FST-851H may be available on V some control panels,but not on others.The sensors will support either Flash- 5 1 O 5 f Scan'or CLIP (Classic Loop Interface Protocol) mode.The possible features A 11 4 available,if supported by the control unit include: 4 1. The panel controls the LED operation on the sensor.Operational modes 3 12 3 are RED blink,RED continuous,GREEN blink,and off. 2 1 2 2. The remote output may be synchronized to the LED operation or con- O 151 A O trolled independent of the LEDs.Please refer to the operation manual for 1 `F 1 the UL listed control unit for specific operation of these models Models FST-851, FST-8518,and FST-851H require compatible addressable TENS ONES communications to function properly.Connect these sensors to listed-com- patible control panels only. I C0162-00 ti TAMPER RESISTANCE WIRING GUIDE The sensor base includes a tamper proof feature which'when activated pre- All wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, vents removal of the sensor without the use of a tool. See the installation applicable local codes and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.Proper wire instruction manual for the sensor base for details in using this feature. gauges should be used. The installation wires should be color coded to-limit TESTING wiring mistakes and ease system troubleshooting. Improper connections will Before testing, notify the proper authorities that the system is undergoing prevent a system from responding properly in the event of a fire. maintenance, and will temporarily be out of service. Disable the system to Remove power from the communication line before installing sensors. prevent unwanted alarms. I 1. Wire the sensor base(supplied separately)per the wiring diagram,Figure 1. All sensors must be tested after installation and periodically thereafter.Test- 2. Set the desired address on the sensor address switches,see Figure 2. ing methods must satisfy the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors 3. Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base offer maximum performance when tested and maintained in compliance with { while turning it clockwise to secure it in place. NFPA 72. s NO-400-004 1 156-3518-001R i t A. Test Magnet(Model No.M02-04-optional) MAINTENANCE 1. Place the optional test magnet against the cover in the magnet test NOTE:Before cleaning notify the proper authorities that the system is undergoing area,as shown in Figure 3,to activate the test feature. maintenance,and therefore the system will temporarily be out of service.Disable f 2.'The LEDs should latch on within 10 seconds, indicating alarm and the loop or system undergoing maintenance to prevent unwanted alarms. annunciating the panel. It is recommended that the sensor be removed from its mounting base for 3. Reset the detector at the system control panel. easier cleaning and that sensors be cleaned at least once a year.Use a vacuum B. Direct Heat Method(Hair dryer of 1000—1500 watts) cleaner to remove dust from the sensing chamber. 1. From the side of the detector,direct the heat toward the sensor.Hold FIGURE 4: r t the heat so5rce about 6 inches (15 cm) away to prevent damage to the cover during testing. 2. The LEDs on the detector should light when the temperature at the detector reaches the alarm setpoint.If the LEDs fail to light,check the power to the detector and the wiring in the detector base. 3. Reset the detector at the system control panel. Detectors that fail these tests should be cleaned as described under MAIN- TENANCE and retested. If the detectors still fail these tests,they should be } returned for repair. FIGURE 3.VIEWS SNOWING POSITION OF TEST MAGNET: LE MAGNET SENSING t C TEST MARKER - CHAMBER D[D D171 LE>Izzg�� LED MAGNET x TEST MARKER C0197-00 C0196-00 t t 1 , a 1 r 1 y Please refer to insert for the Limitations of Fire Alarm Systems FCC STATEMENT This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1)This device may not cause harmful interference,and(2)this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE:This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential.installation.This equipment generates,uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and,if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.However,there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular instal- lation.If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: -Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. -Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. -Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. -Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NO-400-004 2 156-3518-OOIR X2008 Notifier August 23, 2004 DN-6726•H-240 r� NBG-12LX NOTIFIER° Addressable Manual Pull Station with FlashScan© Section: Intel ligenUAddressable Devices GENERAL Patented, U.S. Patent No. D428,351; 6,380,846 The NOTIFIER NBG-12LX is a state-of-the-art, dual-ac- U.S. Patent Pending: 091686,286 tion (i.e., requires two motions to activate the station) pull station that includes an addressable interface for any California NOTIFIER intelligent control panel.Because the NBG-12LX ;Fes `, State Fire MEA is addressable, the control panel can display the exact C@L US ( Marshal 67-02-E location of the activated manual station. This leads fire ° 7150-0028:199 personnel quickly to the location of the alarm. LISTED FEATURES S692 ►.: '. • Maintenance personnel can open station without causing U.S. Coast Guard FM ' an alarm condition. 161.002/23/3 • Built-in bicolor LED,which is visible through the handle of (AFP-200) APPROVED the station,flashes in normal operation and latches steady 93/60141 (E3) red when in alarm. 02/6007 • Handle latches in down position and the word "ACTI- VATED"appears to clearly indicate the station has been o P • Captive screw terminals wire-ready for easy connection to SLC loop (accepts up to 12 AWG/3.1 mm2 wire). • Semi-flush, mounts to a standard single-gang (2.125' [5.3975 cm] minimum depth), double-gang. or 4" (10.16 cm) square electrical box. • Smooth dual-action design. • Within ADA 5 Ib. pull force. • Highly visible. • Attractive shape and textured finish. y • Key reset. • Includes Braille text on station handle. • Optional trim ring (BG-TR). • Meets UL 38, Standard for Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. • Up to 99 NBG-12LX stations per loop on classic protocol systems. • Up to 159 NBG-12LX stations per loop on FlashScan® protocol systems. • Dual-color LED blinks green to indicate normal on FlashScanC systems. CONSTRUCTION The NBG-12LX Shell, door, and handle are molded of durable LEXANu Addressable Manual Pull Station (or polycarbonate equivalent) with a textured finish. OPERATION the bottom of the station. To reset the station, simply un- lock the station with the key and pull the door open. This Pushing in, then pulling down on the handle causes it to action resets the handle; closing the door automatically latch in the down/activated position. Once latched, the resets the switch. word`ACTIVATED"(in bright yellow)appears at the top of Each manual station, on command from the control panel, the handle, while a portion of the handle protrudes from sends data to the panel representing the state of the manual FlashScan® is a registered trademark of NOTIFIER. LEXAN® switch. Two rotary decimal switches allow address set- is a registered trademark of GE Plastics, a subsidiary of General tings (1 — 159 on FlashScanE) systems, 1 — 99 on CLIP Electric Compary. systems). NOTIFIER:R'is a Honeywell companv. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our '�� 0� product information up-to-date and accurate.We cannot coverall specific applications or anticipate all requirements All specifications are subect to change without notice. For more information,contact NOTIFIER. Phone:`203)484 ??61 FAX:1203)484-7118 ENGINEERING&MANUFACTURING �J NOTI F I E RF 12 Clintonville Road.Northford,Connecticut 06472 QUALITY SYSTEMS DN-6726-08/2104 — Page 0'.2 PRODUCT LINE INFORMATION ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS NBG-12LX Dual-action addressable pull station. Normal operating voltage: 24 VDC. Includes key locking feature. Maximum SLC loop voltage: 28.0 VDC. SB-10 Surface backbox. Maximum SLG loop current: 375 NA. SB-110 Indoor/outdoor surface backbox. ARCHITECTURAL/ BG-TR Optional trim ring. ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS INSTALLATION Manual Fire Alarm Stations shall be non-coded, with a The NBG-12LX will mount semi-flush into a single-gang, key-operated reset lock in order that they may be tested, double-gang, or standard 4" (10.16 cm) square electrical and so designed that after actual Emergency Operation, outlet box. or will surface mount to the model SB-10 or they cannot be restored to normal except by use of a key. SB-110 surface backbox. If the NBG-12LX is being semi- An operated station shall automatically condition itself so flush mounted, then the optional trim ring(BG-TR)may be as to be visually detected as activated. Manual stations used. The BG-TR is usually needed for semi-flush mount- shall be constructed of red-colored LEXAN® (or polycar- ing with 4" (10.16 cm) or double-gang boxes (not with bonate equivalent) with clearly visible operating instruc- single-gang boxes). tions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in white letters, 1.00 inches (2.54 cm) or larger. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting on matching backbox SB-10;or semi-flush mount- ing on a standard single-gang, double-gang, or 4" (10.16 i cm)square electrical box, and shall be installed within the G limits defined by the Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) or per national/local requirements. Manual Stations shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed. Manual stations shall connect with two wires to one of the H / control panel SLC loops.The manual station shall,on com- Terminal mand from the control panel, send data to the panel repre- €.. Connections senting the state of the manual switch, Manual stations 1 SLC ( shall provide address setting by use of rotary decimal switches. ' 2 SLC (+) The loop poll LED shall be clearly visible through the front of the station. The LED shall flash while in the normal condition, and stay steadily illuminated when in alarm. E EEIEEE E, Detail of BREAKAWAY TAB* 4' Back of station without door. 14 15 0 1 RESS p 13 2 2 12 3 ____. ..... 3 t1 4 4 10 3 8 7 6 9 8 7 8 � 1 SUS LED - ROTARY DECIMAL SWITCHES JI "Remove tab to select addresses above 99 (FlashScan�D systems only). O Cover open to show easy access to miniature monitor module, rotary switch, and UL label. Page 2 of 2 -- DN-6726•08123,'04 Wiring NBG-12LX N OT 1 F 1 E R� TO Addressable Pull Station Nex(0 , Add Document 52131 156-3511-000 Addressable by Honeywell F C °8 FACP + —SLC NB.G-12L_X_Addressable Pull•Station SLC- _ Patented,U_._S.,P_atent No.Des.428,351;-6,380,846;Other Patents,Ped U r 77 Document'5213,1 156-3511000 � o o � �--- u 1 2 ,.. STRIP GAUGE ® • • • •• Pul'iftb Description _:.•: :. � The NBG-12LX Addressable pull station is a non-coded,dual-action manual pull station `' '•: •,;., with a key-lock reset feature. It provides NOTIFIER intelligent fire alarm control panels (FACP) with one addressable alarm initiating input.The addressable module is housed in- side the pull station.The NBG-12LX is compatible with all Notifier intelligent panels and 0 o f l CD 0 will automatically operate in either FlashScanT"'or CLIP(Classic Loop Interface Protocol) V mode. FlashScan" is a patented (U.S. Pat. No. 5,539,389) High Speed Communications s r� Noo R tFtE Protocol. Refer to the FACP Installation Manual to determine`if FlashScan'"' protocol is 0 o a neYWell supported.FlashScan'"or CLIP operating mode must be selected in the FACP.(This selec- tion is not available or required in FACPs that do not support FlashScanT",therefore CLIP �y mode is enabled by default.) No selection is required in the Pull Station.The NBG-12LX meets(tie ADAAG controls and operating mechanisms guidelines(section 4.1.3[13]),and Resetting the Pull Station the ADA requirement for a 5 lb.maximum pull force to activate the pull station.Operating 1.Insert the key into the lock and rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise. instructions are molded into the pull station handle along with Braille text.Molded Terminal 2.Open the door until the handle returns to normal. numbers are also present. 3.Close and lock the door. Ratings NOTE:Closing the door automatically resets the switch to the `Normal'position.Open- Normal Operating Voltage:24 VDC. ing the door will not activate or deactivate the alarm switch. Average Operating Current(LED Flash): 300 NA. CAUTION! Do not detach the door of the pull station during installation.The door of Temperature Range: 32°F— 120°F(0°C—49°Q. the pull station cannot be reattached to the backplate after the backplate has already been Relative Humidity Range: 10%-93%non-condensing. installed onto an electrical box. Installation CAUTION! The NBG-12LX Addressable pull station can be surface mounted to an SB-10 or SB-I/O Install the Notifier NBG-12LX addressable pull station in accordance with these instructions, surface backbox or semi-flush mounted on a standard single-gang,double-gang or 4"(10.16 applicable NFPA standards,national and local Fire and Electrical codes and the requirements cm)square electrical box.The optional BG-TR trim ring can be used if the NBG-12LX is of the AHJ(Authority Having Jurisdiction). Regular testing of the devices should be Ion- to be semi-flush mounted. ducted in accordance with the appropriate NFPA standards.Failure to follow these directions may result in failure of the device to report an alarm condition.Notifier is not responsible for -Operation - devices that have been improperly installed,tested or maintained. To activate the dual-action pull station, push in and pull down on the handle. The word `ACTIVATED'appears after the handle is pulled down.This will remain until the pull sta- ADA Compliance tion is'reset. For ADA compliance,if the clear floor space only allows forward approach to an object,the The pull station includes one Single Pole, Single Throw (SPST) Normally Open (N/O) maximum forward reach height allowed is 48 inches(121.92 cm). If the clear floor space allows parallel approach by a person in a wheelchair,the maximum side reach allowed is switch which closes upon activation of the pull station. 54 inches137.16 em . ( ) (over for Programming iglbrmation)i.► Setting the NB(;-12LX Address The NBG-12LX Addressable pull station is factory preset with address'00.'Set the address for the pull station by turning the rotary address switches on the addressable module mounted inside the pull station.Only one device per address is allowed. Multiple modules may not be set to the same address on the Signaling Line Circuit.Once the address is set,record it in the space provided on the product ID label located inside the pull station. Software Note for AM2020/AFP1010 Programming The NBG-12LX is an Alarm Initiating Module of software 0 0 type 'mpul'. If you have an I } older system that does not O o t� o X support thes'mpul'-software type,the software type'mon' may be used. 13' '2 '2 4 To use the NBG-12LX 0 B g 7 a 5 (D s s s 5 with panels capable TENS ONES of supporting up to 159 addresses, pry NpRMP�' off the 'break-away' address block using a flat-bladed screwdriver. The break-away piece o o CT�V'4rFD - is illustrated below. O 0 PRODUCT • • ; is 0 O ' � 2 3 r 9 6 8 14 15 ADDRESS 1 0. _i5l Note - Opening the pull 13 `Z 7 . station door willlpl activate or 12 3 3 deactivate the alarm switch. ' 11 a 4 LOOP4 LED OPERATION 10 Alarm: tJL[ Ij Steady RED 9 $ 7 6 $ 7 �-Normal CLIP Systems: ` Flash RED (� Normal FlashScad": Flash GREEN- - Note:LED is - visible through x translucent handle. LED ROTARY ADDRESS SWITCHES s August 23,2004 DN-6720•H-220 ® FMM-1, FMM=101, FZM-1, FDM-1 �J NOTIFIER M0—hItor_Modules� C# FIasHScc&& Section: Intelligent/Addressable Devices GENERAL ^ Four different monitor modules are available for NOTIFIER in- �C �1 f M telligent controls to suit a variety of applications.Monitor mod- V ules are used to supervise a circuit of dry-contact input de- 'APPROVED vices,such as conventional heat detectors and pull stations, LISTED CS669 or monitor and power a circuit of two-wire smoke detectors ST (FZM-1). 93/60141 (E3) FMM-1 —is a standard-sized module(typically mounts to � U.S. Coast Guard (FMM-1/--101, FZM-1) a 4"[10.16 cm]square box)that supervises either a Class A : 161.002123/3 (AFP-200: 941600041E2 (Style D)or Class B (Style'B)circuit of dry-contact input de- I i FMM-1/--101, FZM-1) (AFP200: vices. r ^^° except FDM-1) 161.002/42/1 02/60007 i FMM-101.= is a miniature monitor module (a mere 1.3" California (NFS-640:FMM-1/-101) (NFS-640:FDM-1) (3.302 cm)H x 2.75"(6.985 cm)W x 0.5"(1.270 cm)D)used State Fire to supervise a Class B (Style B)circuit. Its compact design Marshal allows the FMM-101 to often be mounted in a single-gang 7300-0028:202 MEA box behind the device it's monitoring. 143-01-E (FDM-1) FZM-1 —is a standard-sized module used to monitor and 317-01-E supervise compatible two-wire, 24 volt, smoke detectors on ( fir ��1 (FMM-1/-101) a Class A(Style D)or Class B (Style B)circuit. v O o O `� (FMM-10/2-101) FDM-1 —is a standard-sized dual monitor module used to 457-99-E (FZM-1, monitor and supervise two independent two-wire initiating �'9 58759,0 t 0 FMM-1/10 1) device circuits(IDCs)at two separate,consecutive addresses 18 4 ,,, 1 447-99-E in intelligent, two-wire systems. FlashScan®(U.S. Patent 5,539,389)is a new communi- adl 7 TENSU0 1514 9 2 V cation protocol developed by NOTIFIER Engineering that 6 45 3 a I greatly enhances the speed of communication between ana- I ❑ 5 21 4 (� log intelligent devices. Intelligent devices communicate in a ONES° -grouped fashion. If one of the devices within the group has 1-00P ADDRESS FMM-1 new information, the,panel CPU stops the group poll and n, O, O and concentrates on single points. The net effect is response � FZM-1 speed greater than five times that of other designs. FlashScan®is a registered trademark of NOTIFIER. FMM-1 MONITOR MODULE -._........_ -- • Built-in type identification automatically identifies this de- ® 9 510 0 vice as a monitor module to the control panel. detail of FDM-1 ® 8 3 �z 1 • Powered directly by two-wire SLC loop.No additional power — note "ones" ® 7 TENS° 15143 2 required. addresses are ( 6 6 8 3 �^ • High noise(EMF/RFI)immunity. 0, 2, 4, 6, 8 only ® 4: ® �o • SEMS screws with clamping plates for ease of wiring. Lam! • Direct-dial entryof address:01 –159 on FlashScan®s s- 5 eN=_s° 4 ° Y BOOP ADDRESS tems,01 –99 on CLIP systems. • LED flashes green during normal operation (this is a pro- FMM-1 Applications—Use to monitor a zone of four- grammable option) and latches on steady red to indicate wire smoke detectors, manual fire alarm-pull stations, alarm. waterflow devices,or other normally-open dry-contact alarm The FMM-1 Monitor Module is intended for use in intelli- i activation devices. May also be used to monitor normally- gent,two-wire systems,where the individual address of each open supervisory devices with special supervisory indica- module is selected using the built-in rotary switches. It pro- tion at the control panel. Monitored circuit may be wired as vides either a two-wire or four-wire fault-tolerant Initiating an NFPA Style B (Class B) or Style D (Class A) Initiating Device Circuit(IDC)for normally-open-contact fire alarm and Device Circuit. A 47K ohm End-of-Line Resistor (provided) supervisory devices.The module has a panel-controlled LED 1 terminates the Style B circuit. No resistor is required for su- indicator. The FMM-1 can be used to replace MMX-1 mod- j pervision of the Style D circuit. Maximum IDC loop length is ules in existing systems. 2,500 ft./762 m (20 ohms maximum). NOTIFIER®n i Honeywell company. '�o �0�� This document s not intended to be used for installation purposes.we iry'to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements.All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information,contact NOTIFIER.Phone:(203)434-7161 FAX:(203)484-7118 ENCINEEIING 8 MMUFitC MIS �J NOTIFIER 12 Clintonville Road,Northford.Connecticut 06472 QUALITY SYSTEMS DN-6720•08/23/04—Page 1 of 6 FMM-1 Operation—Each FMM-1 uses one of 159 avail- regular polls from the control panel and reports its type and able module addresses on an SLC loop It responds to regu- the status (open/normal/short)of its Initiating Device Circuit lar polls from the control panel and reports its type and the l (IDC). status(open/normal/short)of its Initiating Device Circuit(IDC). (FMM=101:Specifica'-ones A flashing LED indicates that the module is in communica- tion with the control panel.The LED latches steady on alarm (subject to current limitations on the loop). Maximum operating current: 375 NA. FMM-1 Specifications EOL resistance: 47K ohms. - Nominal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. Temperature range: 32°F to 120'F (0°C to 49°C). Maximum current draw: 5.1 mA(LED on). Humidity range. 10%to 93% noncondensing. Maximum operating current: 375 pA(LED flashing). Dimensions: 1.3"(3.302 cm)high x 2.75"(6.985 cm)wide x I EOL resistance: 47K ohms. 0.5" (1.270 cm)deep. Temperature range: 32'F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C). Wire length: 6"(15.24 cm)minimum. Humidity range: 10% to 93% noncondensing. FZM-1 INTERFACE MODULE Dimensions: 4.5" (11.43 cm) high x 4",4(10.16 cm) wide x Supports compatible two-wire smoke detectors. 1.25" (3.175 cm)deep. Mounts to a 4"(10.16 cm)square x Supervises IDC wiring and connection of external power 2.125" (5.398 cm)deep box. source. FMM=TOI=MIN1-MONITOR-MODULE-- High noise(EMF/RFI)immunity. • SEMS screws with clamping plates for ease of wiring. • Built-in type identification automatically identifies this de- Direct-dial entry of address:01 -159 on FlashScan®sys- vice as a monitor module to the panel. Mems,01 -99 on CLIP systems. • Powered directly by two-wire FACP. No additional power LED flashes during normal operation (this is a program- required. # mable option). • High noise(EMF/RFI)immunity. LED latches steady to indicate alarm on command from Tinned, stripped leads for ease of wiring. control panel. • Direct-dial entry of address`01 -159 on FlashScan®sys- The FZM-1 Interface Module is intended for use in intelli- terns,01 -99 on CLIP systems. gent,addressable systems,where the individual address of each module is selected using built-in rotary switches. This 1415 0 1 ADDRESS 0\1 2 module allows intelligent panels to interface and monitor two- : 13/ _- —,,2 smoke detectors. It transmits the status 12+( •� 13' L ; 3 (normal,open,or alarm)of one full zone of conventional de- 1' /4 Ii �4 tectors back to the control panel.All two-wire detectors be- 065 9 5 -Eing monitored must be UL compatible with the module.-The e FZM-1 has a panel-controlled LED indicator and can be used TENS ONES o to replace MMX-2 modules in existing systems. G FZM-1 Applications—Use the FZM-1 to monitor a zone of two-wire smoke detectors. The monitored circuit may be Y wired as an NFPA Style B(Class B)or Style D(Class A)Ini- tiating Device Circuit.A 3.9 K ohm End-of-Line Resistor(pro- p Q vided)terminates the end of the Style B or D (class B or A) j m circuit(maximum IDC loop resistance is 25 ohms).Install ELR ' across terminals 8 and 9 for Style D application. FZM-1 Operation—Each FZM-1 uses one of 159 avail- able module addresses on an SLC loop. It responds to regu- lar polls from the control.panel and reports its type and the The FMM-101 Mini Monitor Module can be installed in a ( status(open/normal/short)of its Initiating Device Circuit(IDC). single-gang junction directly behind the monitored unit. Its A flashing LED indicates that the module is in communica- small size and light weight allow it to be installed without rigid tion with the control panel.The LED latches steady on alarm mounting. The FMM-101 is intended for use in intelligent, (subject to current limitations on the loop). two-wire systems where the individual address of each mod- FZM-1 Specifications ule is selected using rotary switches. It provides a two-wire I initiating device circuit for normally-open-contact fire alarm I Nominal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. and security devices.The FMM-101 can be used to replace Maximum current draw: 5.1 mA(LED on). MMX-101 module in existing systems. i Maximum operating current: 255 pA (LED flashing). , FMM-101.Applicatio_s`--Use to monitor a single de- EOL resistance: 3.9K ohms. vice or a zone of four-wire smoke detectors,manual fire alarm pull stations,waterflow devices,or other normally-open dry- External'supply voltage (between Terminals and T4): contact devices. May also be used to monitor normally-open DC voltagge:e: 1 18 to 28 volts power limited. Rippllee voltage: supervisory devices with special supervisory indication at the 0.1 VRN1S maximum. Current:90 mA per module maximum. control panel. Monitored circuit/device is wired as an NFPA Temperature range: 32'F to.120'F (0°C to 49°C). Style B(Class B)Initiating Device Circuit.A 47 ohm End-of- Humidity range: 10% to 93% noncondensing. Line Resistor(provided)terminates the circuit. Dimensions: 4.5" (11.43 cm) high x 4" (10.16 cm) wide x tFMM-10' '1 peration—Each FMM-101 uses one of 159 ! 1.25" (3.175 cm)deep. Mounts to a 4" (10.16 cm)square x available module addresses on an SLC loop. it responds to 2.125" (5.398 cm)deep box. Page 2 of 6—DN-6720•08/23104 1 4 FDM-1 DUAL MONITOR MODULE I INSTALLATION 1 The FDM-1 Dual Monitor Module is intended for use in in- FMM-1,FDM-1,and FZM-1 modules mount directly to a stan- telligent,two-wire systems.It provides two independent two- dard 4"(10.16 cm)square, 2.125" (5.398 cm)deep, electrical wire initiating device circuits(IDCs)at two separate,consecu- I box.They may also be mounted to the SMB500 surface-mount tive addresses. It is capable of monitoring normally open I box. Mounting hardware and installation instructions are pro- contact fire alarm and supervisory devices;or either normally I vided with each module.All wiring must conform to applicable open or normally closed security devices.The module has a local codes, ordinances, and regulations. These modules are single panel-controlled LED.NOTE.The FDM-1 provides two intended for power-limited wiring only. ' Class B (Style Y) IDC circuits ONLY. Class A (Style Z) IDC The FMM-101 module is intended to be wired and mounted circuits are NOT supported in any application. without rigid connections inside a standard electrical box.All FDM-1 Specifications wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, Normal operating voltage range: 15 to 32 VDC. and regulations. Maximum current draw: 5.7 mA(LED on). PRODUCT LINE INFORMATION Maximum operating current: 750 NA (LED flashing). FMM-1 Monitor module. EOL resistance: 47K ohms. SFMM 101 Monitor module, miniature. Maximum IDC wiring resistance: 1,500 ohms. FZM-1 Monitor module, two-wire detectors Temperature range:.32° to 120°F (0°to 49°C). FDM-1 Monitor module, dual, two independent Class Humidity range: 10%to 93% (non-condensing). B circuits. Dimensions: 4.5" (11.43 cm) high x 4" (10.16 cm) wide x SMB500 Optional surface-mount backbox. 2.125" (5.398 cm)deep. ARCHITECTS'/ENGINEERS' 1 FDM-1 Automatic Addressing —The FDM-1 auto- SPECIFICATIONS matically assigns itself to two addressable points, starting with the original address. For example,if the FDM-1 is set toSpecifications of these and all NOTIFIER products are avail- address "56", then it will automatically assign itself to ad- able from NOTIFIER. dresses"56"and"57".NOTE:"ones"addresses on the FDM-1 1 are 0, 2, 4, 6, or 8 only.Terminals 6 and 7 use the first ad- dress, and terminals 8 and 9 use the second address. OCAUT/ON! ' Avoid duplicating addresses on the system. q,4 a m ..._....___..........___.....1 CAUTION # J J DE-ENERGIZE UNIT PRIOR TO SERVICING 1 ti n O Face Plate for FMM-1, FZM-1, and FDM-1 MOUNTING DIAGRAMS ==� ,! for standornd zed C-= ,y mode/es DN-6720 08/25:04—Page 3 of 6 I WIRING DIAGRAMS The following wiring diagrams are included: k• 1) FDM-1, typical dual two-wire Style B initiating device circuit configuration. 2) FMM-101, typical two-wire Style B initiating device circuit configuration. 3) FMM-1, typical two-wire initiating circuit configuration,'NFPA Style B. 4) FMM-1,typical four-wire fault-tolerant initiating circuit configuration,NFPA Style D. ` 5) FMM-1, typical two-wire initiating circuit configuration for security systems (with alarm versus short capability). 6) FZM-1, interface two-wire conventional detectors, NFPA Style B. 7) FZM-1, interface two-wire conventional detectors, NFPA Style D. 8) FRM-1, relay control module used to disconnect a power supply. i WIRING t DIAGRAM: FDMA ' u F f Fig. 1 FDM-1: Typical dual two-wire Style B initiating device'circuit configuration. Two Initiating Device Circuits (L.&H) TO'Next each power-limited to Device (+) ADO (—) FROM Panel Device 230 pA max.@ 12 VDC max. MONITOR (+) or Previous 47K EOL MODULE Resistor H Communication Line ELR-47K 9 s0 0 C VDC maximum. $ 1 ® f32 Twisted-pair is 7�r+srecommended. 47K EOL 6 3 •All wiring shown is supervised Resistor L ❑ 5 41 ELR-47K �ooP ONES ADDRESS and power limited. «, T o •Connect modules to listed compatible O O NOTIFIER control panels only. a •ANY NUMBER of LIL Listed contact closure devices may be used. 6e22wri.wmf •DO NOT MIX fire alarm initiating,supervisory,or security devices on the same circuit. •Install contact closure devices per manufacturer's installation instructions. TO ►NEXT DEVICE UL LISTED BLACK►, 4 RED Compatible (-) ({') FMM-101 s7as 6789 f Control 5,-=�l0 5,--=� Panel 3�,�( 11 'J11112 3'('�l i 2\�c s'13 2 �r { t 10 1514 1 0 (+)(—) 1 VIOLET► 4 YELLOW s DIAGRAM:WIRING 47K EOL INCLUDED Fig. 2 FMM-101: Typical two-wire Style B initiating device circuit configuration. or20w 1—f Page 4 of 6 ---DN-6720-08123/04 WIRING DIAGR"S THIS PAGE: FMM-1 • Connect modules to listed compatible NOTIFIER control panels only. • All wiring shown is supervised and power limited. • Install contact closure devices per manufacturers'installation instructions. • Any number of UL-listed contact closure devices may be used. • DO NOT MIX fire alarm initiating, supervisory,or security devices on the same circuit. V' Fig. 3 FMM-1: Typical two-wire initiating device circuit configuration, NFPA Style B. TO Next (—) Device W 00 (—) FROM Panel W or Previous MONITOR Device Initiating Device Circuit(IDC) MODULE NFPA Style B, power limited: Communication Line 230 pA max.@ 12 VDC max. 9 O 0 32 VDC maximum. — Twisted-pair is 1' 8 .% 1 z +) recommended. 47K EOL 0 7 TENS 2 Resistor 116 q,, 30 ELR-47K 05 4 4 - Communication Loss 7 LOOP ONESADDRESS (optional connection for panels ° n which support this feature) FUTURE FEATURE 6720wir2.wm1 Fig. 4 FMM-1: Typical four-wire fault-tolerant initiating circuit configuration, NEPA Style D. TO Next (—) Device (+) (—) FROM Panel (+) or Previous MONITOR Device MODULE Communication Line 9 O 0 f32 VDC maximum. wisted-pair is Eli8 -' 1 ® (+) recommended. EOL Resistor - E 7 TENS 20 1 is internal at 6 30 L terminals 8&95 4 -••- Communication Loss OfJES Looe ADDRESS (optional connection for panels ° which support this feature) �O O (� FUTURE FEATURE 6720wir3.wmf V' Fig. 5 FMM-1: Typical two-wire initiating circuit configuration for security systems (with alarm versus short capability). TO Next (—) _ Initiating Device Circuit(IDC) Device W 000 orPreviousPanel NFPA Style B,power limited: MONITOR Device 230 pA max.@ 12 VDC max. MODULE Communication Line 14K Series Resistor :O 32 VDC maximum. 9 0 —) Twisted-pair is 40 8 )) t +) recommended. 47K EOL 7 ENS 2 Resistor _ 6 3_;141 I ELR-47K 5 4 _; Communication Loss _ jILOC °NES ADDRESS] (optional connection for panels which support this feature) FUTURE FEATURE ' s ' — 872Cwi�e•rtm! DN-6720-08!:2104—Page 5 of 6 • Connect modules to listed compatible control panels only. • Terminal wiring must be power limited. WIRING • DO NOT MIX fire alarm initiating, supervisory,or security devices on the same circuit. DIAGIUMS • DO NOT LOOP wire under terminals.Break wire run to provide supervision of connections. THIS PAGE: • Detectors must be UL listed compatible with module. • Install detectors per manufacturers' installation instructions. • Power to the interface module must be externally switched to reset the detectors.An FIRMA relay control module can be used to switch power from a standard power supply; see Fig. 7 below. Fig. 6 FZM-1:Interface two-wire conventional detectors, NFPA Style B. TO Next (—) (—) FROM Panel Device (+) 000 (+) or Previous INTERFACE Device /J MODULE V\Communication Line v o 32 VDC maximum. i Twisted-pair is 9 0 (_) recommended. 8 (2, t „ (+ r 3.9K EOL G 7 TENS 29 (_) Listed Battery Backup Resistor _i 6 30 ; +) switched DC (included) 5 oyes 4 power supply. LOOP ADDRESS A2143-10 + + O ° O n A-- Optional Branch Circuit (/ TO Next Interface Module 672owir5.wmf Module supervises supply voltage and detector loop. Fig. 7 FZM-1:Interface two-wire conventional detectors, NFPA Style D. ( > TO Next FROM Panel Device ((+) 0000 00�(+)� or Previous _ Device INTERFACE ti MODULE Communication Line 32 VDC maximum. \ ° Twisted-pair is 19 0 recommended. 3.9KEOL Resistor — E8 r 1 I (+) (included)required X17 TeN6 2 at terminals 8&9 (—) Listed Battery Backup 6 ( 3 ! + switched DC A2143-10 -- ❑i 5 4!; oNes power supply. ADDRESS Optional Branch Circuit i TO Next Interface Module 6720-6.—f Module supervises supply voltage and detector loop. ♦ Fig. 8 FRM-1: Relay control module used to disconnect a power supply. TO Next ( - `—� FROM Panel Device (+} 0000000 (+} or Previous RELAY Device DC POWER CONTROMODU EL SUPPLY (+} o Listed for Fire (—) Protection with Communication Line �L. s C 1 32 VDC maximum. Battery Backup — Twisted- 1 +} pair is- 7 2 recommended. (+) 5 ) 4 LOOP ADDRESS O F''720wa"r wmf Page 6 of 6 --DN-6720•08/23104 (INSTALLATION AND-MAINTENANCE=INSTRUCTIONS") • NOTI F1 E R J FIRE S1rSTEMS A PIRWAY COAMM" One Fire-Lite Place Northford,CT 06472-1653' FMM=101-Monitor'Module) (203)484-7161 1 Specifications Nominal Operating Voltage: 15-32 VDC Average Operating Current: 375µA maximum EOL resistance: 47K ohms Temperature Range: 32" to 120° F (0° to 49° C) Humidity: 10 to 93% noncondensing r Dimensions: 1.3"H x 2.75"W x 0.5"D Wire length: 6"minimum Before Installing S This information is included as a quick reference installa- tion guide. Refer to the control panel installation manual 4. Set the address on the module per job drawings. 6 for detailed system information. If the modules will be•in- Note: Some panels support extended addressing. In or- stalled in an existing operational system, inform the opera- der to set the module above address 99 on compatible for and local authority that the system will be temporarily systems, carefully remove the stop on¢the upper rotary out of service. Disconnect power to the control panel before switch with thumb in the direction shown in Figure 1. installing the modules. 5. Install the module in the desired mounting location. NOTICE: This manual should be left with the owner/user Figure 1. Removing rotary switch stop: of this equipment. / II General Description The FMM-101 monitor module can be installed in a single gang junction box directly behind the monitored unit. Its small size and light weight allow it to be installed without rigid mounting (see Figure 1). The FMM-101 is intended '�ti�61 for use in intelligent, two-wire systems where the indi- vidual address of each module is selected using rotary switches. It provides a two-wire initiating device circuit for normally open contact fire alarm and security devices. This module can be used to replace an MMX-101 module in existing systems. A78-1712-07 Compatibility Requirements Figure 2. Typical 2-wire style B initiating device To ensure proper operation, this module shall be connected to a circuit configuration: compatible Notifier system control panel (list available from a. Notifier). U.L.LISTED Compatible Control Panel Mounting and Wiring , TO NEX NOTE: This module is intended to be wired and mounted H f DEVICE without rigid connections inside a standard electri- cal box. All wiring must conform to applicable lo- cal codes, ordinances and regulations. � 3 r 1. Connect the red (+) and black (-) wires to the positive and negative loop power leads of the signaling line circuit (SLC). 2. Connect the violet (+) and yellow (-) wires to a two- wire, normally open initiating loop. 3. Install the specified EOL resistor value to terminate the 47k EDI- initiating loop. INCLUDED A78-1937-04 N500-50-00 1 156-1173-02 ®Notifier 1999 t � s t b April 5,2004 DN-6724•H-230 ® FCMCAand:FRM-Se ries._ �J NOTIFIER C5n-tro1,.a d Relay Modules; wi*f_FlashScan®. Section: Intelligent/Addressable Devices GENERAL California �' � State Fire FGM-1..ControLModule,—. _The FCM-1 Addressable Marshal __ j Control Module provides NOTIFIER intelligent control pan- els a circuit for Notification Appliances(horns,strobes,speak- 7300-0028:202 ers,etc.)or to monitor a telephone circuit.Addressability al- LISTED CS669 J~ lows the FCM to be activated, either manually or through panel programming, on a select(zone or area of coverage) S3705 basis. MARYLAND State Fire Marshal rlYl FRM- -Relay1 R `Module .Th'e FRM-1 Addressable ReMEA- - .=-- Permit#2020 lay Module provides the system with a dry-contact output for 457-99-E APPROVED activating a variety of auxiliary devices,such as fans,damp- ers, control equipment, etc. Addressability allows the dry contact to be activated, either manually or through panel programming, on a select basis. FlashScan®(U.S.Patent 5,539,389)is a new communi- cation protocol developed by NOTIFIER Engineering that 0 t greatly enhances the speed of communication between ana- log intelligent devices. Intelligent devices communicate in a grouped fashion. If one of the devices within the group has 9 0 new information, the panel CPU stops the group poll and 5878910 , concentrates on single points. The net effect is response ® 8 3 12 1 speed greater than five times that of other designs. 21 143 ® 7 TENS 0 15 2 FEATURES ® 6 5678 9 3 • Built-in type identification automatically identifies these 3 devices to the control panel. ■ 5 21 4 • Internal circuitry and relay powered directly by two-wire SLC ONES o B loop.The FCM module requires power(for horns,strobes, LOOP ADDRESS etc.),audio(for speakers),or a telephone riser(for hand- 0 sets). Internal relay feature available on FlashScan®sys- tems only. t • Integral LED"blinks"green each time a communication is received from the control panel and turns on in steady red LJ FCM-1 Module when activated. (See wiring diagram Fig. 5 for FRM-1) • LED blink may be deselected globally(affects all devices). FIRM may be programmed to operate dry contacts for door • High noise immunity (EMF/RFI). holders,Air Handling Unit shutdown, etc., and to reset four- The FCM may be used to switch 24-volt NAC power, au- wire smoke detector power. dio(up to 70.7 VRMS)or telephone. CONSTRUCTION r 1 • Wide viewing angle of LED. • SEMS screws with clamping plates for wiring ease. The face plate is made of off-white Noryl®. • Direct-dial entry of address 01–159 for FlashScan®,01 – Controls include two rotary switches for direct-dial entry of address (01-159). 99 on traditional systems. The FCM is configured for a single Class I (Style Y) or • Speaker, audible/visual, and telephone applications may Class A(Style Z) Notification Appliance Circuit. be wired for Class B or A(Style Y or Z). The FIRM provides two Form-C dry contacts that switch APPLICATIONS together. The FCM is used to switch 24 VDC audible/visual power, OPERATION high-level audio(speakers),or control telephone devices.The• Each FCM or FIRM uses one of 159 possible module ad- FlashScan@ is a registered trademark of NOTIFIER.Noryl®is a dresses on a SLC loop. It responds to regular polls from the registered trademark of GE Plastics,a subsidiary of General Elec- control panel and reports its type and status, including the t tric Company. open/normal/short status Of its Notification Appliance Circuit NOTIFIER®is a Honeywell company. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes.we try to keep our '�O �O®� product information up-to-date and accurate.we cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without'notice. For more information.contact NOTIFIER. Phone:(203)484-7161 FAX:(203)484-7118 ENGINEERING&MANUFACTURING N OT F 1 E Rm 12 Clintonville Road,Northford,Connecticut 06472 QUALITY SYSTEMS DN-6724•04:05104 — Page 1 of 4 I r (NAC).The LED blinks with each poll received.On command, RELAY CONTACT RATINGS I it activates its internal relay. The FCM supervises Class B for both FCM and FAM models (Style Y)or Class A(Style Z) notification or control circuits. Upon code command from the panel, the-FCM will discon- Load Description Application Ma>amUm Current nect the supervision and connect the external power supply Voltage Rating in the proper polarity across the load device.The disconnec- Resistive Non-Coded 30 VDC 3.0 A tion of the supervision provides a*positive indication to the Resistive Coded 30 VDC 2.0 A r panel that the control relay actually.turned ON.The external Resistive Non--Coded 110'VDC 0.9 A power supply is always relay isolated from the communica- tion loop so that a trouble condition on the external.power Resistive Non-Coded 125 VAC 0.9 A supply will never interfere with the rest of the system. I Inductive(L/R='5 ms) Coded 30 VDC 0.5 A Rotary switches set a unique address for each module.The Inductive(L/R=2 ms) Coded 30 VDC 1.0 A address may be set before or after mounting. The built-in TYPE`CODE (not settable) will identify the module to the Inductive(PF=0:35) Non-Coded 125 VAC 0.5 A control panel,so as to differentiate between a module and a PRODUCT LINE INFORMATION 6724rate.tbi sensor address. t f'FCM-1 r Intelligent Addressable Control Module. CSPECIFICATIONSFCM_ pFRM-1'� Intelligent Addressable Relay Module. Normal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. tA21 3-20 Capacitor, required for Class A(Style Z)opera- Maximum current draw: 6.5 mA(LED on). I tion of speakers. Average operating current:350 NA direct poll(CLIP mode), SMB500 Optional Surface-Mount Backbox. 375 pA group poll (FlashScan®mode)with LED flashing. CB500 Control Module Barrier — required by UL for External supply voltage (between Terminals T3 and T4): separating power-limited and non-power limited maximum 80 volts (RMS or DC). I wiring in the same junction box as FCM-1. Drain on external supply: 2 mA maximum (using internal EOL relay). i EOL resistance: 47K ohms. ' Temperature range: 32'F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C). Humidity range: 16%to 93% non-condensing. �. r Dimensions: 4.5" (114.3 mm) high x 4" (101.6 mm)wide x 1.25"(31.75 mm)deep.Mounts to a 4"(101.6 mm)square x 2.125" (53.975 mm)deep box. o� SPECIFICATIONS' for FAM'_.,." Normal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. Maximum current draw: 6.5 mA(LED on). 1 Average operating current:230 pA direct poll(CLIP mode), 255 pA group poll (FlashScan®mode)with LED flashing. EOL resistance: not used. _ "Temperature range: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C). Humidity range: 10% to 93% non-condensing. Dimensions: 4.5" (114.3 mm) high,x 4"(101.6 mm)wide x 1.25"(31.75 mm)deep.Mounts to a 4",(101.6 mm)square x L �\ 2.125" (53.975 mm)deep box. CB500 MOUNTING DIAGRAMS 00 _ I ,3 Note C8500 Module Barrier' \\ i ,,w� :--,� ,+, I � which creates isolated quadrant ® `� I� / 0� ISOLATED p 0 QUADRANT Page 2 of 4 — DN-6724•04/05x04 The,Face Plate WIRING DIAGRAMS 00 V The following wiring diagrams are provided: 1) FCM-1:Typical notification appliance circuit configuration,NFPA Style Y. 2) FCM-1:Typical fault-tolerant notification appliance circuit con- figuration, NFPA Style Z. 3) FCM-1: Typical wiring for speaker supervision and switching, NFPA Style Y. 4) FCM-1:Typical fault-tolerant wiring for speaker supervision and _ switching, NFPA Style Z. CAUTION 5) FIRM-11: Relay module wiring diagram. DE-ENERGIZE UNIT PRIOR TO SERVICING ' Fig. 1 FCM-1: Typical notification appliance circuit configuration, NFPA Style Y. • Connect modules to Listed compatible NOTIFIER control panels only. All wiring shown is supervised and power,limited • polarities are shown in alarm. Communication Line 32 VDC max. Module P (_) Refer to panel documentation for TO Next type of cable required. (_) FROM Panel Device ( ) (+) or Previous CONTROL Device MODULE � 24 VDC Circuit 47K EOL —_ -::— DO NOT LOOP wire 1 ;9 01 on terminals 3&4. Resistor (—) Break wire to provide ELR-47K S t + (—) (—) 7�N5 2 supervision of connections. (' 5 4 (+) 24 VDC LOON ONES ADDRESS POWER SUPPLY (+) (+) Power Supply: Isolated,regulated, UL listed power-limited EOL Relay TO NEXT control module or EOL Relay. per NFPA 70. shown ONE RELAY REQUIRED for each circuit. Listed for fire protection energized Some control panels have the RELAY BUILT IN 3 24 VDC coil and do not require external wiring, with battery backup. r A77-7168 Refer to the NOTIFIER manual. ♦ Fig. 2 FCM-1: Typical fault-tolerant notification appliance circuit configuration, NFPA Style Z. # Connect modules to Listed compatible NOTIFIER control panels only. • All wiring shown is supervised and power limited. Communication Line 32 VDC max.. • Module polarities are shown in alarm, (_) Refer to panel documentation for TO Next type of cable required. ' Device (+) 00 (—) FROM Panel or Previous �L ,CONTROL __ (+) Device EOL Resistor (; ; MODULE \, is internal at ; 24 VDC Circuit terminals 8&9 ( _ --- DO NOT LOOP wire Mg Oil _._.11 on terminals 3&4. g � 1 i_ (-1 Break wire to provide a (+) supervision of connections. " 6 31'c 5 ,I 4,r (+) 24 VDC c ONES — POWER .W.Al ADDRESS ,I �J ✓ �~ I SUPPLY (+) —�(+) \ J l Power Supply: Isolated regulated; ulated; UL listed power- limited EOL Relay TO NEXT control module or EOL Relay. per NFPA 70. shown ONE RELAY REQUIRED for each circuit. energized Some control panels have the RELAY BUILT IN Listed for fire protection 24 VDC coil and do not require external wiring. with battery backup, A77-7168 - Refer to the NOTIFIER manual. t DN-6724•04/05;04 — Page 3 of 4 { 6 , Fig. 3 FCM-1: Typical wiring for speaker supervision and switching, NFPA Style Y. • Connect modules to Listed compatible Refer to panel documentation NOTIFIER control panels only. Communication Line for type of cable required. TO Next •32 VDC max. (_) FROM Panel • All wiring shown is supervised. Device (+) + or Previous • Wires must be supervised per NFPA. CONTROL _l. ( ) Device • Module polarities are shown in alarm. �' MODULE Audio Circuit DO NOT LOOP wire ; ; on terminals 3&4. 47K EOL 9 - Break wire to ensure Resistor �.8 } 1 1 + supervision of connections. ELR 47K F i7.RNs 2� (-) r 6 �I 3' + AUDIO AMPLIFIER V 5 aaeS 4 70.7 VRMS max. I LOOP ADD1ESS; Use only models AA-30, AA-100,or AA-120. (+) (+) a ( Amplifier must provide wiring supervision per NFPA. TO Next , Speaker Switching Circuit: NFPA STYLE W Control Module , SUPERVISION Speakers must be listed for fire protection. Last module must return Refer to the Relay Contact Rating table for maximum load. wires for supervision. 6724-3—f i Fig. 4 FCM-1: Typical fault-tolerant wiring for speaker supervision and switching, NFPA Style Z. • Connect modules to Listed compatible NOTIFIER control panels only. • All wiring shown is supervised. Refer to panel documentation • Wires must be supervised per NFPA. (_) Communication Line for type of cable required. • Module polarities are shown in alarm. TO Next 32 VDC max.Device (+) (-) FROM Pane! (+) or Previous' CC CONTROL Device EOL Resistor is internal at terminals 8&9. MODULE Audio Circuit Bypass Capacitors: A2143-20,100 pf, 16 V,non-polarized,<10 pA leakage. ° DO NOT LOOP wire • _, t i9 0 0 , on terminals 3&4. - - Break wire to ensure 8 C 1 + supervision of connections. 16 (o 31 '(+) AUDIO AMPLIFIER "LS oaEss! 70.7 VRMS max. Looe .� !� , Use only models AA-30, v r AA-100,or AA-120, Amplifier must provide I TO Newiring supervision per NFPA. xt "Speaker Switching Circuit: NFPA STYLE X Control Module — SUPERVISION Speakers must be listed for fire protection. Last module must return 6724-4.—f Refer to the Relay Contact Rating table for maximum load. wires for supervision. NOTE regarding AUDIO AMPLIFIER in Figures 3&4 above: 1) Audio circuit wiring must be twisted-pair as a minimum:See NOTIFIER installation manual for detailed information. TO Next I ,�+f f W r�I f� r� I I� rf� r�I� rte` (-) FROM Panel .-� r f f 'Device (+) F32 I0� (+) or Previous Device ---`1RELAY unication Line MODULE _ maximum. panel documentation of cable required. RELAY COMMON 2 9 0 [ .] j (_) NORMALLY CLOSED 2 8 1 (+ (+) , Fig. 5 NORMALLY OPEN 2 Fj+ 7 2 RELAY COMMON 1 6 3 FRM-1: Relay module NORMALLY CLOSED 1 `'' �- --�( wiring diagram. 5 4 � � NORMALLY OPEN 1 • Connect modules to Listed LOOP O ADDRESS -4 compatible NOTIFIER control C O 0 panels only. Module does NOT supervise controlled circuits. Page 4 of 4 - DN-6724•04105,04 d . . i JNSTALLATION-AND_INAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS„ 1 ONCiTIFIER o 'r by Honeywell y 12 Clintonville Road ��pp Northford,CT 06472-1653 (I RM-LR6Iay,,=ControI MOdiU1 "�; Phone:203.484.7161 SPECIFICATIONS I Normal Operating Voltage: 15 to.32 VDC, Maximum Current Draw: 6.5 mA(LED on) a, { Average Operating Current: 2301tA direct poll;255pA group poll EOL Resistance: Not used Temperature Range: 327 to 120'F(0°C to 49°C) Humidity: 10%to 93% Non-condensing Dimensions: 4'/2"H x 4"W x 11/4"D(Mounts to a 4"square by 21/8"deep box.) Accessories:• SMB500 Electrical Box;CB500 Barrier BEFORE INSTALLING '' MOUNTING This information is included as a quick reference installation guide.Refer to The FRM-1 mounts directly to 4-inch square electrical boxes(see Figure 2A). the appropriate Notifier control panel installation manual for detailed system The box must have a minimum depth of 21/8 inches.Surface mounted electri- information:If the modules will be installed in an existing operational sys- cal boxes(SMB500)are available from Notifier. tem,inform the operator and local authority that the system will be tempo- FIGURE 2A.MODULE MOUNTING FIGURE 2B: 4 rarily out of service.Disconnect power to the control panel before installing WITH BARRIER: the modules. NOTICE:This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. ® 4 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ® e The FRM-1 Relay Control Module is intended for use in intelligent,two-wire systems where the individual address of each module is selected using the built-in rotary switches.It allows a compatible control panel to switch discrete - �f\� contacts by code command. The relay contains two isolated sets of Form-C contacts,which operate as'a DPDT switch and are rated'in accordance withG�' the table in the manual.Circuit connections to the relay contacts are not su- pervised by the module. The module als6 has a panel controlled LED indi- cator. This module can be used to replace a CMX-2 module that has been configured for Form-C operation. COMPATIBILITY REQUIREMENTS W e r To ensure proper operation,this module shall be connected to a compatible Notifier system control panel(list available from Notifier). FIGURE 1.CONTROLS AND INDICATORS:' TOP o, E) 0 ® QO Til a ® 0 T10 T1 Q T9 T2 C1070-00 T8 T3 WIRING i NOTE:All wiring must conform to applicable local codes,ordinances,and reg- T7 7 8 9 7 6 9 * T ulations. When using control modules in nonpower limited applications,the 6 f0 6 CB500 Module Barrier must be used to meet UL requirements for the separa- T6 4 n 4 TS tion of power-limited and nonpower-limited terminals and wiring.The barrier a; 3 12 3 must be inserted into a 4" x 4" x 21/8"junction box,and the control module 21 016 21 0 must be placed into the barrier and attached to the junction box(Figure 2A). o TENS 9 DNES O The power-limited wiring must be placed into the isolated quadrant of the �O (91:1 1. barrier(Figure 2B). 1. Install module wiring in accordance with the job drawings and appropri- LOOP ADDRE ate wiring diagrams. 2. Set the address on the module per job drawings. 3. Secure module' to electrical box(supplied by installer),see Figure 2A. C1071-00 NO-460-006 1 156-3502-001 RELAY CONTACT RATINGS: y d CURRENT RATING - MAXIMUM VOLTAGE LOAD DESCRIPTION APPLICATION 3 A 30 VDC Resistive Non-coded 2 A 30 VDC Resistive Coded .9 A 110 VDC Resistive Non-coded .9 A 125 VDC Resistive Non-coded w, ..5 A 30 VDC Inductive UR=5ms Coded 1 A 30 VDC Inductive UR=2ms' Coded .3 A 125 VAC Inductive(PF=.35) Non-coded 1.5 A 25 VAC Inductive PF=.35 Non-coded .7 A 70.7 VAC Inductive(PF=.35) Non-coded 2 A 25 VAC Inductive(PF=.35) Non-coded AWARNING All relay switch contacts are shipped in the standby state(open)state,but may have transferred to the activated(closed)state during shipping.To ensure that the switch contacts are in their correct state,modules must be made to communicate with the panel before connecting circuits controlled by the module. FIGURE 3.RELAY MODULE WIRING DIAGRAM: s CONNECT MODULES TO LISTED COMPATIBLE CONTROL PANELS ONLY TO NEXT FROM PANEL OR DEVICE + + PREVIOUS DEVICE CONTROL SIGNAL LINE CIRCUIT(SLC) MODULE 32 VDC MAX. TWISTED PAIR 1 0 O IS RECOMMENDED e o RELAY COMMON 2 n (+){ IF ANit'WIhING TO TERMINALS 4—10 IS NONPOWER NORMALLY CLOSED 2 LIMITED,THE CB500 BARRIER IS REQUIRED.THE CB500 NORMALLY OPEN 2INCLUDES A NONPOWER LIMITED LABEL,WHICH MUST RELAY COMMON 1 r UNUSED BE PLACED OVER THE POWER LIMITED TERMINAL NORMALLY CLOSED 1 NORMALLY OPEN'1 ' INFORMATION ON THE NAMEPLATE LABEL. MODULE DOES NOT SUPERVISE CONTROLLED CIRCUITS 'NOTE:ANY FAULT IN THE POWER SUPPLY IS LIMITED TO THAT ZONE AND DOES NOT RESULT IN A FAULT IN A SEPARATE ZONE. C0946-00 a x or y ' e , t NO-460-006 2 156-3502-001 02008 Notifier l Figure S.Typical wiring for speaker supervision and switching,NEPA Style Y: g, J ° SIGNAL LINE CIRCUIT(SLC) WIRES MAST BE SUPERVISED ISED PER NFPA � 32 VDC MAX. ALL WIRING SHOWN IS SUPERVISED. TWISTED PAIR CONNECT MODULES TO LISTED COMPATIBLE IS RECOMMENDED NOTIFIER CONTROL PANELS ONLY _ FCM-1 Supervised.Control Module D _ EVI T - FROM PANELOR DEVICE ' PREVIOUS DEVICE ;Installation And Maintenance.Instruction$ CONTROL Specifications SPEAKERS AY CO BE LISTED F08 FIRE PROTECTION.REFER AUDIO CIRCUIT TO THE RELAY CONTACT iUTMM.TABLE FORMMIMUM LOAD. 0 p D Q DO NOT LOOP WIRE AROUND TERMINALS + Normal Operating Voltage: 15 to 32 VDC 3S4 BREAKW ETOEN RE t-I SUPENVISION coNNEc ID Ns. Maximum Current Draw: 6.5 mA(LED on) 4]KEOL I. AUDIO AMPLIFIER ,TD.TVrmsMAX Average Operating Current: 375pA(LED flashing-in group poll mode)350pA(LED of flashing-in direct poll RESISTOR _ USE ONLY MODELSAN.TU,.1000RPA-12G.AMPLIFlER mode) ` ELFLJIN Rl 11 Q O O Q SUPERWSN)N MUST PROVIDE WIRING SUPERVISION PER NFPA 485µA Max.(LED(lashing,NAC shorted) AUDIO CIRCUIT WIRING MUST BE TWISTED PAIR AS A MINIMUM SEENOTIFIER INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR DETAILED INFORMATION. Maximum NAC Line Loss: 4 VDC «� External.Supply Voltage: (between Terminals T3 and T4) ALLTERMINALMRINGISPOWERUMITED.,< Maximum(NAC): Regulated 24 VDC MODULE POLARITIESARE TONEXTCONTROL AIOOl1lE SNOWNINALARM LAST MODULE MUST RETURN Maximum(Speakers): 70.7 V RMS,50 W WIRES FOR SUPERVISION Drain on External SuPPIY 1.7 mA Maximum-using 24 VDC suPPIY.2.2 mA Maximum using 80 VRMS supply Max NAC Current Ratings: For class B wiring system,the current rating is 3A 1F c.7-1 For class A wiring system,the current rating is 2A Temperature Range: 32°F to 120'F(O'C to 49°C) Humidity: 10%to 93%Non-condensing` Dimensions: 41/2"H x 4-W x 11/4"D(Mounts to a 4-square by 21/8-deep box.) Accessories: SMB500 Electrical Box;CB500 Barrier Figure 6.Typical fault tolerant wiring for speaker supervision and switching,NFPA Style Z: Before Installing This information is included as a quick reference installation guide. Refer to the control panel installation manual for detailed system information.If the modules will be installed in an existing operational system,inform the operator and SIGNAL LINE CIRCUIT(SLC) WIRES MUST BE SUPERVISED PER NFPA local authority that the system will be temporarily out of service.Disconnect power to the control panel before installing 32 VDC MAX. the modules. ALL WIRING SHOWN IS SUPERVISED. TWISTED PAIR IS RECOMMENDED CONNECT MODULES TO USTEO COMPATIBLE \ NOTIFIER CONTROL PANELS ONLY NOTICE:This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. TO NEXT 'J - FROM PANEL OR General Description DEVICE - PREVIOUS DEVICE FCM-I Supervised Control Modules are intended for use in intelligent,two-wire systems,where the individual address of CONTROL each module is selected using the built-in rotary switches.This module is used to switch an external power supply,which SPEANERSMUST BUSTED FOR FIRE FORM IMU.REFER AUDIOCIRCUR TO THE RELAY CONTACT RATING TABLE FOR MA%IMUM LOAD. O O O Q DO NOT LOOP VARE AROUND TERMINALS can be a DC power supply or an audio amplifier(up to 80 VRMS),to notification appliances.It also supervises the wiring • 0 1IA 3&4.BREAKWL9ETOENSURE to the connected loads and reports their status to the panel as NORMAL,OPEN,or SHORT CIRCUIT.The FCM-1 has two 41 K EOL SUPERVISION OF CONNECTIONS, RESISTOR 1-1 1-1 MODAUDELS AA-30,FA,]0.]R MAX. pairs of output termination points available for fault-tolerant wiring and a panel-controlled LED indicator.This module can IS INTERNAL � USE ONLYMODELSAA-30,M1000RM420.AMPUFlER be used to replace a CMX-2 module that has been configured for supervised wiring operation. AT TENMINALS Q O O Q MUST PRO VIDE WIRING SUPERVISION PER NFPA. S.09 SUPERVISION Compatibility Requirements �A 1�1 AUDIOTIFIERWIRINGMUSTBETWISTED PAIR AS ILA INFORMATION. BYPASS CPPACITORS:NON SEE NOTIFIER INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR DETAILED INFORMATION. TO ensure proper OperdllOil,this module shall be connected to a compatible Notifier system control panels only(list avail- A2143 NONPOIMIZED '<10PALEAKAGE ALLTERMINAL WRING IS POWER LIMITED. able from Notifier). TO NEXT CONTROL MODULE Mounting MODULE POLARITIES ARE LAST MODULE MUST RETURN SHOWN IN ALARM WIRES FOR SUPERVISION The FCM-1 mounts directly to 4"square electrical boxes(see Figure 2A).The box must have a minimum depth of 2'/N'. Surface mounted electrical boxes(SMB500)are available. coaeo-o1 All relay switch contacts are shipped in the standby state(open)state,but may have transferred to the activated(closed) state during shipping.7b ensure that the switch contacts are in their correct state,modules must be made to communicate with the panel before connecting circuits controlled by the module. N5(X1-46-(x/ 4 156.1169-013 NSOO-46-00 I 156-1169-013 0 2006 Notifier Notifier,12 Clintonville Rd.,Norlhford,Cr 06472 Wiring+ Figure 3.Typical notification appliance circuit configuration,NFPA Style Y: NOTE:All wiring must conform to applicable local codes,ordinances,and regulations.When using control modules in nonpower limited applications,the CB500 Module Barrier must be used to meet UL requirements for the separation of power-limited and nonpower-limited terminals and wiring:The barrier must be inserted into a 4" x 4" x 21/8"junction CONNECT MODULES TO LASTED COMPATIBLE SIGNAL UNE CIRCUIT(SLC) box,and the control module must be placed into the barrier and attached to the junction box(Figure 2A).The power- NCTMO CONTROL TOLSTED CONLY 32V�MAX ALL WIPING SHOWN IS SUPERVISED AND POWER LINKED limited wiring must be placed into the isolated quadrant of the module barrier(Figure 2B). TWISTED PAIR TO NEXT 1 1.Install module wiring in accordance with the job drawings and appropriate wiring diagrams. IS RECOMMENDED NA�� FROM PANEL OR 2.Set the address on the module per job drawings. DEVICE PREVIOUS DEVICE Now:Some panels support extended addressing.In order to set the module above address 99 on compatible systems, CONTROL carefully remove the stop on the upper rotary switch with thumb in the direction shown in Figure IA. MODULE 24 VDC CIRCUIT 3.Secure module to electrical box(supplied by installer),as shown in Figure 2A. 00 O Q DO NOT LOOP WIRE ON TERMINALS3 6 4.BREAK WIRE RUN TO PROVIDE IMPORTANT:When using the FCM-1 for fire fighter telephone applications,remove Jumper(J1)and discard.The Jumper MODULE POLARITIES ARE • o SUPERVISION OF CONNECTIONS. is located on thSHOWN IN ALARMe back under the product label as shown in Figure t6.The module does not provide ring back when used r 11 i 24 voc POWER SUPPLY as a firefighter telephone circuit. 47K EOL s ISOLATED,REGUATED,POWER RE915TOfl r LIMITED PER NFPA70. Figure 1A.Removing rotary switch stop: Figure 1111.Jumper location:' ELR47Kv LISTED FOR FIRE PROTECTION WITH Y° OO wOO BATTERY BACKUP. () (+) IL LASTED EOL RELAY -' SHOWN ENERGIZED TO NEXT CONTROL MODULE OR END-OF-LINE-RELAY.' Q tt 24 VDC COILO O EIXA-f ONE CONELAY ROLP NE FOREACHLAY BULO SOME CONTROL PANELS MAYE RELAY BULT IN PND DO NOT REDURE EXTERNAL WIRING.REFER TO c0az0u1 D NOTIFIER MANUAL.BACK OF712 10�sLABEL e]aMODULEE 5 z�°OO D Q 00 Figure 4.Typical fault tolerant notification appliance circuit configuration,NFPA Style M �nzi+iw wsaa0 J1 UNDER LABEL ALL WIRING SHOWN IS SUPERVISED SIGNAL LINE CIRCUIT(SLC) S AND POWER LIMITED 32 VDC MAX. CONNECT MODULES M LISTED COMPATIBLE TWISTED PAIR NOTIFIER CONTROL PANELS ONLY IS RECOMMENDED Figure 2A.Module mounting with harrier_: Flgure 26: TO NEXT DEVICE PREVIOUS DEVICE CONTROL MODULE 24 VDC CIRCUIT MODULE NNALARM ARE - O O_ O DO NOT LOOP WIRE ON TERMINALS o e 3 84,BREAK WIRE RUN TO PROVIDE .e A SUPERVISION OF CONNECTIONS. T r EOL RESISTORS H H I-I 24 VDC POWER suwLr IMERNALAT . ISOLATED,REGULATED,POWER TERMINALS 889 +' UMREDPFA NFPA70. • 9s • O e, '90 D5TEDFOR FIRE PROTECTION WITH ISI I,IU BATTERYBACKUP, UL LISTED EOL RELAY _ SHOWN ENERGIZED TO NEXT CONTROL MODULE OR ENDOF-NE-RELAY.24VDC COIL ONE RELAY REOUIAED FOR EACH CIRCUIT. + C-OLR-1 SOME TTROL PANELS HAVE DO NOT REQUIRE EXTERNAL WIRI GYP BUILT D ER TO I .e ISOLATED NOTIFIER MANUAL I I F QUADRANT r •• c0azwi � r wzi9 m con7u0 N500-4600 2 1561169-013 N500-46-00 3 156-1169-013 i Open-area Smoke Imaging Detection Features (OSID)by Xtralis is a new innovation in projected beam smoke detection ¢,•� 4 Maximum`ddtection-range'of A 150 m(492 ft)f6Fthe:OS1:10 ; technology.By using advanced dual „^•-=-- C - wavelength projected beams and Status LEDs for Fire,Trouble and Power optical imaging technology for early High false alarm immunity warning smoke detection,OSID Dust and intrusive solid object rejection provides a low-cost, reliable and easy-to-install solution that overcomes t J Easy alignment with large adjustment typical beam detection issues such as and viewing angles false alarm incidents and alignment No need for precise alignment difficulties. Tolerant of alignment drift Unique Detection Technology Automatic commisioning in under tl gy ten minutes The OSID system measures the level of smoke entering beams of light projected over Simple DIP switch configuration an area of protection.A single OSID Imager can detect up to seven Emitters to provide a wide coverage area.Two innovations in smoke detection technology have been Dual wavelength LED-based smoke detection developed for the revolutionary OSID smoke detector: • Simple and easy maintenance Dual Wavelength Particle Detection requirements The beam projected from each Emitter contains a unique sequence of ultraviolet(UV) Conventional alarm interface for and infrared(IR)pulses that are synchronised with the Imager and enable the rejection straightforward fire system integration of any unwanted light sources. Three selectable alarm thresholds By using two wavelengths of light to detect particles,the system is able to distinguish between particle sizes.The shorter UV wavelength interacts strongly with both small and large particles while the longer IR wavelength is affected only by larger particles. Listings/Approvals Dual wavelength path loss measurements therefore enable the detector to provide UL repeatable smoke obscuration measurements,while rejecting the presence of dust particles or solid intruding objects. ULC Optical Imaging with a CMOS Imaging Chip Major Agency Approvals pending An optical imaging array in the OSID Imager provides the detector with a wide viewing angle to locate and track multiple Emitters.Consequently,the system can tolerate a much less precise installation and can compensate for the drift caused by natural shifts in building structures. Optical filtering, high-speed image acquisition and intelligent software algorithms also enable the OSID system to provide new levels of stability and sensitivity with greater immunity to high level lighting variability. Operation Status information(Fire Alarm,Trouble and Power)is communicated through the Imager via Status LEDs,dedicated Trouble and Alarm relays,and the Remote Indicator interface.Specific Trouble(Fault)conditions are identified through coded flashes of the Trouble LED. An internal heating option is also provided on the Imager to prevent condensation on the optical surface,and a reset input enables an external signal to reset the device. fSirnp jnstallation and,Maintenance The OSID system consists of upJo sevemEmitters!fo`r the 45•and 90°Imager units, located along the perimeter of the protected area?and*an lrnager-mounted opposite. Each component can be mounted directly to,the surface or can be secured with the supplied mounting brackets.Battery powered Emitters with up to five years battery life are also available to reduce installation time and cost. y Ao� xtrahs, t i. l i 1 On the Imager,a termination card provides all field wiring terminals,and DIP switches Specifications enable the user to configure the detector for particular applications. Supply Voltage } Alignment of the Emitter is simply achieved using a laser alignment tool to rotate the 20 to 30 VDC(24 VDC nominal) optical spheres until the laser beam projected from the alignment tool is close to the Imager Current Consumption ( Imager. Nominal(at 24 VDC): The Imager is aligned in a similar way so that its Field of View(FOV)encompasses 4mA(1 Emitter) all Emitters.A Trouble or Fault will be indicated if an Emitter is missing or outside the 7mA(7 Emitters) Imager field of view. Peak(at 24 VDC)during training The OSID system is highly tolerant to dust and dirt and requires'little maintenance in mode:27mA practice. Preventative maintenance is limited to occasionally cleaning the optical faces Emitter Current Consumption of the detector components. Wired Version(at 24 VDC):•350pA Configuration Options Battery Version: OSID systems may be configured to suit a range of detection spaces by selecting the Built-in 5 Year Battery number of Emitters and type of Imager.Each type of Imager differs by the lens used in Field Wiring the unit,which determines the field of view and range of the system: Cable Guage 0.2-4mM2(26-12 AWG) Field of View tediton I nge MSX Number Alarm Threshold Levels: Imager,, Standard Power High Power Horizontal varaeal Emiatters Low-Highest sensitivity/earliest Min Max Min Max r alarm: 20%(0.97 dB) 10° 7° 4° 30 in(98 ft) 150 m(492 ft) 1 Medium-Medium sensitivity: 45° 38° 19° 11 m(36 ft)_X60 m(197 ft)- ,.22 m(72 ft),_ _120m(393=ft)- ,7^- .35%(1.87 dB) s0° - eo° 48° 6 m(20 ft) °•34 m(111 ft) 12 m(39 ft) ••66 m(223 it) 7 High-Lowest sensitivity/maximum immunity to nuisance smoke Maximum Distances measured for the Center Field of View of the Imager.For more details on distances for the conditions:•50%(3.01 dB) Imager,see the OSID Product Guide. Adjustment Angle 160°(horizontal) Emitter/=,Imager Dimensions 115°(vertical) Maximum Misalignment Angle t2e t uxa,yl� Dimensions(WHD) Emitter/Imager: 4 198mmx130mmx 96 mm (7.80 in.x 5.12 in.x3.78 in.) Operating Conditions Temperature: 0'C to 39 eC(32°F to 103°F) Tested to: -10eCto55°C(14°F to 131 °F) Humidity: 10 to 95%RH(non-condensing) Please consult your Xtralis office for Ordering Codes operation outside these parameters. 0SI-10 Imager-7"coverage OSE-SP Emitter-Standard Power IP Rating ¢. jOSI-45_ Imager-38_°coverage OSE-SPW Emitter-Standard Power,Wired IP 44 for Electronics OSI-90— —Imager-80°coverage r OSE-HPW Emitter-High Power,Wired IP 66 for Optics Enclosure OSID-INST OSID Installation Kit Status LEDs Fire Alarm(Red) Trouble/Power(Bi-color Yellow/ Green) www.xtralis.com The'Americas+1 781 740 2223 Asia+852 2916 8894 Australia and New Zealand+61 3 9936 7000 Europe,Middle East&Africa+44 1442 242 330 i, The cbnte'its of this do met ore provided on an' "ba,s No ti i e - Y wre, pl'.d'is mad as tb tee Completeness 3-aacv or ehab:hry of the contents of tris docu: I... 31 tife,b er reserves the r ght.o change designs or spec f';a.lor5 La wdhout obhptibn and wfthos:t Nrther nohca.Except as rharn•:s branded.all evatrenbes.��xpee or implied,Including whe=. :tt I:m:tatian any ' ^pl:ed arra. ^:esu r a b 1^ d t. .pr a rt c la p-p s ar 'p ly t d d This d c m inchidiiis registered a b g.t d em k II-hidernarks nosplayed are the t d a a.h es eC•e owners. jj"��i,t e<.ul s ifthis I does not b s ut .r" t a i r y 1h 5 t 'al a 1 rr k d o lab I b tf This d.cone..ssuba t..o�v:aht b.adb/Y:rrls AGt%,:alis 7..agle_not to obV,com run ca.x to'hi.p,bli.iid pt,d,tb..e ra sfar JJJ ,ioH m Vy or,ucli5h any content o`this doc:i:en+•.v:t^out the express prc.n^:ten con gent of'lira.-s. Doc.No.'5211 !4 fart No.5E5?5 i T I F I C } T 1 ! SelectableSPECTRa,Admert 1Strobe 1 Horn/Strobes Models Available fi d l Strobes Red White S1224MC S1224MCW S1224MCP S1224MCPW S1224MCK S1224MCSP Horn/Strobes Red White P1224MC P1224MCW P1224MCP P1224MCPW P1224MCK l P1224MCSP Horns Red White H12/24 H12/24W H12/24K Product Overview Operates on either 12V or 24V SpectrAlert Selectable Output Horns, Strobes, and Horn/Strobes offer enhanced fea- Widest range of candela options: tures that include the widest range of candela options available and the capability to 12V. 15 and 15/75 candela recognize and self-adjust for either 12 or 24 volt operation. With an overall feature 24V. 151. 15/75, 30, 75, 110 candela set that combines performance, installation ease, flexibility, and a consistent, aesthetically pleasing appearance,the SpectrAlert Selectable Output devices Easy candela selection provide both the innovation and efficiency synonymous with the SpectrAlert name. Lower current draw Performance. SpectrAlert selectable output wall-mount horns,strobes,and horn/strobes Easy IIP switch selection for horn offer key performance features long associated with the SpectrAlert name.The select- options able candela strobes and horn/strobes offer average current draws that are not only lower than conventional fixed-candela SpectrAlert products,but also lower than similar Easy mounting with QuiekClickTM selectable candela products. By consuming less current,the ability to connect even more Synchronizable with MDL devices per loop is possible,resulting in a lower installed cost. Sync•CireuitTM module Installation. SpectrAlert selectable output horns,strobes,and horn/strobes offer the Meets UL1971. NFPA72. and ADA same installation-friendly features synonymous with the SpectrAlert name,such as the signaling requirements option of 2-and 4-wire operation;the ability to use standard size backboxes with no All strobe and horn/strobe models incorporate a encroachment into the box;and universal mounting incorporating the labor-saving new patent-pending voltage booster design that QuickClick`"feature. Such labor-savings features make wire connections simple and fast, has a more consistent flash bulb voltage over further reducing installed cost. the range of candela selections. The benefit to Flexibility. SpectrAlert selectable output strobes and horn/strobes offer the broadest the customer is a high quality strobe device. range of candela options. In addition,the selectable output strobes and horn/strobes can operate on either 12V or 24V,with no setting required;the device recognizes and self-adjusts to the correct current automatically.Temporal 3 or Continuous tone options V� ULC continue to be available, in either an Electromechanical or 3kHz pattern. LISTED CS549V602NK17954 Aesthetics. SpectrAlert selectable output horns,strobes, and horn/strobes incorporate SSS12 CS549V702NK13751 54011 the same stylish,low profile design of the conventional SpectrAlert products,for a con- MEA sistent and aesthetically pleasing appearance across the entire product line. FM approved 11251209:222 - 122-02-E 71351209:223 3014150 12602-E 1 Engineering Specifications General fire protective service. Horn/strobe shall be wired as a primary , SpectrAlert horns,strobes and horn/strobes shall be capable of signaling notification appliance and comply with the Americans mounting to a standard 4" x 4"x 11/2"back box or a single gang with Disabilities Act requirements for visible signaling appliances, 2" x 4" x V/e" back box using the universal mounting plate flashing at 1Hz over the strobe's entire operating voltage range. , included with each SpectrAlert product. Also, SpectrAlert prod- The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated ucts, when used in conjunction with the accessory Sync•Circuit lens/reflector system. The horn shall have two tone options,two Module, shall be powered from a non-coded power supply audibility options (at 24 volts) and the option to switch between ' and shall operate on 12 or 24 volts. 12 volt rated devices shall a temporal 3 pattern and a non-temporal continuous pattern. have an operating voltage range of 9-17.5 volts. 24-volt rated Strobes shall be powered independently of the sounder with the devices shall have an operating voltage range or 17-33 volts. removal of factory installed jumper wires.The horn on horn/ SpectrAlert products shall have an operating temperature of strobe models shall operate on a coded or non-coded power sup- 32° to 120°F and operate from a regulated DC or full wave ply(the strobe must be powered continuously). rectified, unfiltered power supply. Synchronization Module Strobe Module shall be a System Sensor SynceCircuit listed Strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert Model to UL 464 and shall be approved for fire protective service.The listed to UL 1971 and be approved for fire protective service. The module shall synchronize SpectrAlert strobes at 1Hz and horns strobe shall be wired as a primary signaling notification appliance at temporal 3. Also,the module shall silence the horns on horn/ and comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act require- strobe models,while operating the strobes,over a single pair of ments for visible signaling appliances,flashing at 1Hz over the wires.The module shall be capable of mounting to a 4"/16" x strobe's entire operating voltage range.The strobe light shall con- 411/16"x 21/8" back box and shall control two Style Y (class B) or sist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. one Style Z (class A) circuit. Module shall be capable of multiple zone synchronization by daisy chaining multiple modules together Horn/Strobe Combination and re-synchronizing each other along the chain.The module Horn/Strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert Model shall not operate on a coded power supply. listed to UL 1971 and UL 464 and shall be approved for Specifications Walk Test Weight, strobe and horn./strobe Operating voltage range* SpectrAlert horn/strobe and horn only 8.8 oz. 12V: 8-17.5V; 24V: 16-33V work on "walk tests" with time dura I~J1ol.arltirlg Operating voltage range* (with tions of 4 seconds or greater 4" x 4" x 11/2" or 2" x 4" x 17/8" Syrlc•Cirl:Uit module, MDl..I Input. Terminals standard boxes 12V: 9-17.5V; 24V: 17-33V 12 to 18 AWG Indoor Operating Ternmerature *Note for Strobes: Do not exceed; 1) Dimensions 32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C) 16-33 or 8-17.5 voltage range limit; Strobe and horn/strobe with universal 2) maximum number of 70 strobe lights�,Iy�Yrriur�, txlrrlidity plate o when connecting the MDL Sync module 5" x 55/8" x 215/16" 95/o as tested per UL464 with a maximum line impedance of 4 Strobe and horn/strobe with small ' eratin i 'empe,ature ohms per loop and; 3) maximum line footprint plate Weatherproof(horn and horn/strobes) impedance as required by the fire alarm 33/8" x 55/8" x 25/16" 327 to 150°F (0°C to 66°C) control manufacturer Horn with universal mounting plate (outdoor strobe only) u.S. F'ac:,lt Pi rl oers 5" x 55/8" x 15/16" —407 to 158°F (-40°C to 70°C) 5,593,569 Horn without mounting plate ULC Canadian Models 5,914,665 215/16" x 55/16" x 15/16" —40°C to 66°C 6,049,446 7.2 oz 12 or 24VDC and FWR unfiltered i f SpectrAlert Current Draw FWR Operating DC Operating Current- FWR Operating DC Operating I Current-Strobe Strobe Current-Horn Current-Horn i Horn Candela (mA RMS) (mA RMS) (mA RMS) mA RMS) Audibility,`? Series Setting 12V 24V 12V 24V 12V 24V 12V 24V (d8A) S1224MC--7 15 112 64 127 59__ Strobes 9,__••, Strobes 1 15/75 1 135 74 127 69- 30 , i 93 90 75 158 160 110 208 209 "P1224MCJ 15 st 112 64 127 59 45.7 57.5 44.4 57 75 Horn/Strobes) I15/75 1 135 74 127 -r 69 45.7 57.5 44.4 57 75' 30 93 90 57.5 57 75 75 158 160 57.5 57 ,.75 110 208 209 57.5 57 75 a HE 12%24 Horns 45.7 57.5 44.4 l 5 F 75 r i SpectrAlert Mounting and Operation 1 Candela Selections Selectable Hom Tones For strobe candela selection, adjust slide switch located on the Temporal Low Volume Electromechanical rear of the product while watching the viewing window on the 3000 Hz Interrupted side of the reflector. " High Volume Electromechanical Permissible Candela Settings 3000 Hz Interrupted Candela operating voRage Non-Temporal Low Volume Electromechanical Setting 12V 24V 3000 Hz Interrupted S15 15 OK OK High Volume Electromechanical 15/75 OK OK 3000 Hz Interrupted 30 OK 75 OK DIP Switch Operation Facto s Viewing Window A0133-00 110 OK OFF ON Default l DIP Switch l Low High o Temporal m Non Temporal o e 0 Electromech. 3000Hz C , Base(rear) 0 A0110-00 1 Typical weatherproof mounting with universal plate i Plate WBB #8-36 x 1/2"Flat Head ( Screw(4 total) m 0 A0120-00 ale Gasket Conduit Entrance Slot ' Locking Rib 5 Paper Liner 9 For Plate Gasket i t SpectrAlert Ordering Information Model . Description Model Description P122 C Selectable Output Horn/Strobe, 12/24 volt, red I(Rf2724—"�= Horn, 12/24 volt, red P1224MCW Selectable Output Horn/Strobe, 12/24 volt,white H12/24W Horn, 12/24 volt,white P1224MCP Selectable Output Horn/Strobe, 12/24 volt, red, H12/24K Horn, 12/24 volt, red,weatherproof plain housing Accessories e I P1224MCPW Selectable Output Horn/Strobe;12/24 volt, MDL Sync*Circuit Modtile, red white, plain housing P1224MCK Selectable Output Horn/Strobe, 12/24 volt, red, MDLW Sync-Circuit Module,white weatherproof MDLA Sync•Circuit Module, red, Canadian model P1224MCSP Selectable Output Horn/Strobe, 12/24 volt, red, MDLWA Sync•Circuit Module,white, Canadian model "FUEGO" housing - S-MP - Small Footprint Mounting Plate, red, for single- S�22AMC �'" Selectable Output Strobe, 12/24 volt, red gang back box S1224MCW Selectable Output Strobe, 12/24 volt,white S-MPW Small Footprint Mounting Plate,white,for si6gle- S1224MCP Selectable Output Strobe, 12/24 volt, red, plain gang back box housing BBS Surface Mount Back Box Skirt, red S1224MCPW Selectable Output Strobe, 12/24 volt,white, BBSW Surface Mount Back Box Skirt,white plain housing ' D-MP Universal Mounting Plate(replacement), red S1224MCK Selectable Output Strobe, 12/24 volt, red, D-MPW Universal Mounting Plate(replacement),white weatherproof r S1224MCSP Selectable Output Strobe, 12/24 volt, red, WBB Weatherproof Back Box "FUEGO" housing Notes s Agency Listings–Indoor models:UL,ULC,FM,CSFM,MEA.Weatherproof models:UL,CSFM(strobe only),MEA,ULC. All of these SpectrAlert products are designed for wall mount only.All weatherproof models must,use weatherproof back box model WBB.Installation of less than 75 candela strobes may be permissible under the equivalent facilitation clause of the ADAAG(Sec.2.2).However,it is the responsibility of the person or entity designing the fire alarm system to determine the acceptability of less than 75 candela strobes.All 15/75 candela strobes or horn% strobes are recommended for 20'x 20'rooms or less. t r r w e k a , a System Sensor Sales and Service System Sensor Headquarters System Sensor Canada System Sensor in China, System Sensor—Far East System Sensor—India 3825 Ohio Avenue Ph:905.812.0767 Ph:86.29.524.6253 Ph:85.22.191.9003 Ph:91.124.237.1770 x.2700 St.Charles,IL 60174 Fx:905.812.0771 Fx:86.29.524.6259., Fx:85.22.736.6580 Fx:91.124.237.3118 Ph:800/SENSOR2 System Sensor Europe System Sensor in Singapore System Sensor-Australia System Sensor—Russia Fx:630/377-6495 Ph:44.1403.891920 Ph:65.6273.2230 Ph:613.54.281.142 Ph7 70.95.937.7982 Documents-on-Demand Fx:44.1403.891921 Fx:65.6273.2610 Fx:613.54.281.172 Fx: 70.95.937.7983 t 800/736-7672 x3 www.systemsensor.com ©2004 System Sensor.The company reserves the right to change product specifications without notice. A05-0325-003.5/04•#1200 a e INSTALLATION—AND--MAINTENANCE.._INSTRUCTIONS�"' SYSTEM SpectrAlert_SeIW tabI COWput Strobes; ®, 1Horns and-_Horn• Strobes, �'� SENSOR For -- � d / — 3825"Ohio Avenue,St.Charles, [Ilinois 60174 For use with the following models: Strobes-12/24 volt: S1224MC,S]224MCW,S1224MCSP,S1224MCSPR',SI224MCP,S1224MCPW 1-800-SENSOR2,FAX:630-377-6497 Combo-12/24 volt: PI224MC,P1224MCW P1224MCSP,P1224MCSPW P1224MCP,P1224MCPWW www.Systemsensor.cottl Horns-1112/24,H12/24W Suffix"W"indicates white housing models.Suffix"SP"indicates"FUEGO"(Spanish word for"FIRE")lettering on housing. SPECT r Suffix"P"indicates plain housing(no lettering). iert I The Products to which this manual applies may be covered by one or more of the following U.S.Patent numbers:5,914,665:5,850,175;5,598.139;6,049,446;6.133,843;6,522,261;6,661,337;5,931,569;6,793.375;6;822,400;6.833,783;6,838,997 Specifications Automatic selection for 12 or 24 volt rated operation (DC or Full-Wave Rectified) Electrical 1 Horns, Strobes, and Horn/Strobes Voltages: Regulated 12 DC/FWR and Regulated 24 DC/FWR Operational Voltage Ranges: 12V=8-17.5 Volts; 24V=16-33 Volts Synchronous Applications with MDL Module: 12V=9-17.5 Volts; 24V=1.7-33 Volts Operational Humidity Range: 10-93% RH (non-condensing) NOTE:Horn units will operate on walk tests with on-time durations of.25 sec.or greater. t t Flash Rate: 1 flash per second Operating Temperature: 32° F to 120° F (0° C to 49° C) Selectable Light Outputs: All candelas are selectable via a manual slide switch. 12/24 Volt Applications: 15 or 15/75 candela 24 Volt Application: 30, 75, 110 candela 15/75 is listed at 15 candela per UL 1971 but will provide 75 candela on axis (straight ahead). 15, 30, 75, or 110 are rated for that candela. 1 Sound Output: Sound output levels are established at Underwriters Laboratories in their reverber- ant room. Always use the sound output specified as UL Reverberant Room when comparing products. Listings: UL 55512 (Strobe); UL S4011 (Combo) t Note for,Strobes: Do not exceed: 1) 8-17.5 or 16-33 voltage range limit; 2) maximum number of 70 strobe lights when connecting the MDL Sync module with a maximum line im- pedance of 4 ohms per loop and; 3) maximum line impedance as required by the fire alarm control manufacturer. ' The modeL;S1224111C,S1224MCW,51224MCSR S1224MCSPW S1224MCI?S.1224MCPW P.12 4MC,P1224MCW,P1224MCSR P122411CSPW,P1224ti1CP,and. P1224t41CPW incorporate a.patented voltage booster design t1w has a more consistent flush bulit voltage over the range of candela selections. The benefit to the customer is a high quality strobe device. General Description The SpectrAlert series notification appliances are designed to stalled atter July 1, 1996, must produce Temporal Coded Signals. r meet the requirements of most agencies governing these devices, Signals other than those used for evacuation purposes do not have including: NFPA, ADA, The National Fire Alarm Code, UL, ULC, to produce the Temporal Coded Signal.Temporal coding is accom- FM, CSFM, ,MEA. Also, check with your local Authoritv Having plished by interrupting a steady sound in the following manner: Jurisdiction for other codes or standards that may apply. The SpectrAlert series can be installed in systems using 1.2-or 24 ...,.. 're Sec Sec. VI Sec. 1/3 Sec. 'rz Sec. t"z Sec. Repeats volt panels having DC or full-wave rectified (FWR)power supplies. on on On off on Off The series can also be installed in systems requiring synchroniza- tion (module MDL or compatible equivalent required) or systems Power Supply Considerations that do not require synchronization (no moduile required). Panels typically supply DC filtered voltage or FWR (full-wave N(Yr10E-This manual Shall be left with the owner,user of this equipment. rectified) voltage. The system design engineer must calculate the Fire Alarm System Considerations number of units used in a zone based on the type of panel supply. Be certain the Sum of all the device currents do riot exceed the Temporal and Non-Temporal Coded Signals: current capability of the panel. Calculations are based on using The American National Standards Institute and the National Fire the device current found in the subsequent charts and Must be Alarm Code require that all horns used for building evacuation in- the current specified for the type of panel power supply used. t D 00 28 00 l 156-17,96-011 R t c r Wire Sizes Figure 1C: Horn Current Draw,Measurements(RMS)l The designer must be sure that the last device on the circuit has DC- FWR sufficient voltage,tb operate the device within its rated voltage. Selectable Horn Tones 12V 24V 12V 24V a When calculating the voltage available to the last device, it is nec- Temporal Low Electromechanical 15 23 13 23 essary to consider the voltage drop due to the resistance of the volume wire.The thicker the wire,the less the voltage drop.Generally,for 3000 Hz Interrupted 15 33 13 23 purposes of determining the wire size necessary for the system,it High Electromechanical 36 53 20 44 y. is best to consider all of the devices as"lumped"on the end of the Volume 3000 Hz Interrupted 43 57 21 40 supply circuit (simulates "worst case"). Non- Low Electromechanical 16 37 19 29 I Typical wire size resistance: Temporal Volume3000 Hz Interrupted 16 32 18 33 High Electromechanical 38 49 46 49 1.8 AWG solid:. Approximately 8 ohms/1,000 ft. Volume 3000 Hz Interrupted 44 56 42 58 16 A"TG solid: Approximately 5 ohms/1,000 ft. 14 AWG solid: Approximately 3 ohms/1,000 ft. NOTE: Regulated 12 VDC, max operating current 44.4 mA 12 AWG solid: Approximately 2 ohms/1,000 ft. Regulated 24 VDC,max operating current 57.0 mA Example: Assume you have 10 devices on a zone and each re- 12 V FWR, max operating current 45.7 mA quires 50 mA average and 2000 Ft. of 14 AWG wiring (total 24 V FWR, max operating current 57.5 mA length=outgoing +return). The voltage at the end of the loop is NOTE: 12VDC 2-wire horn/strobe current is shown in Figure ID. 0.050 amps per device x 10 devices x 3 ohms/1,000 ft. x 2000 ft 24VDC 2-wire horn/strobe current is shown in Figure 1E. Current =3 volts drop. draw for other horn/strobe power supplies can be calculated by NOTE: If class "A" wiring is installed, the wire length may be up adding the strobe current draw (Figure IA) for chosen candela set- to 4 times the single wire length in this calculation. ting to the horn current draw (Figure 1C) for chosen setting. The same number of devices using 12 AVdG wire will produce only 2 volts drop. The same devices using 18 AWG wire will produce Figure 1D: 12VDC Horn/Strobe Current Draw 8 volts drop. Consult your panel manufacturer's specifications, as Measurements(mA RMS) well as SpectrAlert's operating voltage range to determine accept- Temporal able voltage drop. Low Volume High Volume ` Figure 1A: Current Draw Measurements(RMS) Candela Electromechanical 3000 Hz Electromechanical 3000 Hz NOTE: All 'S' and 'P' models were only tested at the 8-11.5 and ming 16-33 Volt-FWR/DC limits. This does not include the 80% low- 15 111 111 112 112 end or 110% high-end voltage limits. 15/75 127 127' 126 129 1 It Non-Temporal Curielit DroDraw -1 15 113 112 114 115 FWR DC Operating Operating 15/75 128 128 130 134 Current Current Candela Strobe Strobe Setting 122 24V 12Figure 1E: 24VDC Horn/Strobe Current Draw is 112 64 1277 59 59 Measurements(mA RMS) ( 15J75—1135' 74 12769 • a 30 93 90 Temporal i 75 158 160 Low Volume t High Volume � 110 208 ' 209 .Candela Setting Eleetromechanlcal 3000 Hz Electromechanical 3000 Hz Figure 1B: Horn Sound Measurements(dBA): 15 71 70 73 75 Selectable Horn Tones 8-17.5V 16-33V 15/75 86 85 87 88 Temporal Low Electromechanical 67 75 30 99 98 100 100 Volume 3000 Hz Interrupted 68 75 75 166 166 167 170 High Electromechanical 71 80 110 209 209 210 213 Volume 3000 Hz Interrupted 72 81 Non-Temporal Non- Low Electromechanical 71 79 15 74 74 79 82 Temporal Volume 1 /75 86 88 93 96 3000 Hz Interrupted 72 79 High Electromechanical 76 84 30 101 101 107 110 Volume 3000 Hz Interrupted 77 86 75 167 167 173 176 110 213 213 218 2222 D900-28-00 2 156-171,96-011 R Figure 2: Candela Selections NOTE:SpectrAlert selectable output strobes;set at 15 and 15,1751cd, For strobe candela selection,adjust slide switch located automatically work on both 12V and 24V power supplies.. on the rear of the product while watching the viewing win- ' t NOTE: The strobe is not listed for 12V operating voltages when dow.on the side of the reflector. set to 30, 75 or 110 candelas. Use only those settings marked as Permissible Candela Settings: OK in the chart above. Candela g operating voltage NOTE: The low volume setting of some tones must NOT be used 12V 24V for public mode applications when the device-is powered from a 12- 15 OK OK volt panel. Refer to the Sound Output Guide on the previous page. 15/75 OK OK Temp/Non-Temp { 30 OK ON=NON-Temporal,OFF=Temporal A0133-00 75 OK 3KHzJElectromechanical Viewing Window 110 OK ON=3KHz,OFF=Electromechanical AWARNING Check terminal polarity before wiring.'For proper operation, make sure the correct wire polarity is applied to the unit. Figure 3• Horn Factory Default Setting Figure 5: Horns and strobes powered in tandem The factory default setting is High, Temporal 3, and Electrome NOTE: Supply power must he continuous for proper operation. I 1 chanical tone. TANDEM OPERATION 1 Factory DIP Switch HORN/STROBE COMBO OFF ON ' Default Horn+ l Low F-10W High ® TO NEXT FACTORY ® + 00 ® DEVICE OR INSTALLED FROM: Temporal EOL JUMPERS ® FACP,MODULE p m Non-Temporal o ® A0110-0o Strobe. OR PREVIOUS ® ® Strobe-Horn= DEVICE Electromech. 30001-12 o o Base(rear) ® ® Aon2-00 0 Horn selections using 3-position DIP switch on horn/ 1 strobe (refer to Figure 3): Figure 6:Any combination of models powered by a NOTE:When powered from a FWR supply,the horn will be mod- 4-wire circuit to provide independent horn and strobe op- ulated (turned on and oft) by 120Hz causing it to sound different eration(remove factory installed jumpers,see Figure 8) than if powered by a DC supply. NOTE:Strobes must be powered continuously for horn operation. High/Loco Volume ON-High Volume,OFF=Low Volume (+) (+) (+) System Operation—Non-Synchronized Devices: o o E' l Figure 4a: Any combination of models powered by a N N OL) 2-wire circuit: (-) ;c .O (+) HORN HORN/STROBE STROBE ONLY 'M 'O TWO WIRE SYSTEM i E ANY MIX OF MODELS (;) JR ) (+) WIRED FOR TANDEM $ L OPERATION - -T 1 E ROI8 ' L A0111-00 .) System Operation—Synchronized Devices: Figure 4b: Any combination of models powered by a A°113 00 2-wire circuit: I HORWSTROBE STROBE ONLY TWO WIRE SYSTEM p I • '/ I O) ANY MIX OF MODELS WIRED OPERATION DEM SYNCHRONIZATION MODULE A011100 1 D900-28-0o 3 156-1796(ill R r r i t Figure 7: Horns and strobes powered independently Figure 8: Removal of horns and strobes from (horn operated on coded power supply) R mounting plates' NOTE:Strobes must he powered continuously for horn operation. To remove,units from mounting plates, insert Quick Click Re- {. mdval Tool as shown to unlock snap. While pushing in Removal INDEPENDENT OPERATION Tool to release the snap, pull back on the horn/strobe. Hinge the f HORN AND STROBE horn,/strobe module,disengage'the Locking Rib,and lift the horn/ FACTORY INSTALLED HORN strobe away from the mounting plate. JUMPER WIRES REMOVED ' STROBES .. SNAP L'cYER ORN« N HOTE:STROBES MUST :NSEBr REti•CVALI'OOL TO NEXT G' ® BE POWERED CONTINUOUSLY DEVICE OR ® FOR HORN OPERATION. �T EOL <STROBE, B ° % TO NEXT (' STROBE- , _ STROBE- FROM: _ DEVICE OR{` \ �— FACP.MODULE(MDL) EOL I \t� _f DEVICEPREHORN- HORN- I � t Break wire as Mown far It f-101'. Twire0 °aKrene Ba -.wRon.DO NOT IooP Wires. ;1OII'{-OO LLB SLOT TAB A01 5-00 Mounting Diagrams: Strobe or Horn/Strobe with small footprint mounting plate: SMP,SMPW Screw types used for mounting: &INCH BAQK BOK A = 8-32 x'/4 flat head B = 6-32 x 1%5 pan head O B O 0 Strobe or Horn/Strobe with universal mounting plate: O 6MP.O4JPW.DMP-rC.D#IPWFC B 4-INCH BACK BOX IWNL OPENING MUST EOUAL PLATE OPENING O A LOCKING RIB SLOT LOCKING RIB O - 1. 'Mount plate to back box using screws B. A0116-00 O O 2. Breakoff four tabs from unit. 3. Complete field wiring, making sure wall opening is large enough for O O terminals to fit through. 4. Insert locking rib into slot on plate., A 5. Press into plate;unit will make a"click"when it has locked into place. WNL OPENWO MUST f EQUAL PLATE OPENWG A011?-00 .. LOCKING RIB SLOT LOCKWGRIB Strobe or Horn/Strobe surfacemount: � . BAR,EBBW 4-INCH BAp(BOK 1. Mount plate to back box using screws A, making sure wall O opening is equal to the plate opening. 77 2. Complete field wiring. 3. Insert locking rib into slot on plate. 4. Press into plate, unit will make.a "click" when it has locked ° into place. A LOCKING BIB SLOT LOCKING RIB 1. Mount skirt to back box with screws A. 2. Complete field wiring. A0I18-00 3. insert locking rib on unit into clot on skirt. 4. Press into skirt;unit will make a"click"when it has locked into place. (NOTE: Strobe and skirt may also be mounted to a 2-inch box using screws B instead of screws A.) Please refer to insert for the Limitations of Fire Alarm Systems Three-Year Limited Warranty Svsterm Sensor•warrarus its enciosed horn.strobe,or horn;sirnbe to be free from defects in materials to:System Sensor,Returns Depat-trnent.RA.if._-..-- :>3=5 Ohio Avenue,St.Charles,!L 67174. and vorkarimp under rorsral use and service for a period of three Wean from date o:manu Please include a nate describing the nalfunction and suspected cause of`failure.The Company :acture._ysten,Sensor:rakes no other express warranty-for this horn,strobe,or horn/strobe.No ;gall net be otiligated"to repair or replace units which are found tit be defective because of dan•- agen t,re-_resentative,dealer,or employee of the Contparty has the authority to increase or alter age,unreasonable use,modifications,of alterations occurring after the date of manufacture.In no, the ol.iihations or hn:itations of this Lvarramy.•r'he conipanv's obligation of this wirranty shall be case xlydl he Company be liable for air:consequential or incidental darvages for breach of this or iimrt�d to the repair ur replacement of any part of the horn,strobe,u•L+m n/,tnibe•which is fourta acv other'Narranty,expressed or implied wharsuever,even If the loss or duaage is caused try the to be deiuwe io ma:eria!s or .ouuranship under normal use and seivr.•r�iarirg the;bite yeai ,omaariv .1 ,It, or`auh.'dente n;ares do not allow the exclusion or limlta:run a`incidental or 1 period C.'r,unercmg anth the,sate u:ni m fac tuie.After phoriny S1.tcm Sensnl'a tali he I17nIbel - :i..L.,uer :al daa.ages,so the above limitation or esclurior may not a^piy to yo5.This'VoTrawy 800-SENSOR2(7.36-7672)for a Renun rturhorl,•arirnt nur»her.send.cfe,-live um—'s postage pr pai^ gWes You SP-- Tic legal ri;ht:,ani;ou may also have other ribhts which y fain s,...e;o slam. 1 FCC Statement Sxr'irAiert Strofres and linin;Strobes have been tested and Inun;tto cumnlv with the:unit.;:ora and,if not installed and used in accordance with the ins:roc;lou manna;.racy cause harmful Chs,B diswal device.pursuant;o parr 1.3 of;he FCt.Rates The.. bni:N are designed lo r hide interference to ndht compntntcxr ons Operation of;his equuar-fort in a.esdendal aria,s:il:ely r„ascnarkV pTntectmn agautsr harmfui in;ei:erencewhen the eqU1.0roont t. i^enml in a com- to cause.harir`.ul interterence in which case t1:e user wl,i hr ,,I rorrect the utt rference + nrerciai environment.This equipment-enemies, uses,and can radiate radio fregcem v energy at his awn expense. 1+1 D900-28-00 =4 156-179(:-0118 2005 Svstem Sensor SYSTEM SEJ VS OR S.ei:ectabie-0utputt H*rns;_Strobes -and , Horn/Strobes-mi, S ectrAlert°Advanceselectable-out selectable-output strobes, µ' p P 1 and horn/strobes are rich with features guaranteed to cut installation times and maximize profits. SPECTRAlertA ie► iN e E i q t f . a b The SpectrAlert Advance series of notification:appliances is Features designed to sirs P 16 installations,with features such as plug in Eler..trcally compatible with.existing SpectrA.lert products designs,Instant feedback messages to ensure correct installation of individual devices,and ' =eic-.electable candela settings for,,;vall Autornatic selection of 12-or 4 volt operation at 15 and 15/75 candela and ceiling strobes and horn/strobes. 1 •Plug-in design t When installing Advance produc--s,first'attach a universal mounting Field selectable candela settings on wall and ceiling units: 1.5,15/75, i plate to a four-inch square,four-inch octagon or double-gang 30,75,95, 1 10,1 , 135,150, 77; 135 junction box.The two-,vire mounting plate attaches to a single-gang .Same mounting plate for:Vali-and ceiling-mount units junction box. Shorting spring on mounting plate for continuity check before installation Text,connect the notification appliance circuit wiring to the HlviS terminals on the mounting plate. •Tamper resistant construction Outdoor wall and ceiling products rated from-407 to 151°F Finally,attach the horn,strobe or`horn/strobe to the mounting plate -'Des:gn`a!lows minimal intrusion into the back box by'::setting the prod:ct's tabs in the mour:ting plates grooves:fhe Hom rated at 88+dbA at 16 volts device wi!l rotate into position,locking the product's pins into the y ; q mounting plate's terminals. the device will temporarily held in place Rotary switch for horn tone and roe volume selections 4Vi."a a...:C^Until It is SeCUrr?d':^✓ith a ca:.;lU'eC n101.Jnt:g SCreVI. •Outdoor produces Ul �ISte�cl to U 1638(>trobei and UL 464(horn' t outdoor requirements 1 -S _ctr.AleY.Advance series includes outdoor notllication p Out:oor rcd:Jets ra r gprorf ;er U-50;NEMA 3F; J aa?liances.rJ idoor'strobes and hornisteobes(two wire and four wrel arc aJalable o U a! ce lina.Oumloor horns are available for Compatible+-v-il�IN.,1D s.m module Vv'all On'd.r"',..j,;Siem J nSOr outdoor prOdUCtS are'ated betVAieen minus 40 degrees F nre:ni leand I_5 1degr__s Fahrenheit in suet or dry dpl:; Cx:ii0r1'' Agency Listings SIGNALING a er MEA approved LISTED APPROVED 1 SpectrAlert Advance Specifications;. Architect/Engineer Specifications GeneralIIA r S ect Alert Advance horns:strobes arid h,br ;'strobes shall Mount to a standard 4 x 4 x 1!/-inch back box,4 inch o^agon back box or double-gang back box.Tiro-v.-ire Products shall also mount to a single-gang 2 x 4 x 1?,e-inch back box.A universal r?,our:tir:g plate shall be used for mounting ceiling and•rvaii ..peau s The r.!t fy .tion appliance.crew: -wring stall terminate at the universal, ourtir:a plat..Also, ;:e:t Alert Advance P.?d,icts.'s er?used with iha Syr:c•Circuit-FAcdule accessory,shall be oovvered from a non-coded notification appiian:_ circuit output and shall operate on a nominal 12 or 14 volts.When used•.vi;h;he Sy�'c•( L..w:b duly:?,12-volr rated rot fr,ahcn appl!an:e;ire,;:[outpuss,hall„pe att „-to ,en nu e arta*17.5'volts;2-1-vol i rated n:,t,(i:a!nn r r appliance;ircuit.outputs shall operate between 17 and 33 volts.Indoor S ectrAlert Advan- p;oduc_ts shall oper, between 32 and 110 degreesfahrenheit horn a regulate::.'Dt:,or full wave iectified,unfilteied power supply.Sbobes a.:d;om/�irooes shall have f-elr.-selectable candela settings including 15, 15/177',. 3,0, 75,95;110,115,135,150,177,185. Strobe «� The strobe shall be a Svsten?Sensor S'ectrAlert Advance Model listed to UL 197'and shall be approved for`ire piote"ive service The strobe shall be v,-iced as a primary-signaling notificatlen applianceand cc;rnply v,-ith the Americans'rfith Disabilities Act requirements fcr visible s'anaiiru;appliance;,flashing at Hz over the strobe's entire operating voltage range.`I c_strobe light shall consist of a xenon`lash tube and ascciaed lens/reflector system. s Horn/Strobe Combination The horn/strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert Advance Model listed to UL 1971 and UL 454 and shall be approved for fire p!i;tective service. The horn/strobe shall be wired as a pr may sigr:aling nrtff:Cat on atc;pliance and comply with the.Arnencans with Disabif ties,Act requirements for visible signaling appliances,flashing at 11-12 over the>strobes entire ocerating voltago range.Me strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system.the horn shall have three audibility optionsaridan option to srJitch'between a torr!poral three-pat Frr:ana a nor:temporal(continuous) pattern,Th options are set by a multiple position switch.On tour-wire product,the strobe shall be powered independently of the sot rider.The'horn on Torr!/strobe models shall operate on:a coded or non-coded power supply. Outdoor Products SpectrAlert Advance outdoor horns,strobes and horn/strobes shall be listed for outdoor use by UL and shall operate between minus 40 degrees and 1 S 1 A Fahrenheit the products shall be listed for use with a System Sensor outdoor,/weatherproof back box will;ha': f,inch and three-fourths inch conduit entries. Synchronization Module TI e.module if shall hea$yc*•em Sensor Sync-Circuit model MDL.listed to ill '• t and shall he approved fol hre prntrctivr•Servi:e.The module shall synchronize Spec trAlert strobes at 1 I i'<and horns at temporal three.Also,while geeratir:g the strobes,the module shat'silence the hon s on horn/strobe models over a single pair of wires.The module shall mount to a 41'/16 x 4";a x 21,,'8-inch back box-The module shalt also control two Srvle Y(class B)circuits or one Style (class,A circuit. ?e module shall synchronize multiple zones.Daisy chaining two or more synchronization modules together will synchronize all the zones they control.The module shall riot operate on a coded power supply. PhysicaltElectrical Specifications Standard Operating Temperature 32°F to 120`F(0°C to 49°C) K Series Operating Temperature -40°F to 151°F(-AO'C to 66`0 Humidity Range 10 to 930,.,non-condensing(indoor products) Strobe Flash Rate 1 flash per second Nominal Voltage Regulated 12DC/FNR or regulated 24DC/F;L'R' Operating Voltage Rangel 8 to 17.5 V(12V nominal)or 16 ro 33 V(24 nominal) Input terminal wire gauge 12 to 18 A.wG Ceiling mount dimensions(including lens) 6.8 diameter x 2.5'high(173 mm d:a:w eter x 61 min high) Wall mount dimensions(including lens) 5.6"L x 4.71N x 2.5"D(142 m.m L x 1 19 mm W x 64 mm D Horn dimensions 5.6"i-x4.7i:`x1.3"Di142, m I x 119 mmWx3>mmD) Wall-mount back box skirt dimensions(BBS-2,BBSW-2) 59"L x 5.0-`%,`xi 2.2'D(151 mrn_x i 28 n?r;?1%v'x 56 r;rn u) Ceiling-mount back box skirt dimensions(BBSC-2,BBSCW-2) 7.1"diameter x,2.2:"hir;h(180:~:m diarr?erer x 7 mlit h:(Ih) Wall-mount weatherproof back box dimensions(SA-WBB) 5.7"L.r.S.1 A"^f x 2.0 T)r1 45,.err; x 130 rnm`r`✓x 51 mm D) Ceiling-mount weatherproof back box dimensions(SA-WBBC) '"dia rrr?:2. t,1f.•!8 rrm 'dr 'e:x5i m ail) Notes. =ull 'a .F,dii d i , ` I age is: nen reculated,tame va yina,rowers:..._r at i:,.:e n sc „ e ,�p.a :.n 1 2.^S,tC,ar:.d SSC pro, ,:cts veil:operate at 12 V nominal only to-1 S and 15!'5 cd. i 1 1 I (MY 17CUrren t.Draw,Data�t 8-17.5 Volts 16-33 Volts 8-17.5 Volts 16-33 Volts Candela DC FWR DC FWR Sound Pattern dB DC FWR DC FWR Standard 123 128 66 71 Temporal Hqh 57 55 69 75 6 Candela Range 15/75' 142 148 77 81 Temporal "•;iediw? 44 49 58 69 30` NA. NA 94 , 96 Temporal Lova- 3S 44 44 48 i 75,_j "r NA 153 Ncn temppri1 iigh 57 56 69 75 95* NA NA 181 176 Nun-terrnpc..ral Medium 42 50 60 69 110 NA NA 202 195 Non ternporal Low 41 44 50 50 115 NA NA, 210 205 Coded High 57 55 69 7.`i High 135 NA NA 228 207 Coded Mediunn 44 51 16 69 Candela Range 150 N NA 246 220 Coded Low 40 46 52 50 177 NA NA 281 251 185 NA NA 286 258 8-17.5 Volts 16-33 Volts DC Input 15 15/75 15 15/75 30 95 110 115 Temporal High 137 147 79 910 107 176 194 212 218 Temporal Medium 132 144 69 80 97 57 182 201 210 Temporal Low 132 143 66 " 93 154 179 198 207 NO ipotaFHigh_,. 141 1.52 91 1.00 116 C77n„ 201 221 229 Nor:. mpp�`*ediuni' 133 145 75 8.5 102 163 187 207 215 Nor:.-temporal Loav 131 144 68 r' 19 96 156 182 201 210 K FWR Input y lempordI High 36 155 88 97 112 168 '90 210 218 lemporal Medium 129 152 78 88 103 160 184 202 206 R muixal Late 129 151 7686 101 160 184 194 201, Nan temporal High 42 t6i 103 112 126 181 %03 221 229 ' Nor:-temporal Medium 134 155 85 95 110 166 139 208 216 Non-temporal Low 132 t54 80 90 105 161 184 202 21:1 UL Max.Current Draw(mA RMS),2-wire Horn/Strobe,High Candela Range(135-185 cd) 16-33 Volts 16-33 Volts DC Input 135 150 177 185 FWR Input 135 150 177 185 Temporal f sigh 245 259 290 297 Temporal High 215 231 258 265 Ternporal Medium. 235 253 288 297 Ternporal Medium 209 224 250 258>t.e,. Temporal Low 232 251 282 292 Ternporal Low 207 221 248 256 Nor:.-temporal High 2.55 270 303 309 Nor?-remporal Hiqh 233 248 275 281 r Nor;temporal rv?edium 242 259 293 299 Non-temporal Medium 219 232 252 267 Non-tennporal Low 238 254 29. 1195 Non-temporal Low 214 229 256 1 262 Candela Derating w Horn Tones and Sound Output DataUt For k -'ries prof UCtS used at low temiceratUres,listed candela O and a+ ratings!7--ust be reduced in accordance with this table. 8-17.5 16-33 24Volt Nominal TrI .. Switch _Volts _Volts Reverberant Anechoic Listed Candela Candela rating at-401 Position Sound Pattern dB DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR — 1 enlpora 1 g1' '3 78 8» 88 88' 99 93 Do not use belovv 32T a Z-10. $r r ?n, ernpora diUn1 3 5 96 't' 3 ;rnpora' n 73 76 83 80 94 89 95 4 rtr'rrlr?Oral High 82 88 88 9_' 10(l, 1.1d) 5Non-teminoral 'vlecGum '. 8` 85 90 901 98 S'S I i; 1'0 _..-----....--- ';on-ten'?_•oral o.,; 81 l Se 84 96 S 11`.i it _ _ Coded Foh 82 82 8r• 38 9s 92 i0i 10 3 _.-...-------- ---- C'od�,ci "• am 7+; ".;3 h5 ., 0 ,, �, t � ca 50 150 v 1' hl_etc'? ;s 7,&ai'_,: ..,t available on_-\.'•;ire ho'r, r SpectrAlert Advance Dimensions . 4.7- zs _ ss R Dia. i 25- 5.6' ,,.�•<." Wall-mount horn/strobes Ceiling-mount horn/strobes 2.25" W2� & 7.1" 7.1" -1 Dia. 5.05 2.23+1 Dia. L ' II 0 � o �\2.0\7" PIPo0 . 1 5.98- 5.7" O O O o 0 � � nr Wall back box skirt Ceiling back box skirt Wall weatherproof back box Ceiling weatherproof back box SpectrAlert Advance Ordering !nformation ..n, model Wall Horn Strobes,Description (Ceiling'Harn/Sttrobes(contdj) 1 P2R*' 2-ware Horn.Strobe,Standard cd,Red �js-C ;xl 2'w�e HciniSfm)t ,.5ta-r7dard c�;bViiite'— P2i;H" 2,�•rire Horn/Strobe,High cd,Red PC2WH't 2+mire 1-font/Strobe,High cd,White P2RK* 2-,vire Hurn/Strobe,Standard cd,Red,Outdoor PC4R 4-vdir)Horn„Strobe,Standard cd,Red P2RHK* 2 va re Hc;rn;'Strob ,High cd,Red,Outdoor EARH 4-wire Horn./strobe,High cd.Red P2bV 2 v:ire.Nern Strobe,Standard c'd,1-MTff `� PC4RK 4-wire HornStrobe,Standard cd,Red,Outdoor 2-wire Horn/Strobe,I ligh cd,White PC4RHK 4-wire Hein/Strobe,High cd,Red,Outdoor I14R* 4-wire Horn/Strobe,Standard cd,Red PC4W 4-wire Horn/Strobe,Standard cd,Whi e P4RH4 4-wire Horn/Strobe,High cd,Rede PC4WH 4-wire Horn/Strobe,High cd,White P4RK 4-wire Horn"_;trobe.,Standard cd,Red,Outdoor Ceiling Strobes P4RHK 4-wire Horn/Strobe,Hiqh cd,Red,Outdoor SCR* Strobe.Standard cd,Red P4'vd* 4-wire Horn/Strobe,Standard cd,While SCRH* Strobe,High cd,Red P4'vJH* 4_wire Horn/Strobe,High cd,White SCRK Strobe,Standard cd,Red,Outdoor twall Strobes--I SCRI!K Strobe,High cd,Red,Outdoor SR* Strobe,Standard cd,Red SCW*' Strobe,Standard cd,White SRH*' Strobe.Hick cd,Red SCWH” Strobe.High cd,White SRK' Strobe,Standard cd,Red,Outdoor Horns SRI-1K Strobe,High cd,Red,Outdoor HR Horn,ase<a LS��.,.. --.—Strobe,Standard o.'.,^7n'e h,RK ion:, ed,Outdoor SWH* Strobe,High cd,\•,�hi;e� 1 AN, Horn,Whi- Ceiling Horn/Strobes Accessories PC.2R* Z urge HcrrV',t.c,be, Standard cd,Red BES 2 ;:rack Box S ci t,';yall,Red PC2RH* ?vme Horn/'strobe,High cd,Red BBSW.' Pack Box SK rt,':'Jail,•Allhi?e Pi..2<.^ b^du'-______ 'H,^..rrliitrobn,Standard cd;Re:;,Outdoor BBSI.1 ai'k BOX SKrt. nlrlg: e: --PC aR ' wire Facen%°S o',•>+sigh cd:Red.Outdoor BBSCI-2 Sack<_X Ski!t 'ening;White Nates- Acld"-P'to rn ciel nL:Mber fcr plain housing!no"FIRE"trarking on co,ori,e;;;.,P2R-P Aad P`tc:model nurnbei fol''FUEGO"marking on cover,e.g.,P2R-SP tar:dard_ , O`ers to sr' be ..at.n l de'S, , , 30,'0,?5 .i 0 and'1 S card_:a se:'r q_. •, °e s strobes that' =1uue 1 , Si„'7-,.and; .! andela sett" ruoor I. ,r ending;,l"< indud!:t a a,:eather noon ra k box. SYSTEM ijL.`) _h_� :e�faC _..L`1-i iC,i_60174 i iir•:l `30 INSTALLATION-AND-MAINTENANCE.INSTRUCTIONS SYSTEM SPECT rt �.� SENSOR 1 ' 3825 Ohio Avenue.St.Charles,Illinois 60174 800,1736-7672,FAY:630/377-6495 Sele_c_table- ut utStrobes::Hornsorns and:Horn/Strobes-, www.system sensor.corn For use with the following models:P2R,P2RH,P2RK.P2RHk P2W,P2WH,P4R,P4RH,P4RK,P4RHK,NW,P41VH,SR.SRH,SRK,SRHK.S W SWH.PUR,PC2RH,PC2RK,PC2RHK, tLC2 .PUWH,PC411,PC4RH.PC4RK,PC4RHK.PC4W,PC4VVH,SCR,SCRH,SCRK,SCRHK,SCW,SCWH,HR,HRK,HW SR-P,SW-P,SRH-P,SWH P P2R P,P2W-P,P2RH-P,P21V1-6P, p SCR-P;SCW-P,SCRH-P,SON-H-P.PC2R-P.PC2W-P,PC2RH-P.PC2WH-P,P4R-P,P4RH-P,1`4W-P,P4WH-P,SR-SP,SRH-SP,P2R-SP,P2RH-SP,SCW-SP,SCWH-SP,PC2,ALSP,PC2WH-SP PRODUCT'SPECIFICATIONS j Operating Temperature: Standard Products 32°F to 120`F(0°C to 49°C) ' K Series —40'F to 151°F Humidity Range: Standard Products 10 to 93%Non-condensing K Series Meets NEMA 4X requirements Strobe Flash Rate: 1 flash per second Nominal Voltage: Regulated 12VDC/FWR or regulated 24DC/FWR. r Operating Voltage Range(includes fire alarm panels with built in sync): 8 to 17.5V(12V nominal)'or 16 to 33V(24V nominal) Operating Voltage with MDL Sync Module: i 9 to 17.5V(12V nominal)or 17 to 33V(24V nominal) Input terminal wire gauge: 12 to 18 AWG 1 NOTE 1:Strobes will operate at 12 V nominal for 15&15/75 candela settings only.Switching between ranges is automatic. DIMENSIONS FOR PRODUCTS AND ACCESSORIES w WALL PRODUCTS LENGTH WIDTH DEPTH CEILING PRODUCTS DIAMETER DEPTH Strobes and Horn/Strobes 5.6•" 4.7"" 2.5"" Strobes and Horn/Strobes 6.8" 2.5" (including lens) 142 mm 119 mm 64 mm (including lens) 173 mm 64 mm Horns 5.6"• 4.7" 1.3"' SA-WBBC Weatherproof Back Box 7.1 2.0- 142 mm 119 mm 33 mm 180 mm 51 mm 5.7"- •5.1"• 2.0"" BBSC-2 t 7.1" 2.2" SA-WBB Weatherproof Back Box BBSCW-2 145 mm 14130 mm 51 mm Back Box Skirt 180 mm 57 mm I BBS-2 5.0"" 5.9"1 2.2 NOTE: SA-WBB and SA-WBBC dimensions do not include the two BBSW-2 Back Box Skirt 130 mm 152 mm 57 mm mounting tabs MOUNTING BOX OPTIONS 4-Wire The products in this manual may be covered Iby one or more of, 2-Wire Indoor Products Indoor K Series Products the following patents: ' Products 5,914.66x; 5.850,178; 5,598,139r 6,049,446; 6,522,261.; 6,661,337; 6.822.400; 4 x 4 x 1'/2, 6,833,783;6,856,241,7,053,766 4 x 4 x 1'/z, Double SA-WBB(wall),, Gang,4"OSingle Gang, Double Gang, 4'" SA-WBBC (ceiling) NOTICE: This manual shall be left with the owner/user of ctagon Octagon I this equipment. GENERAL DESCRIPTION LOOP DESIGN AND WIRING t The SpectrAlert Advance series of notification appliances offers a wide range The system designer must make sure that the total current drawn by the de- of horns,strobes,and horn/strobes,for wall and ceiling applications,indoors vices on the loop does not exceed the current capability of the panel supply, and outdoors. They are designed to be used in 12 or 24 volt, DC or FWR and that the last device on the circuit is operated within its rated voltage. (full wave rectified)systems.These products are electrically backward cornpat- The current draw information for making these calculations car:be found in ible with the,previous gerer,ation of SpectrAlert notification appliances. Horn; the rabies within:this manual. For convenience and accuracy,use the voltage strobe products are available in two versions.The 2-wire products fit systems drop calculator or. the System Sensor website (www.systentsensor.conil or where a single NAC controls both horn and strobe.The 4-wire products are in CD-ROM. tended for systems which have separate wiring circuits for the horn and strobe. When calculating the voltage available to the last device. it is necessary to All SpectrAlert Advance products are suitable for use in synchronized systems, consider the voltage drop due to the resistance of the wire.The thicker the The System Sensor NIDL module may be used to provide synchronization. wire, the smaller the voltage drop. Wire resistance tables can be obtained K Series products are designed to be used over a wider range of temperatures from electrical handbooks. Note that if Class A wiring is installed, the,wire and are suitable for use in wet locations. length may be up to twice as long as it would be for circuits that are not Wall and ceiling products maybe used interchangeably t"wall products may be. fault tolerant. used or,the ceiling and ceiling products may be used on the.;wall.) NOTE:The total number of SFrobes on a single NAC must not exceed 40 for FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONSIDERATIONS 24 vott applications or.i 2 for 12 volt applications. Loop resistance on a single The National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA 72, requires that all horns, used for NAC"should not exceed 120 ohms for 24 vol:and 30 ohms for 12 volt systems building evacuation:produce temporal coded signals.Signals other than those used tor-evacuation purposes do not have to produce the temporal coded sig- I , nal. System Sensor recommends spacing notification appliances in compli- ance with NFPA 72. D690-03-00 1 156 27;19-tIC)7R ti r r k For 4-Wire installations,terminals 1,2,and 3 connect to the strobe;terminals TABLE 1 ST_ROSE CCURRENT'DRAW'(Ma);FOR,S,SC,;P4,&PC4' f 4 and 5 connect,to the horn.The horn and strobe circuits must be wired in- SERIES.. ~ dependently,and each circuii must be terminated with the appropriate EOL 8-17.5 Volts 1 16=33 Volt.0 device. Removal of a notification:device will result in an open circuit indica- Candela DC FWR(,,,DCS'? FWR R tion on the strobe loop. Standard.Candela Range I 15 '123 _128_ 66 71 FIGURE 1.WIRING 2-WIRE PRODUCTS: 15/75 142 148 77 81 INPUT 30 NA, NA 94 .96„ FROM75 NA NA X158 3153 FACP OOUTPUT Is',i 95 NA NA 181 176 OR NEXT 110 NA NA 202' 195` PRIOR OR EOL DEVICE DEVICE 115 NA NA 210 205 + + High Candela Range 135 NA NA 228 207 150 NA 'NA 246 220 - L 177 NA NA 281• 251 185 NA NA 286 258 TABLE 2.CANDELA DERATING: ` A0367-01 Listed Candela Candela rating at—40°F FIGURE 2.WIRING 4-WIRE PRODUCTS: K Series Outdoor Applications Only) OUTPUT 15 FROM 15175 Do not use below 32°F FACP OR TO NEXT PRIOR STROBE 30 STROBE OR EOL 75 44 95 70 110 110 115 115 + + 135 135 + + 150 150 _ * 177 177 185 1 185 INPUT FROM OUTPUT TO NEXT HORN SELECTION` FACP OR PRIOR HORN HORN OR EOL Turn the rotary switch on the back of the product to the desired setting. For . A0366-00 horn and 4-wire horn/strobe products, the current draw for each setting is FIGURE 3.SHORTING SPRING: listed in Table 3. For 2-wire horn/strobe products (P2 series),current draws are listed in Tables 4 and 5. The sound output measurement for each horn Osetting is shown in Table'6. TABLE 3.HORN CURRENT DRAW(Ma)FOR N,P4&PC4 SERIES: l POS Sound dA Out 8-17.5 Volts 16-33 Volts Pattern DC FWR r DC I FWR r 1 Temporal High 57 55 69 75 M ` ST O 2 Temporal Medium. 44 ' 49 58 69 3 Temporal Low 38 44 44 48 ® ® ® 4 Non-temporal High 57 56 69 75 5 Non-temporal Medium 42 50 60 69 0 6 Non-temporal Low 41 '44 50 50 7 Coded High 57 55 69, 75 SHORTING SPRING 8 Coded Medium 44 51 56 69 9 Coded Low 40 46 52 50 A0368-00 NOTE:A shorting spring is provided between terminals 2 and 3 of the mount- NOTE:In positions 7,8,and 9,temporal coding must be provided by the!VAC. ing plate to enable wiring checks after the system has been wired,but prior If the NAC voltage is held constant,the horn output will remain constantly on. to installation of the final product. This spring will automatically disengage Positions 7,8,and 9 are not available on 2-wire horn/strobe products. when the product is installed,to enable supervision of the final system: CANDELA SELECTION r Adjust the slide switch on the rear of the product to position the desired can- dela setting in the small window on the front of the unit. All products meet t the light output profiles specified in the appropriate UL Standards.For R series I products used outdoors at low temperatures,listed candela ratings must be re- duced in accordance with Table 2. Use Table 1 to determine the current draw for each candela setting.WIRING DIAGRAMS r NOTE: Specu-Alert products set at 15 and 15/7,9 candela aruonratically work 1 or.either 12V or 24V power supplies.The products are not listed for 11 2V op- erating voltages:when:set to any other candela settings. For 4-Wire products, total current draw may be determined by adding current draw for the specific candela selection in Table i with the,current draw for the specific horn selec- tion in Table 3. 1 r D690-03-00 2 + 156-2769-0078 t r ' TABLE 4.2-WIRE'HORN/STROBE CURRENT DRAW(mA)FOR P2 AND PC2 STANDARD CANDELA SERIES: DC Input 8-17.5 Volts r 16--33-Volts--1 15 cd 15/75 cd 15 cd 15/75 cd 30 cd "—'75 cd D 95 cd 110 cd 115 cd Temporal High 137 147 79 90 107 176 194 212 218 Temporal Medium 132 144 69 80 97 157 182 201 210 Temporal Low 132 143 66 77 93 154 179 198 207 Non'terrf oral'Hidh"-'1 141 152 91 100 116 _ 176--77 201' 221 229 Non-temporal Medium 133 145 75 85 102 163 187 207 216 Non-temporal Low, 131 144 68 79 96 156 182 201 210 FWR Input Temporal High 136 155 88 97 112 168 190 210 218 Temporal Medium 129 152 78 88 103 160 184 202 206 Tem oral Low 129 151 76 86 101 160 184 194 201 Non-temporal Hi h 142 161 103 112 126 181 203 221 229 Non-temporal Medium 134 155 85 95 110 166 189 208 216 Non-temporal Low 132 154 1777i0 90 1 105 161 184 202 211 TABLE S.2-WIRE HORN/STROBE CURRENT DRAW(mA)FOR P2 AND PC2 HIGH CANDELA RANGE SERIES: 16-33 Volts Volts DC 16-33 Volts Volts FWR Sound Pattern 135 cd 150 cd 177 cd 185 cd 135 cd 150 cd 177 cd 185 cd Temporal High 245 259 290 297 215 231 258 265 Temporal Medium 235 253 288 297 209 224 250 258 Temporal Low 232 251 282 292 1 207 221 248 256 Non-temporal High 255 270 1 303 309 233 248 1 275 1 281 Non-temporal Medium _ 242 259 293 299 219 232 262 267 Non-temporal Low 238 254 291 295 214 229 256 262 TABLE S.HORN OUTPUT(dBA)IN UL REVERBERANT ROOM: f Switch 8-17.5 Volts** 16-33 Volts" 24 V Nominal Measurements Position Sound Pattern dA Reverberant Anechoic DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR 1 Temporal High 78 78 84 84 88 88 99 98 2 Temporal Medium 74 74 80 80 86 86 96 96 3 Temporal Low 71 73 76 76 83 80 94 89 4 Non-temporal High 82 82 88 88 93 92 100 100 5 Non-temporal Medium 78 78 85 85 90 90 98 98 6 Non-temporal Low 75 75 81- 81 88 84 96 92 7" Coded High 82 82 88 88 93 92 101 101 8' Coded Medium 78 78 85 85 90 90 97 98 9' Coded Low 75 75 81 81 88 85 96 92 *Horn&4-wire Horn/Strobe only. **Minimum dB rating for Operational Voltage Range as per UL 464. MOUNTING INDOOR WALL OR CEILING PRODUCTS K SERIES MOUNTING Attach mounting plate to junction box as shown in Figures 4 and 5.The 1. K Series products may be used indoors or outdoors. They must be in- mounting plate is compatible with 4-inch square,double gang,and 4-inch stalled using the proper SpectrAlert Advance weatherproof back box(SA- octagon junciion boxes (2-wire products may be used with a single gang WBB or SA-WBBC). Do not attempt to use boxes other than the ones box). If using a back box skirt.attach the mounting plate to the skin and supplied with the product. :hen attach the entire assembly to the junction box(see Figures 6 and 7). 2. The wall mourn box(SA-W1313)must be mounted with its internal post in 2. Connect field wiring to terminals,as shown in Figures 1 and 2. the lower left corner,as shown in Figure 8. If the product is not to be installed at this point,use the paint cover to 3• Two threaded holes are provided in the sides of the box for N-inch con- prevent contamination of the mounting plate. duit adapters.Knockout plugs in the back of the box can be used for 1h- 4. To attach product to mounting plate,remove the paint cover,then hook or 3,�-inch rear entry. Unused holes must be sealed. Plugs and 0-Rings tabs on the product housing into the grooves on mounting plate. are provided with the box for this purpose. '['hen,swing product into position to engage the pins on the product with 4 It i the responsibility of the installer to make sure that all openings and the terminals on the mounting plate.Make sure that the tabs on the back connections are sealed properly.Outdoor installations that are protected of the product housing fully engage with the mounting plate. from direct exposure to rain:are still subject to condensation or leakage through hidden areas,such as a soffit. 6. Secure product by tightening the single mounting screw in the front of the product housing. For tamper resistance, the standard captivated Water may pool on the back box due to condensation or direct exposure mounting screw may be replaced with the enclosed Torx screw. to rain:or snow.Use watertight fittings for all wiring connections,includ ing the knockout plugs on the back of the box.When,using plastic plugs to fill unused threaded holes,apply teflon tape andor silicone sealant to reduce the chance of leakage. 6. Fellow steps 2-6 of the indoor rnounting instructions to wire and attach the product. D690-03-00 3 1..5(i-2769-0078 I FIGURE 4.WALL MOUNT PRODUCT: FIGURE 7:CEILING MOUNT PRODUCT WITH BACK BOX SKIRT: O Ol O 4-wire mounting plate v ftV A0370-00 A0348-00 FIGURE&WALL MOUNT HORN/STROBE WiTH WEA3HERpROOF BACKBOX. FIGURE S.CEILING MOUNT PRODUCT: O O O® O O l o 2-wire mounting plate b A0369-00 A0418-00 FIGURE 6.WALL MOUNT PRODUCT WITH BACKBOX SKIRT: FIGURE 9.WALL AND CEILING MOUNT WEATHERPROOF BACKBOXES: O ° O ° O s O O e O ® O O ° ® ° O i !0 ' O A0349-00 A0417-00 f Please refer to insert for the Limitations of Fire Alarm Systems AWARNING The Limitations of Horn/Strobes The horn and/or strobe will not work without power. The horri strobe gets its The signal strobe may not be seen.The electronic visual warning signal uses an extremely power from the fire/security panel monitoring the alarm system.If power is cut off reliable xenon flash tube.It flashes at least once every second.The strobe trust not be in- for any reason,the hom/strobe will not provide the desired audio or visual warning. stalled indirectSunlight orareasofhighlightintensity(over60footcandles)wherethevisual The horn may not be heard.The loudness of the horn meets(or exceeds) current flash mightbedisregarded ornot seen.The strobe may not be seen bvthe Visually impaired. Underwriters Laboratories'.standards. However. the horn may not alert a sound The signal strobe may cause seizures.Individuals who have positive photoic response sleeper or one who has recently used drugs or has been drinking alcoholic bever to visual stimuli with seizures,such as persons with epile.psv,should avoid prolonged ages.The horn may not be heard if it is placed on a different floor from the person exposure to environments in which strobe signals,including this strobe,are activated. in hazard or if placed too far away to be heard over the ambient noise such as traffic, The.signal strobe cannot operate from coded power supplies.Coded power supplies iair conditioners,machinery or mrsic appliances that ntav prevent alert persons from prod uceinterruptedpower.The strobe must haveanuninterrup led sourceofpowerinorder hearing the alarm.The horn may not be heard by persons who are hearing impaired. to operate correctly.Sys[etn Sensor recommends that the horn and signal strobe always N(iTF.:Strobes must be powered corainuously for horn operation. be used in combination so that t!e ri sks fromany oft lie above I i mitations are in i n i mized. Three-Year Limited Warranty System Sensor warrants its enclosed product to be free from defects in ma- Department,RA _ 3825 Ohio Avenue,St.Charles,if-60174.Please [eriahs and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of three include a note describing the malfunction and suspected cause of failure. years from date of manufacture. System Sensor makes no other express war- Tile Company shall :. not be obligated to replace units which are found to be rarity for this product. NO agent, representative, dealer, or employee of the defective because of damage,'unreasonable use, modifications, or alterations Company has the authority to increase Or alter the obligations or limitations occurring after the date of manufacture. in no case shall the Company be of this Vn`arrartty.The Corrtpany's obligation of this 6Varrarty shat: be limited liable for any consequential or incidental damages for breach of this or any to the replacement of anv part of the product which is found to be defective ether ixJarranty, expressed or implied whatsoever,even if the loss or damage in materials or workmanship under normal use and service during the three ., caused by[tic Company's negligcrice or fault. Some states do not allow the year period commencing with the date Of manufacture. After phoning System exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages. so the above f Sensor's toil free number 800-SENSOR-1 fl,36-7072) for a Return.Authorization limitation or exclusion may not appil,;to you.This Warranty gives you specific number, send defective units postage prepaid to: Systern Sensor, Returns legal rights,and you may also have other righis which vary from state to state. FCC Statement SpectrAlert Strobes and Horn;Strobes have been tested and found to comply with[lie and can radiate radio frequency energy and,if not installed and!.rsed in accordance limits for a Class B digital device,pursuant to fiat 17 of the PCL;Rules."These{imus a:hh the instruction mama:,may cause harmful iraerference to radio comimmication, are designed to provide reasonable protecticr:against harmful interferfnce when the Operation of this ecuipment it a residential area is likely to cause harmful in terterence equipment s operated in a conunercia!environment.'''h s equipment;venerates,uses, n,which case the user will be required to correct the ieterference at his own expense. D690-03-00 l [.56--2769-()()7R "2008 Svstem Sensor j July 7,2000 DN-1109•E-200 NOTIFIER P-S-Series;B:atteriesy FIRE SYSTEMS ` Section: Power Supplies i GENERAL Power-Sonic PS Series batteries provide secondary power for the whole series of NOTIFIER fire alarm control panels. ,, FEATURES t V` • Provide secondary power for control panels. LISTED • Gelled electrolyte. • MH14328(S) Sealed and maintenance-free. P • Overcharge protected. • Extended shelf life. • Easy handling with leakproof construction. • Ruggedly constructed, high-impact case (ABS, polystyrene, or polypropylene depending on model). • Long service life. • Compact design. CAPACITY Battery capacity,expressed in ampere-hours(AH),is the product of a discharge current and the length of time that the current is dis- charged. Batteries are rated according to their performance during 20 hours of discharge at a constant current. The rated capacity of a battery is determined by subjecting it to a constant discharge current for 20 hours at 68°F (20°C). After 20 hours the voltage across the terminals is measured.The discharge current which causes a reading of 1.72 volts per cell(5.16 V on a 6 .11 SEALED RECHARGEABLE V battery and 10.32 V on a 12 V battery)is called the rated current. BATTERY This current multiplied by 20 is the rated capacity of the battery. APPLICATIONS Model PS-695 6 Volt .9.5 AH Use the PS Series batteries to provide backup power for control Power-Sonic Corporation panels. Select batteries based on current requirements for your system and the capacity of its charger. These batteries can be used over a temperature range of-76°F to +140°F(-60°C to+60°C). CONSTRUCTION 1 The sealed construction of the Power-Sonic battery allows trouble- free, safe operation in any position. There is no need to add elec- trolyte,as gases generated during overcharge are recombined in a unique"Oxygen Cycle." The battery is sealed,leakproof,and main- tenance-free. The case is of high-impact materials with high resis- tance to chemicals and flammability. The PS-695 Battery' INSTALLATION All panels have space reserved for batteries. See the appropriate panel installation manual for battery size restrictions. Typical inter- connection diagrams are shown in the literature accompanying each control panel. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try tokeep our ��O 007 product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information,contact NOTIFIER. Phone:(203)484-7161 FAX:(203)484-7118 '' � 9Y61NEBINi 8 MANAFAC1181NC N OTI FI E R• One Fire-Lite Place,Northford,Connecticut 06472 DN-1109•07/07/00 — Page 1 of 3 I E o 0 1 ; O HEIGHT 1 BELOW 3.70 t 0.08 inches TOP VIEW :i1 (94±'2 mm) 8 HEIGHT 2 BELOW 3.86 t 0.08 inches (96 t 2 mm) "loll III ' f 1 SEALED RECHARGEABLE BATTERY BB-17:Optional Battery Backbox AL , 14-1/2"W.x 8-1/4" H x 4-3/4" D i SIDE 2 (mm: 368.3 W 209.55 H x 120.65 D) MODEL PS-1270 For remote mounting of two 12-volt r VIEW PS-12180 batteries. 12 VOLT 7.0 AMP. HOUR fi 5.94 t 0.04 inches (151 t 1 mm) 2.56 0.04 inches b (655 t 1 mm) 1109dim 1.tif ' BB-55:Optional Battery Backbox ' 1 See CHG-120 data sheet for details. ii iwvp ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS 6040ontmmt ' The fire control panel shall be equipped with secondary power provided by gelled-electrolyte batteries. The batteries shall be maintenance-free and shall be capable of powering the system in a manner and for a length of time determined by the governing regulations and the authority having jurisdiction. Nominal Discharge DIMENSIONS Capacity Current . Height over i Nominal @ @ Width Depth Height terminal Weight Voltage 20 hr.rate 20 hr.rate 9 MODEL V A.H. mA in. Fm. in. mm. in. mm. in. mm. lbs. kg. PS-695 6 .9.5 475 4.26 108 2.75 70 5.54 141 5.54 141 4.9 2.2 1 PS-1250 12 5.0 250 3.54 90 2.76 70 4.02 102 4.21 '107 4.1 1.9 PS-1270 '12 7.0 325 5.94 151 2.56 65 3.70 94 3.86 98 5.7 2.6 a (`PS=121201 12 12 600 5.94 151 3.86 98 3.70 94 3.86 98 8.8 4.0 PS-12180 12 18 875 7.13 181 2.99 76 ' 6.57 167 6.57 167 12.8 5.8 PS-12250 12 25 1300 6.89 175 6.54 166 4.92 125 4.92 125 18.7 '8.5 PS-12550 12 55 3000 10.25 260 6.60 168 8.20 208 9.45 240 39.71 18.0 PS-121000 12 100 5000 12.00 305 6.60 168 8.20 208' 9.45 240 65.7 29.8 �. Characteristic Discharge Curves '120% Effect of Temperature on Capacity 6.5 13 100% -- -0.1 C 6.0 12 v 80% -- -0.25 C 5.5 11 -0.6C 1. y 5.0 10 ' 0.175C 0.5CI 41 60% .......2C �i 0.25C a 03 4.5 9 0.6C U 40% 4.0 8 20% 3C 2C 1C 0 1 2 3 5 10 2030 60 2'3 5 10 20'30 0% , ' `11099rfttif ' minutes '~hours -20° -10° 0° 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° I Discharge Time @ 20°C(68°F) 1109grf2.wmr.. Temperature(Degrees C.) Page 2 of 3 - DN-1109•07/07/00 1 l PS-121000 RECHARGEABLE BATTERY: APPLICATIONS AND CHARGING CYCLE APPLICATIONS: Limit initial current to 20A. Charge until battery voltage(under charge)reaches 14.40 to 14.70 volts at 68°F(20°C). Hold at 14.40 to 14.70 volts until current drops to approximately 1000 mA. Battery is fully charged under these conditions, and charger should either be disconnected or switched to"float"voltage. "FLOAT" OR "STAND-BY" SERVICE: Hold battery across constant voltage source or 13.50 to 13.80 volts continu- ously. When held at this voltage,the battery will seek its own current level and maintain itself in a fully charged position. NOTE. Due to the self-discharge characteristics of this type of battery, it is imperative that the battery be charged after six to nine months of storage, otherwise permanent loss of capacity might result from sulfation. t 100% k Charging is NOT 90% necessary unless 100%of capacity o is required. i 80% o 5°C Charging before c70% (41 F) use is necessary m to help recover full capacity. tY 60% v Charge may s p 50% fail to restore M 40°C 30°C_ 20°C full capacity. DO NOT 40% (1040 F) (860 F) (680 F) let batteries 3 reach this state. E 0% i ' 0 2 4 6 8 - 10 12 14 16 18 20 Standing Period (Months) PS-121000 14.0 V Shelf-Life Ambient Temperature 20°C (68°F) and Storage 13.0 V rn 12.0 V .. m j 11.0v 10A 5O 75 10.0v 2OA ` Y Y ' 9.0 V 50A PS-121000 Final 100A Discharge + 8.0 V Voltage 200A Characteristics d 1.2 2.4 6 12 24 36 481 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 MINUTES " HOURS i Discharge Time i f i DN-1109•07/07/00 — Page 3 of 3 ti R l 1 Applicant ID No: 100567-937 U� Underwriters Laboratories Inc.e, Service Center No 0 Northbrook,IL San Jose,cA Expires: 31-MAR-2012 Melville,NY A not-for-profit organization dedicated to public safety and committed to quality service _ CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE THIS IS TO CERTIFY that the Alarm Service Company indicated below is included by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.(UL)in its Product Directories as eligible to use the UL Listing Mark in connection with Certificated Alarm Systems. The only evidence of compliance with UL's requirements is the issuance of a .UL Certificate for the Alarm System and the Certificate is current under UL's Certificate Verification Service. This Certificate does not apply in any way to the communication channel between the protected property and any facility that monitors signals from the protected property unless the use of a UL listed or Classified Alarm Transport Company is specified on the Certificate. Listed Service From: DAVIE, FL (DAVIE) Alarm Service Company: (268496-0011 Service Center:.(268496-001) CHUBB FIRE&SECURITY L L C CHUBB FIRE&SECURITY L L C SUITE 1004 SUITE 1004 3921 SW 47TH AVE 3921 SW 47TH AVE DAVIE FL 33314 DAVIE FL 33314 The Alarm Service Company is Listed in the following Certificate Service Categories: File-Vol No. CCN Listing Catggory r BP10256-1 CRZH [Burglar Alarm Systems] National Industrial Security Systems $70811 -1 UUFX [Signal and Fire Alarm Equipment and Services](Protective Signaling Services)Central Station V 1 ***THIS CERTIFICATE EXPIRES ON 31-MAR-2012 **'' "LOOK FOR THE UL ALARM SYSTEM CERTIFICATE" � Engineering h,'anager ; n�l - .. . .. ... ..- ..._ 22-JUL-2011 �f 3t}J' ... �..7 s T ,�q. / .y - •; . / �w.,. , ,• 1 - ) r r.l. ;11 r 7 r, .i � Miry t e. rr - [ i-I' x- :%.i Y 11..y:r t o 1 9 Y K .I,_ f t i'T F _